DMS100 Feature Descrition V1 PDF

297-1001-801i
DMS-100 Family
DMS-100i
Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3
BCS44.1i Standard 09.01 January 2000

DMS-100 Family
DMS-100i
Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3
Publication number: 297-1001-801i

Product release: BCS44.1i
Document release: Standard 09.01
Date: January 2000
Copyright  1994–2000 Nortel Networks,

All Rights Reserved
Printed in the United States of America
NORTEL NETWORKS CONFIDENTIAL: The information contained herein is the property of Nortel Networks and is
strictly confidential. Except as expressly authorized in writing by Nortel Networks, the holder shall keep all information
contained herein confidential, shall disclose the information only to its employees with a need to know, and shall protect the
information, in whole or in part, from disclosure and dissemination to third parties with the same degree of care it uses to
protect its own confidential information, but with no less than reasonable care. Except as expressly authorized in writing by
Nortel Networks, the holder is granted no rights to use the information contained herein.
Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design or components
as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant.
Changes or modification to the DMS-100i without the express consent of Nortel Networks may void its warranty and void the
users authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated
in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
NORTEL NETWORKS, the NORTEL NETWORKS LOGO, the GLOBEMARK, HOW THE WORLD SHARES IDEAS, UNIFIED
NETWORKS, DMS, MAP, NORTEL, NORTHERN TELECOM, NT, TOPS, and SUPERNODE are trademarks of Nortel
Networks.
DMS-100 Family DMS100i Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i

iii
Publication history
January 2000
BCS44.1i Standard 09.01
March 1999
BCS44i Standard 08.01
December 1997
Updated to reflect BCS43i software.
November 1996
July 1996
October 1995
BCS40i Preliminary 04.01
March 1995
September 1994
April 1994
Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i

v
Contents
Feature Description Manual
Volume 1 of 3
About this document xxi

When to use this document xxi
How to identify the software in your office xxi
How this document is organized xxii
Summary table xxii
Feature package descriptions xxiii
Feature descriptions xxiii
Cross-reference tables xxiii
How reference documentation is organized xxiv
Feature impact summary table 1–1

Feature descriptions 2–1
NER500AA –1 TA0262 –25
CIS Signaling –1 TA0263 –26
TA0129 –4 TA0286 –27
TA0130 –5 TA0295 –28
TA0131 –6 TA0296 –29
TA0135 –7 TA0308 –30
TA0136 –8 TA0311 –31
TA0137 –9 TA0312 –32
TA0176 –10 TA0313 –34
TA0203 –12 TA0315 –36
TA0207 –13 TA0317 –37
TA0213 –14 TA0335 –38
TA0214 –16 TA0336 –39
TA0215 –17 TA0337 –40
TA0241 –18 TA0338 –41
TA0242 –19 TA0339 –42
TA0254 –20 TA0357 –43
TA0255 –22 TA0358 –45
TA0257 –23 TA0440 –46
TA0259 –24 TA0441 –48

vi Contents
TA0442 –50 AJ0194 –54

TA0443 –51 AJ0729 –55
TA0445 –53 AJ1957 –56
NER501AA –1 AJ1959 –57
CIS ISUP –1 AL0479 –58
TA0436 –2 AL0914 –59
TA0437 –4 AL1052 –60
TA0438 –5 AL1149 –62
TA0439 –7 AL1518 –63
NET110AA –1 AL2319 –65
NETAS custom calling AL2417 –66
features –1 AN0100 –67
TA0370 –2 AQ0841 –69
AR0225 –70
NTX000AA –1
NC0086 –71
Bilge –1
NC0130 –72
AL1274 –2
NC0196 –73
AL2044 –4
TA0347 –74
AL2110 –5
39005679 –75
NTX001AA –1
NTX041AB –1
Common Basic –1
CCS7—MTP SCCP –1
AD2997 –13
AL2334 –4
AF1749 –16
AF1780 –17 NTX044AA –1
AF2013 –19 Central Automatic
AF2470 –21 Message Accounting
AF2531 –22 (CAMA) –1
AF2532 –24 TA0167 –2
AF2705 –25 NTX048AA –1
AF2815 –27 Synchronization –1
AF2816 –29 AQ0777 –2
AG0724 –31 NTX054AA –1
AG0919 –32 Line Test Position
AG1082 –33 (LTP)–1
AG1474 –35 AL0944 –2
AG1818 –36 NTX056AA –1
AG1824 –37 E n h a n c e d
AG1868 –38 Administration–1
AG1869 –39 AG1524 –2
AG1922 –40 NTX060AB –1
AG1924 –41 Network Management –1
AG1925 –42 AF2087 –2
AG1927 –43
NTX066AB –1
AG2108 –45
Bilingual Interface –1
AG2149 –46
NC0102 –2
AG2150 –47
AG2255 –48 NTX074AA –1
AG2276 –50 Disk Data Storage
AG2277 –51 System –1
AG2323 –52 AG1004 –3
AJ0191 –53 AL1885 –5
297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

Contents vii
AR0127 –6 NC0322 –48

TA0288 –7 TA0195 –49
NTX136AA –1 TA0196 –50
Automatic transmission TA0273 –51
measuring system –1 NTX274AA –1
39005665 –3 DTC 30 Carrier
NTX167AB –1 Maintenance –1
CCS7—TrunkSignaling AE1056 –2
–1 NTX470AA –1
AR0114 –4 International Common
TA0194 –5 Basic –1
NTX244AB –1 AC0081 –4
Enhanced Sequential AC0109 –5
Trunk Hunting –1 AC0184 –6
AF1252 –2 AC0304 –7
NTX270AA –1 AE0554 –9
New Peripheral AE0643 –10
Maintenance AE0646 –11
Package –1 AE0652 –12
AF1647 –5 AG0719 –13
AF1747 –6 AG1031 –14
AF2583 –8 AJ0171 –16
AF2987 –9 AJ0183 –17
AF2988 –11 AJ0187 –18
AF2989 –12 AJ0580 –19
AF3053 –13 AJ0746 –21
AF3086 –15 AJ0821 –22
AF3179 –17 AJ0837 –23
AF3200 –18 AJ0837 –23
AF3234 –19 AJ1027 –24
AF3271 –20 AJ1088 –25
AF3684 –21 AJ1126 –26
AF3685 –22 AJ1129 –27
AF3747 –23 AJ1223 –28
AF5006 –24 BC0962 –29
AF5007 –26 BC1060 –30
AF5008 –29 BC1185 –31
AJ0338 –32 BC1190 –32
AJ0964 –33 BC1211 –33
AJ0965 –34 BC1301 –34
AJ1038 –35 BC1338 –35
AJ1039 –36 BC1338 –35
AL1460 –38 BC1914 –36
AL2416 –40 BC1920 –37
AN0336 –41 BC1927 –38
AN0337 –42 BC2285 –39
AR0086 –43 BF0375 –40
NC0033 –44 BF0376 –41
NC0105 –45 BF0379 –42
NC0108 –46 BF0393 –43

viii Contents
BF0394 –44 BC1730 –25

BF0395 –45 BC1732 –26
BF0398 –46 BC1784 –27
BF0399 –47 BC1793 –28
BF0436 –48 BC1796 –29
BF0437 –49 BC2079 –30
BF0474 –50 BC2324 –31
BF0560 –51 BF0675 –32
BF0805 –52 BF0801 –33
BF0874 –53 BR0043 –34
BF0915 –54 BR0750 –35
BF0917 –55 BV0061 –36
BF0971 –56 BV0062 –37
BV1211 –57 BV0063 –38
BV1212 –58 TA0128 –39
TA0163 –59 TA0382 –40
TA0165 –60 NTX474AA –1
TA0166 –61 International Base
39005646 –62 Metering –1
NTX471AA –1 AC0053 –3
A-law Companding –1 AC0054 –4
BC1060 –2 AE0056 –5
BF0375 –3 AE0292 –6
BF0376 –4 AG1466 –7
BF0379 –5 AG1476 –8
NTX472AB –1 AG1477 –9
International–Local AG1478 –10
Basic–1 AG1479 –11
AC0085 –3 AJ0570 –13
AC0130 –4 AJ0571 –14
AC0137 –5 AJ0573 –15
AC0252 –7 AJ0866 –17
AC0305 –8 AJ2931 –18
AE0246 –9 AL0218 –19
AE0459 –10 BC1058 –20
AE0538 –11 BC1758 –22
AG0085 –12 BC1760 –23
AG0718 –13 BC1905 –24
AJ0817 –14 BF0677 –25
AJ0818 –15 BF0711 –26
AJ1541 –16 BF0780 –27
AL0054 –17 BV1207 –28
BC0829 –18 BV1208 –29
BC0963 –19 BV1277 –31
BC1449 –20 39005675 –32
BC1450 –21 NTX475AA –1
BC1499 –22 Turkish Trunk
BC1500 –23 Transmission
BC1504 –24 Testing–1

Contents ix
BC1192 –2 NTX482BA –1
BC1193 –3 CEP Line Card
NTX476AA –1 Diagnostics –1
Wink-1 Line Signaling –1 AE0278 –2
BC1188 –2 NTX482CA –1
BF0565 –3 China Line Card
NTX477AA –1 Diagnostics –1
Delay Dial-1 Signaling –1 AG0827 –2
BC1187 –2 AJ1496 –3
BF0564 –3 NTX483AB –1
NTX478AA –1 International 101
CCITT PCM (30+2) Communication Test
Digital Signaling and Line –1
Maintenance –1 AE0005 –2
AE0480 –2 AE0250 –3
AE0777 –3 AJ1031 –4
BC1076 –5 BC1191 –5
BC1340 –7 BC2076 –7
BF0392 –8 BC2078 –8
BF0430 –9 NTX484AA –1
BF0432 –10 Malicious Call
BF0433 –11 Trace–International
BF0978 –12 Toll/Transit –1
NTX479AA –1 BC1496 –2
International Universal TA0279 –3
Tone Receiver NTX485AA –1
Support –1 International–Call
BC1766 –2 P r o c e s s i n g
BF0396 –3 System–1
BF0434 –4 BC1301 –2
NTX480AA –1 BC1927 –5
Turkish Tone Plan –1 BF0399 –6
BC1186 –2 BF0805 –7
NTX481AA –1 BF0915 –8
Turkish Operator NTX486AA –1
Sw i t c h b o a r d MF-3 Register
Signaling –1 Signaling–1
BC1339 –2 BC1189 –2
BF0679 –3 BF0567 –3
NTX482AB –1 NTX487AA –1
Turkish Line Card Malicious Call
Diagnostics –1 Trace–International
AG0095 –2 Local –1
BC1337 –3 AG0709 –2
BF0684 –4 BF0674 –5

x Contents
NTX487AB –1 NTX499AA –1
Malicious Call CEPT Subscriber
Trace–International Services–I –1
Local –1 AC0082 –3
TA0138 –2 AC0083 –5
TA0139 –4 AC0086 –7
TA0168 –6 AC0133 –8
NTX488AA –1 AC0134 –10
International Time of Day AC0135 –12
Routing –1 AC0136 –13
BC1498 –2 AE0239 –16
BC1825 –3 AE0240 –19
BV1136 –4 AE0242 –22
NTX489AA –1 AE0248 –24
Visa Switchboard AE0249 –26
Interface (Turkey) –1 AG0962 –28
BC1520 –2 AG1540 –29
BF0680 –3 AJ0563 –30
AJ1432 –32
NTX492AA –1
BC2053 –33
Operator Toll Break-In –1
BC2077 –35
AE0244 –2
BC2260 –36
AE0245 –4
BC2261 –39
TA0178 –6
TA0229 –41
TA0179 –7
TA0325 –45
TA0180 –8
TA0326 –46
NTX493AA –1 TA0327 –47
Administrative Call
NTX650AA –1
Diversion Features–1
TS16 Signaling for R1 –1
BC2049 –2
AE0034 –2
NTX494AA –1
NTX652AA –1
Automatic Call
Intraswitching on the
Recording–1
IRLCM –1
BC2050 –2
AE0108 –2
BC2074 –4
AE0178 –3
BF0976 –5
NTX495AA –1 NTX653AA –1
IRLCM–Emergency
TS16 Signaling for Loop
Stand Alone (ESA)–1
Disconnect –1
AE0216 –2
BF0867 –2
TA0240 –3
BF0881 –3
BV1987 –4 NTX655AA –1
BV1988 –5 E & M Signaling in
TS16–1
NTX496AA –1
AE0025 –2
Gateway Access –1
AE0059 –2 NTX656AA –1
BC2059 –3 CEP Tone Plan –1
BF0870 –4 BF0869 –2
BV1989 –5 NTX657AA –1
International CAMA –1

Contents xi
AE0147 –2 NTX668AA –1
39005622 –4 Insert Tone on Coin
NTX660AA –1 Phone Termination–1
International Feature AE0057 –2
P r o c e s s i n g NTX669AA –1
Environment International Network
(FPE)–Basic –1 Management –1
BC2286 –2 AC0132 –2
NTX662AA –1 NTX738AC –1
Emergency Cut-off –1 Switch Performance
BC2081 –2 Monitoring System–1
NTX664AA –1 AG1926 –2
OMs in Erlangs –1 AL1719 –3
AE0033 –2 NTX750AC –1
AE0943 –3 ISDN Basic Access –1
BC2060 –4 AL1674 –6
NTX665AA –1 AL2539 –9
Semi-permanent AL2541 –10
Connections– AL2542 –11
Basic –1 AL2726 –12
AC0256 –2 AQ0788 –13
BC2080 –4 AQ0789 –15
NTX666AA –1 AQ0882 –16
Semi-permanent AQ0884 –17
Connections– NTX885AB –1
Local–1 Switch Path
AC0256 –2 Diagnostics–1
BC2080 –4 AG1214 –2
NTX667AA –1 AJ0473 –3
Printed Meter Check –1 AL1566 –4
AE0055 –2

Volume 2 of 3
NTX901AA –1 AG1973 –20

Local Features I –1 AJ1224 –21
AD0943 –8 AL1541 –22
AF0966 –9 AL1608 –23
AF1439 –10 AR0491 –24
AF1756 –13 NC0020 –25
AF2565 –14 NC0313 –26
AF2599 –15 NC0495 –28
AF2668 –16 TA0289 –29
AG0649 –17 NTX904AA –1
AG1318 –18 R2 Signaling Base –1
AG1854 –19 AE0142 –3

xii Contents
AE0146 –5 AL1782 –25

AE1245 –7 AL1826 –26
AG1217 –9 AL1884 –27
AG1218 –10 AL1968 –28
AG1220 –11 AL2021 –29
AJ0159 –13 AL2030 –30
AJ0205 –14 AL2331 –31
AJ1028 –17 AQ0721 –32
AJ2411 –19 AQ0741 –33
TA0165 –20 AQ0834 –34
TA0201 –21 AQ0854 –35
TA0320 –22 AQ0859 –36
TA0331 –23 AR0211 –37
TA0383 –24 NTX942AA –1
NTX909AA –1 SuperNode System Load
ANI Toll –1 Module –1
AE0115 –2 AG1385 –2
NTX910AA –1 AL1060 –3
ANI Local –1 AL1166 –4
AE0116 –2 AL1298 –5
NTX940AA –1 NTX942AB –1
CM Bilge –1 DMS – SuperNode
AL1109 –2 System Load
AL1718 –3 Module–1
AL1923 –5 AL1790 –2
AL2042 –7 NTX944AA –1
AL2328 –8 Base Node
AR0160 –9 Maintenance–1
NTX941AA –1 AR0079 –2
CM Common –1 AR0081 –3
AG2480 –3 NTX945AA –1
AI0625 –4 MS Base Link
AI0630 –5 Maintenance –1
AL0797 –6 AC0639 –2
AL0803 –7 AC0644 –4
AL1053 –9 AG1337 –5
AL1054 –10 AL1456 –6
AL1055 –11 AL1457 –8
AL1182 –12 AL1476 –9
AL1183 –13 AL1477 –10
AL1192 –14 AL1478 –11
AL1193 –15 AL1479 –12
AL1197 –16 AL1482 –13
AL1200 –17 AL1779 –14
AL1201 –18 AL1780 –15
AL1480 –19 AL1781 –16
AL1570 –20 AQ0717 –17
AL1681 –21 AQ0718 –18
AL1753 –22 AQ0840 –19
AL1759 –23 AQ0854 –20

Contents xiii
NTX950AA –1 NTXB04AA –1
MS Bilge –1 PBX Line Support –1
AC0638 –2 AE0169 –2
AL0787 –3 NTXB05AA –1
AL0790 –4 ITOPS Common Basic–1
NTX951AA –1 AJ1257 –2
MS Common –1 NTXB07AA –1
AC0639 –2 Inter Administration
AL1199 –4 Accounting –1
AL1456 –5 AE0154 –2
AQ0835 –7 NTXB08AA –1
AQ0858 –8 ITOPS for CEP –1
NTX980AA –1 AG0717 –2
International Trunk Test NTXB10AA –1
Position (ITTP) –1 China Common Basic –1
BC0158 –2 AG0707 –2
BC0490 –3 AG0708 –3
BC0495 –4 AG0711 –4
BC0693 –5 AJ0782 –5
BC0858 –6 AJ0796 –9
BC1259 –8 AJ0819 –11
BR0176 –10 AL2529 –12
BR0200 –11
NTXB11AA –1
BR0201 –12
DP Register Signaling –1
BR0223 –13
AG0707 –2
BV0041 –15
AJ0498 –3
NTXA66AA –1 NTXB12AA –1
Enhanced Office
ITOPS Local Basic –1
Recovery –1
AC0240 –2
AJ0192 –2
AJ0474 –3 NTXB13AB –1
ITOPS Toll–Enhanced
NTXB00AA –1
Queueing –1
International Traffic
AG0636 –3
Separation –1
AG0712 –5
AC0131 –2
AG0713 –6
NTXB01AA –1 AG0714 –8
International Traffic AG0715 –9
Separation Report –1 AG0716 –10
AC0131 –2 AG1230 –13
NTXB02AA –1 AG1233 –14
International Service AG1234 –16
Analysis–Basic –1 AJ0178 –17
AE0153 –2 AJ0180 –19
NTXB03AA –1 AJ0182 –20
S e r v i c e AJ0572 –21
Analysis–Local–1 AJ0801 –22
AE0167 –2 AJ0802 –25
AJ0803 –27

xiv Contents
AJ0804 –28 AJ1256 –11

AJ1024 –29 AJ1445 –12
NTXB14AA –1 AJ1446 –14
China Local Basic –1 NTXE01AA –1
AG0710 –2 E n h a n c e d
AL2528 –5 Network—Basic –1
NTXB17AA –1 AL0573 –3
Attendant Pay Station AL0856 –5
Local –1 AL0857 –6
AG1291 –2 AL0957 –7
NTXB21AA –1 AL0958 –8
Co-existence (Trunk AL0959 –9
Type) –1 AL0960 –10
AE0481 –2 AL1230 –11
AE0523 –3 AL2038 –12
AL2107 –13
NTXB22AA –1
AL2162 –14
OM Enhancements –1
AL2260 –16
AE1240 –2
AR0005 –17
AL2530 –4
AR0141 –18
AL2549 –6
AR0186 –20
AL2720 –8
TA392 –21
NTXB69AA –1
NTXE29AA –1
R2 for DMS-100
BCS Process
International –1
Enhanced–1
AE0139 –2
AG1506 –2
AE0140 –3
AG1511 –3
AE0171 –4
AG1513 –4
AE0172 –5
AG1560 –5
AE0173 –6
AG1563 –6
AE0514 –7
AG1570 –7
AE0893 –8
AJ1124 –10 NTXE54AA –1
SLM II Enhancements –1
NTXB75AA –1
AL1174 –2
Implementation of RMM
on IRLCM –1 NTXF15AA –1
AE0293 –2 DMS-core MC68030 33
MHz Processor –1
NTXB83AA –1
AL0934 –2
ITOPS to International
R2 Interworking –1 NTXF20AA –1
AG1294 –2 LPP on DMS-100
TA0228 –4 SuperNode for
CCS7–1
NTXB84AA –1
AL2334 –3
International Rating
AQ1030 –4
System –1
AQ1031 –5
AG1231 –2
AQ1070 –6
AG1235 –4
AG1236 –6 NTXF70AA –1
AG1237 –8 SuperNode SN-20
AJ1025 –10 Processor –1
BC1826 –2

Contents xv
BC1827 –8 NTXH05AA –1
BC1909 –14 Moroccan Local
BC1932 –16 Signaling –1
BC2003 –17 AE0567 –2
NTXF71AB –1 AE0568 –5
SuperNode Enhanced AE0897 –6
Messaging –1 AE0898 –8
AL1276 –3 AJ0205 –9
AL1277 –4 NTXH06AA –1
AL1278 –5 Moroccan Toll
AL1279 –6 Signaling–1
AL1280 –7 AE0567 –2
AL1281 –8 AE0568 –5
AL1655 –9 AE0897 –6
AL1656 –10 AE0898 –8
AL1657 –11 AJ0205 –9
AL1658 –12 NTXH07AA –1
AL1659 –13 Belize R2 Signaling –1
AL1660 –14 AJ0578 –2
AL1663 –15
NTXH12AA –1
AL1664 –16
ITOPS Enhancements
AL1740 –17
for Japan –1
AL2130 –18
AE0546 –2
AR0124 –19
AR0125 –20 NTXH13AA –1
AR0128 –21 Fixed Duration Calls –1
AR0129 –22 AJ0177 –2
NTXH00AA –1 NTXH16AA –1
Moroccan Tones –1 Estimated Call Charges
AE0448 –2 for ITOPS –1
AJ0181 –2
NTXH01AA –1
Moroccan Line Card NTXH17AA –1
Diagnostics –1 International ATME 2 for
AE0513 –2 International
AE0536 –3 DMS-100/200I –1
AJ0832 –2
NTXH02AA –1
Moroccan Physical NTXH18AA –1
Ringing –1 International China
AE0515 –2 TUP –1
AQ1107 –3
NTXH03AA –1
TA0124 –4
Socotel Base
TA0125 –6
Signaling–1
TA0126 –7
AE0567 –2
TA0127 –8
AE0568 –4
TA0132 –9
NTXH04AA –1 TA0162 –10
CCITT 2-Bit Line TA0183 –12
Signaling –1 TA0193 –13
AE0514 –2 TA0222 –14
TA0223 –15

xvi Contents
TA0224 –17 NTXH70AA –1

TA0280 –18 C7 Support for
TA0281 –19 Ch a n n e l i z e d
TA0381 –20 Access–1
TA0413 –22 AI0407 –2
TA0414 –24 AL1929 –3
TA0415 –26 NTXH71AA –1
TA0423 –28 ITOPS Intrusion Tones–1
TA0424 –30 AJ0179 –2
TA0427 –32
NTXH77AA –1
NTXH19AA –1 Channelized Access on
CTUP Local –1 LPP/LIS –1
TA0158 –2 AI0408 –2
TA0182 –3 AI0409 –3
TA0225 –5 AI0410 –4
TA0226 –6
NTXH79AA –1
TA0422 –7
Brazil Signaling –1
NTXH22AA –1 AJ1124 –2
International Local
NTXH80AA –1
Metering –1
Mexico Signaling –1
AC0054 –2
AJ1124 –2
AE0056 –3
AJ1423 –4
AE0292 –4
BV1277 –5 NTXH95AA –1
M e t e r i n g
NTXH23AA –1
Enhancements–1
Metering Over Junction
AE0838 –2
(MOJ) –1
AJ0581 –2 NTXK12AA –1
AJ0851 –6 Irish R2 Signaling
Protocol –1
NTXH54AA –1
AE0630 –2
ITOPS–Account Code
Access –1 NTXK13AA –1
AJ1026 –2 Irish Downloadable
AJ1255 –4 Tones –1
AE0397 –2
NTXH58AA –1
AE0671 –4
Guyana R2 Signaling –1
AJ1265 –2 NTXK70AA –1
Peru Signaling –1
NTXH60AA –1
AJ1872 –2
Morocco ITOPS Trunk
Interworking –1 NTXK71AA –1
AE0735 –2 Haiti Signaling –1
AE0972 –2

Contents xvii
NTXK72AA –1 TA0134 –3
A-Bit Pulse Line TA0195 –4
Signaling –1 TA0196 –5
AL2457 –2 NTXN83AA –1
TA0163 –4 LIS Common—LMS
NTXK73AA –1 Functionality on
DMS-100I Terminator MS–1
Billing –1 AL1453 –2
AJ1791 –2 AR0478 –3
NTXK79AA –1 NTXP10AA –1
PCM Unified Processor Dual-shelf Network –1
(UP) Support –1 AL2055 –2
AE1007 –2 NTXP44AA –1
AJ1898 –3 DMS SuperNode SE
AJ1899 –4 Common –1
TA0174 –5 AQ0857 –2
NTXK79AD –1 NTXP72AA –1
PCM30 Unified Integrated Network
Processor Support–1 Support on SN-1 –1
TA0133 –2 AR0105 –2

Volume 3 of 3
NTXQ52AA –1 NTXR46AA –1
Support for MS Resident, R o b u s t n e s s
LIS Controller –1 Enhancements –1
AL1455 –2 AL2236 –2
NTXR34AA –1 NTXR72AA –1
XPM Plus (Product Life CCS7—MTP/SCCP for
Upgrade Strategy) L P P - b a s e d
Basic –1 Platforms–1
AF3732 –2 AL2334 –5
AF3733 –3 AR0010 –6
AL2540 –4 AR0117 –7
NTXR34AB –1 AR0118 –8
XPM Plus (Product Line AR0907 –9
Upgrade Strategy) AR0908 –11
Basic –1 AR0909 –13
TA0174 –2 AR0910 –16
NTXR42AA –1 TA0287 –18
Firmware Downloading–1 NTXS72AA –1
AF3658 –2 CC Software Support for
TA0174 –4 EDRAM Uploading–1
AQ0984 –2

xviii Contents
NTXU35AA –1 NTXU63AA –1
DMS-100I Downloadable ISUP on DMS100i –1
Tones –1 TA0386 –2
AE1243 –2 TA0387 –3
TA0140 –3 39005872 –4
TA0141 –4 NTXU64AA –1
TA0175 –5 FRA on DMS100i –1
TA0177 –6 TA0328 –2
NTXU44AA –1 TA0329 –4
Toll Break-in (Local) –1 TA0330 –5
TA0158 –2 NTXU65AA –1
TA0159 –4 NETAS TT features –1
TA0227 –6 TA0371 –2
NTXU45AA –1 TA0372 –3
100i ISUP Base –1 TA0373 –4
TA0169 –2 TA0374 –5
TA0170 –4 TA0375 –7
TA0171 –6 TA0376 –8
TA0172 –8 TA0377 –10
TA0233 –9 TA0378 –12
TA0379 –11 NTXU66AA –1
TA0543 –12 100i 100K Metering –1
39005866 –16 TA0467 –2
NTXU46AA –1 TA0468 –4
100I ISUP Local –1 TA0469 –6
TA0169 –2 TA0470 –8
TA0172 –4 NTXU67AA –1
TA0235 –5 ICAMA Behavior
NTXU47AA –1 Selection –1
China Message Transfer TA0471 –2
Part –1 NTXU68AA –1
AR3026 –2 Turkish Toneset with R2
NTXU49AA –1 and COT –1
Voice Mail –1 TA0474 –2
TA0230 –2 NTXU69AA –1
NTXU51AA –1 100i ETSI PRI –1
ISUP (R2) Variants –1 TA0549 –2
TA0232 –2 TA0550 –4
TA0234 –4 TA0551 –6
NTXU55AA –1 TA0560 –8
Party Line –1 TA0561 –9
TA0274 –2 TA0601 –11
NTXU60AA –1 39005628 –13
ICAMA Enhancement –1 39005643 –15
TA0285 –2 39005649 –17
39005869 –19
NTXU62AA –1
Line Signaling Monitor –1
TA0319 –2

Contents xix
NTXU70AA –1 NTXV16AA –1
Calling Name Chile Signaling –1
Delivery/Blocking –1 AL2632 –2
TA0465 –2 NTXV55AA –1
NTXU71AA –1 AMA and ITOPS Billing
Automatic Call Enhancement –1
Back/Automatic AE1239 –2
Recall –1 NTXW00AA –1
TA0466 –2 World Line Card Base –1
NTXU72AA –1 AE1099 –3
Advice of charge –1 NTXW01AA –1
TA0610 –2 World Line Card Type –1
NTXU81AA –1 AE0946 –2
ETSI BRI –1 AE1099 –3
TA0552 –2 NTXW02AA –1
TA0553 –4 World Line Card Cutover
TA0554 –6 by DN –1
TA0556 –8 AE0956 –2
TA0558 –10 NTXW03AA –1
TA0562 –12 World Line Card
TA0563 –14 O v e r v o l t a g e
TA0564 –16 Report–1
TA0565 –18 AE1013 –2
TA0566 –20
NTXW21AA –1
TA0602 –22
Template for 900+2 for
TA0603 –24
Type 2 –1
TA0614 –28
AE1106 –2
TA0615 –30
39005633 –32 NTXW23AA –1
39005652 –34 WLC Templates for
39005862 –36 Japan, Brazil, Peru,
Poland –1
NTXU84AA –1
TA0216 –2
TT MCT –1
TA0544 –2 NTXZ12AA –1
China ISUP –1
NTXU87AA –1
TA0582 –2
Long Call Check Tool –1
TA0583 –4
TA0510 –2
NTXZ13AA –1
NTXU88AA –1
Calling Number Delivery
TT Toll Features –1
for China –1
TA0532 –2
TA0584 –2
TA0533 –4
NTXZ19AA –1
NTXU90AA –1
IOM –1
ETSI ISUP –1
39005676 –2
39005695 –2
NTXZ20AA –1
NTXV13AA –1
RCO2 –1
China C1 DP Trunk
39005683 –2
Interworking –1
AL2721 –2 Unpackaged Features –1
AL2722 –3 TA0272 –2
TA0353 –3

xx Contents
TA0354 –4 TA0529 –40

TA0355 –5 TA0530 –42
TA0356 –6 TA0531 –44
TA0368 –7 TA0535 –46
TA0473 –8 TA0536 –48
TA0474 –10 TA0537 –50
TA0509 –12 TA0538 –54
TA0511 –14 TA0545 –57
TA0513 –17 TA0546 –59
TA0521 –20 TA0567 –60
TA0522 –22 TA0568 –62
TA0523 –24 TA0597 –64
TA0524 –27 TA0598 –66
TA0525 –29 TA0612 –68
TA0526 –31 TA0617 –70
TA0527 –33 39005876 –72
TA0528 –36
Cross-reference 3–1
Features listed by BCS 3–1
Feature number to feature package and BCS 4–1
Feature package to feature number and BCS 5–1
Feature name to feature number, package, and BCS 6–1

xxi
About this document

This document provides feature information for the DMS-100 switch.
Feature information is intended to help operating company personnel to
prepare for insertion of a new BCS load, or to understand elements of the
software. Operating company personnel involved in planning and
engineering or in maintenance activities will find this document useful.
When to use this document

Northern Telecom (NT) software releases are referred to as batch change
supplements (BCS) and are identified by a number, such as BCS34. This
document is written for DMS-100 Family offices that have BCS44.1i. This
version of the Feature Description Manual includes descriptions of both
feature packages and features that were introduced in this BCS as well as
those changed in this BCS.
More than one version of this document may exist. The version and issue
are indicated throughout the document, for example, 01.01. The first two
digits increase by one each time the document content is changed to support
new BCS-related developments. For example, the first release of a
document is 01.01, and the next release of the document in a subsequent
BCS is 02.01. The second two digits increase by one each time a document
is revised and rereleased for the same BCS. The Feature Description
Manual is issued twice in each BCS: a Preliminary issue and a Standard
issue. The Standard issue corrects and replaces all information in the
Preliminary issue for the same BCS, but it does not replace all of the content
of Standard versions from previous BCSs. When you receive the Standard
issue of the Feature Description Manual for BCS44.1i you should discard
the Preliminary issue for BCS44.1i, but do not discard other Standard
versions from previous BCSs.
To determine which version of this document applies to the BCS in your
office, check the release information in DMS-100 Family Guide to Northern
Telecom Publications, 297-1001-001.
How to identify the software in your office

The Office Feature Record (D190) identifies the current BCS level and the
NT feature packages in your switch. You can list a specific feature package

xxii About this document
or patch on the MAP (maintenance and administration position) terminal by

typing
>PATCHER;INFORM LIST identifier
and pressing the Enter key.

where
identifier is the number of the feature package or patch ID
You can identify your current BCS level and print a list of all the feature
packages and patches in your switch by performing the following steps.
First, direct the terminal response to the desired printer by typing
>SEND printer_id

where
printer_id is the number of the printer where you want to print the data
Then, print the desired information by typing
>PATCHER;INFORM LIST;LEAVE

Finally, redirect the display back to the terminal by typing
>SEND PREVIOUS
How this document is organized

This document consists of descriptions of feature packages and features.
Several supporting sections are also included.
Summary table
The “Feature impact summary table” that begins on page 1–1 indicates, for
each feature, whether information exists under the following headings:
Hardware requirements, Pack diagnostic specifics, Restrictions and
limitations, Feature interactions, Datafill, Service orders, Operational
measurements, Logs, User interface, and Automatic message accounting.
This table provides an overview of the information available in this
document for each feature in the current software release and all those
documented in previous versions of the Feature Description Manual.

About this document xxiii
Feature package descriptions

Feature package descriptions are arranged in alphanumeric order according
to package number. Numbers precede letters in the alphanumeric order; for
example, package NTX901AA comes before NTXA00AB. Each feature
package originating in BCS28 or later is briefly described. The BCS in
which the package was created is given under the heading “BCS history.” A
table entitled “Feature package contents” lists the current contents of the
feature package, which may include features added in various BCSs. A
table entitled “Required feature packages” lists the feature packages that are
required for the package to function.
Each feature package description is followed by a description of each feature
added to the package in BCS44.1i. Note that a feature may occur in more
than one package. To relate a feature number to its feature package
number(s), see the cross-reference tables at the end of this document.
Feature descriptions
Each feature is briefly described. The BCS in which the feature originated is
given under the heading “BCS history.” In some cases, this section indicates
that a feature originated in a previous BCS has been changed for this BCS.
The following sections are included if they apply to the feature described:
• Hardware requirements
• Pack diagnostic specifics
• Restrictions and limitations
• Feature interactions
• Datafill
• Service orders
• Operational measurements
• Logs
• User interface
• Automatic message accounting
If one of the sections listed above is absent from an individual feature

description, the section does not apply to that feature.
Cross-reference tables
The following cross-reference tables are located at the end of the document:
• features listed by BCS
• feature number to feature package and BCS
• feature package to feature number and BCS

xxiv About this document
• feature name to feature number, package, and BCS
How reference documentation is organized

The Feature Description Manual is part of reference documentation that
supports the Northern Telecom line of DMS-100 Family products.
Reference documentation is a subset of the DMS-100 Family library.
Reference documentation consists of the following documents.
Number Title
297-1001-451i Customer Data Schema

297-1001-119 Automatic Message Accounting—Northern Telecom Format
297-1001-455i Office Parameters Reference Manual
297-1001-805 Hardware Description Reference Manual
297-1001-814i Operational Measurements Reference Manual
297-1001-820 Nonmenu Commands Reference Manual
297-1001-821 Menu Commands Reference Manual
297-1001-840i Log Report Reference Manual
297-2101–808i SERVORD Service Order and Query System Reference
Manual

1–1
Feature impact summary table

This table provides an overview of the information available for each
feature, and how it affects the DMS environment. The table shows all
features in the current software release and all those documented in previous
versions of the Feature Description Manual.
The features are listed in the left column in alphanumeric order by feature
package, and Ys are placed in the various columns across the page to show
what is affected by that feature. For example, a Y in the FI column indicates
that the feature interacts with another feature, and further details are
available in the “Feature interactions” section of the feature description.
Note that the six columns on the right side of the table (D to AMA) relate
both to sections within the feature description and to other DMS-100
reference manuals. For example, a Y in the UI column indicates that the
feature modifies the user interface. Overview details are presented in the
“User interface” section of the feature description, and further details can be
found in either Nonmenu Commands Reference Manual, 297-1001-820 or
Menu Commands Reference Manual, 297-1001-821. Other DMS-100
reference manuals are listed on p. xxiv in “About this document”.
Feature information available

Package HR PDS R&L FI D SO OM L UI AMA
Feature
NER500AA
TA0129 Y Y
TA0130 Y Y Y
TA0131 Y Y Y
TA0135 Y Y
TA0136 Y Y Y
TA0137 Y Y Y
HR = Hardware requirements PDS = Pack diagnostics specifics R&L = Restrictions and limitations FI = Feature interactions
D = Datafill SO = Service orders OM = Operational measurements L = Logs UI = User interface AMA = Automatic
message accounting
—continued—

1–2 Feature impact summary table
Feature information available (continued)

Feature
TA0176 Y Y Y
TA0203 Y Y
TA0207 Y
TA0213 Y Y Y Y
TA0214 Y Y
TA0215 Y
TA0241 Y
TA0242 Y Y Y
TA0254 Y Y
TA0255 Y
TA0257 Y Y
TA0259 Y
TA0262 Y Y
TA0263 Y
TA0286 Y
TA0295 Y Y
TA0296 Y
TA0308
TA0311
TA0312 Y Y Y
TA0313 Y Y
TA0315 Y Y
TA0317
TA0335 Y Y Y
TA0336 Y Y
TA0337 Y
TA0338 Y
TA0339 Y
TA0357 Y Y
TA0358 Y
NET110AA
TA0370 Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
NTX000AA
AL1274 Y
AL2037 Y Y
AL2044 Y Y
AL2110 Y Y
NTX001AA
AD2997 Y Y Y Y Y Y
AF1749 Y Y
AF1780 Y Y Y Y Y
AF2013 Y Y Y
AF2470 Y Y Y
AF2531 Y Y Y Y
AF2532 Y Y Y
AF2705 Y Y Y
AF2815 Y Y Y Y
AF2816 Y Y Y Y
AG0724 Y Y Y
AG0919 Y
AG1082 Y Y Y Y
AG1474 Y
AG1818 Y Y Y Y
AG1824 Y Y
AG1868 Y Y Y
AG1869 Y
AG1922 Y
AG1924 Y
AG1925 Y Y
AG1927 Y Y Y
AG2108 Y
AG2149 Y Y Y
AG2150 Y Y Y Y
AG2255 Y Y Y Y Y
AG2276 Y Y Y
AG2277 Y Y Y
AG2323 Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
AJ0191 Y Y Y
AJ0194 Y Y Y Y
AJ0729 Y Y Y
AJ1957 Y Y Y
AJ1959 Y Y Y Y
AL0479 Y Y
AL0914 Y
AL1052 Y Y
AL1149 Y Y Y Y
AL1518 Y Y Y Y
AL2319
AL2417 Y Y
AN0100 Y Y Y Y
AQ0841 Y Y
AR0225 Y Y
NC0086 Y
NC0130 Y
NC0196 Y
TA0347 Y Y
39005679 Y Y Y Y Y Y
NTX041AB
AL2334 Y Y
NTX044AA
TA0167 Y Y Y Y
NTX048AA
AQ0777 Y Y Y Y Y Y
NTX054AA
AL0944 Y Y Y Y Y Y
NTX056AA
AG1524 Y Y Y Y
NTX060AB
AF2087 Y Y Y Y Y
NTX066AB
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
NC0102 Y
NTX074AA
AG1004 Y Y Y Y Y
AL1885
AR0127 Y Y Y
TA0288 Y
NTX136AA
39005665 Y Y Y Y
NTX167AB
AR0114 Y Y Y
TA0194 Y Y Y
NTX244AB
AF1252
NTX270AA
AF1647 Y Y
AF1747 Y Y Y Y Y
AF2583 Y
AF2987 Y Y Y Y Y
AF2988 Y Y Y Y
AF2989 Y Y Y
AF3053 Y Y Y Y
AF3086 Y Y Y Y Y Y
AF3179 Y
AF3200 Y Y Y
AF3234 Y Y Y
AF3271 Y Y Y
AF3684 Y
AF3685 Y Y
AF3747 Y Y Y
AF5006 Y Y Y Y
AF5007 Y Y Y Y
AF5008 Y Y Y Y
AJ0338 Y Y
AJ0964 Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
AJ0965 Y
AJ1038 Y Y
AJ1039 Y Y Y
AL1460 Y Y Y Y
AL2416 Y Y Y Y Y
AN0336
AN0337
AR0086 Y Y Y Y
NC0033 Y Y
NC0105 Y Y Y
NC0108 Y Y Y Y
NC0322 Y Y
TA0195 Y Y Y Y
TA0196 Y Y Y
TA0273 Y Y Y Y Y Y
NTX274AA
AE1056 Y Y
NTX470AA
AC0081 Y Y Y Y
AC0109 Y Y Y
AC0184 Y
AC0304 Y
AE0554 Y Y
AE0643 Y
AE0646 Y Y
AE0652 Y Y
AG0719 Y
AG1031 Y Y Y
AJ0171 Y Y
AJ0183
AJ0187 Y Y Y
AJ0580 Y Y Y Y
AJ0746 Y Y Y
AJ0821
AJ0837 Y Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
AJ1027 Y Y
AJ1088 Y Y
AJ1126 Y Y
AJ1129
AJ1223 Y
BC0962 Y
BC1060 Y
BC1185 Y
BC1190 Y
BC1211
BC1301 Y Y Y Y
BC1338 Y
BC1914 Y
BC1920 Y
BC1927
BC2285 Y
BF0375 Y
BF0376 Y
BF0379 Y
BF0393 Y
BF0394
BF0395
BF0398
BF0399
BF0436 Y
BF0437 Y
BF0474
BF0560 Y
BF0805 Y
BF0874 Y
BF0915 Y Y
BF0917 Y Y
BF0971 Y
BV1211 Y
BV1212 Y Y
TA0163 Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
TA0165 Y Y Y
TA0166 Y Y Y Y
39005646 Y Y
NTX471AA
BC1060 Y
BF0375 Y
BF0376 Y
BF0379 Y
NTX472AB
AC0085 Y Y Y
AC0130 Y Y Y
AC0137 Y
AC0252 Y Y Y
AC0305 Y
AE0246 Y Y Y
AE0459 Y Y
AE0538
AG0085 Y
AG0718
AJ0817
AJ0818 Y
AJ1541 Y
AL0054 Y Y Y
BC0829
BC0963
BC1449 Y Y
BC1450 Y
BC1499 Y Y
BC1500 Y Y
BC1504 Y Y
BC1730 Y
BC1732 Y
BC1784 Y Y
BC1793 Y Y
BC1796 Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
BC2079 Y Y
BC2324
BF0675 Y Y
BF0801 Y
BR0043 Y
BR0750 Y Y
BV0061 Y
BV0062 Y
BV0063 Y
TA0128 Y Y Y
NTX474AA
AC0053 Y Y Y Y
AC0054 Y Y Y Y Y
AE0056 Y
AE0292 Y Y Y Y
AG1466 Y
AG1476 Y
AG1477 Y Y Y
AG1478 Y
AG1479 Y Y Y Y
AJ0570 Y
AJ0571 Y Y Y Y
AJ0573 Y Y Y
AJ0866 Y Y
AJ2931 Y Y
AL0218 Y
BC1058 Y Y Y Y Y
BC1758 Y Y Y
BC1760 Y Y Y
BC1905 Y Y Y
BF0677
BF0711 Y
BF0780 Y
BV1207 Y Y
BV1208 Y Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
BV1277 Y Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
NTX475AA
BC1192 Y Y Y Y
BC1193 Y Y Y Y
NTX476AA
BC1188 Y Y Y
BF0565 Y
NTX477AA
BC1187 Y
BF0564
NTX478AA
AE0480 Y Y Y
AE0777 Y Y Y Y Y Y
BC1076 Y Y Y Y Y Y
BC1340 Y
BF0392 Y Y
BF0430 Y
BF0432
BF0433 Y
BF0978 Y Y
NTX479AA
BC1766
BF0396
BF0434 Y
NTX480AA
BC1186 Y
NTX481AA
BC1339 Y Y
BF0679 Y Y
NTX482AB
AG0095 Y Y Y Y
BC1337 Y Y Y
BF0684 Y Y Y Y Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
NTX482BA
AE0278 Y Y Y Y
NTX482CA
AG0827 Y Y Y Y
AJ1496 Y Y Y
NTX483AB
AE0005 Y Y
AE0250 Y
AJ1031 Y
BC1191 Y Y Y Y
BC2076 Y Y
BC2078 Y
NTX484AA
BC1496 Y Y Y Y
TA0279 Y Y Y
NTX485AA
BC1301 Y Y Y Y
BC1927
BF0399
BF0805 Y
BF0915 Y Y
NTX486AA
BC1189 Y Y
BF0567
NTX487AA
AG0709 Y Y Y Y
BF0674 Y Y Y
NTX487AB
TA0138 Y
TA0139 Y Y
TA0168 Y Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
NTX488AA
BC1498 Y Y
BC1825 Y Y
BV1136 Y Y Y
NTX489AA
BC1520 Y Y
BF0680 Y Y Y
NTX492AA
AE0244 Y Y Y Y
AE0245 Y Y Y
TA0178 Y Y Y
TA0179 Y Y Y
TA0180 Y Y Y Y
NTX493AA
BC2049 Y Y Y Y Y Y
NTX494AA
BC2050 Y Y Y Y
BC2074 Y Y Y
BF0976 Y Y
NTX495AA
BF0867 Y Y
BF0881 Y Y
BV1987 Y
BV1988 Y Y Y
NTX496AA
AE0059 Y Y Y
BC2059 Y Y
BF0870 Y Y
BV1989 Y
NTX499AA
AC0082 Y Y Y Y Y
AC0083 Y Y Y Y Y Y
AC0086 Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
AC0133 Y Y Y Y Y Y
AC0134 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
AC0135 Y Y Y Y
AC0136 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
AE0239 Y Y Y Y Y Y
AE0240 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
AE0242 Y Y Y Y Y Y
AE0248 Y Y Y Y
AE0249 Y Y Y
AG0962 Y Y Y
AG1540 Y
AJ0563 Y Y Y Y
AJ1432 Y Y Y Y
BC2053 Y Y Y Y
BC2077 Y Y Y Y Y
BC2260 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
BC2261 Y Y Y Y Y Y
TA0229 Y Y Y Y Y
TA0325 Y
TA0326 Y Y
TA0327 Y Y Y Y
NTX650AA
AE0034 Y
NTX652AA
AE0108 Y Y Y
AE0178 Y
NTX653AA
AE0216 Y Y
TA0240 Y Y Y
NTX655AA
AE0025 Y Y Y
NTX656AA
BF0869 Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
NTX657AA
AE0147 Y Y Y Y
39005622 Y Y
NTX660AA
BC2286 Y Y Y Y
NTX662AA
BC2081 Y Y Y Y Y Y
NTX664AA
AE0033 Y Y
AE0943 Y Y
BC2060 Y Y Y
NTX665AA
AC0256 Y Y Y Y Y
BC2080 Y Y Y Y
NTX666AA
AC0256 Y Y Y Y Y
BC2080 Y Y Y Y
NTX667AA
AE0055 Y Y
NTX668AA
AE0057 Y Y
NTX669AA
AC0132 Y Y
NTX738AC
AG1926 Y
AL1719 Y Y Y
NTX750AC
AL1674 Y Y Y Y Y
AL2539 Y
AL2541 Y Y
AL2542 Y Y
AL2726 Y Y Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
AQ0788 Y Y Y Y Y
AQ0789 Y Y Y
AQ0882 Y Y Y
AQ0884 Y Y
NTX885AB
AG1214 Y Y Y
AJ0473 Y Y Y
AL1566 Y Y Y Y
NTX901AA
AD0943 Y Y Y
AF0966 Y Y Y
AF1439 Y Y Y Y
AF1756 Y
AF2565 Y Y
AF2599 Y Y
AF2668 Y Y
AG0649 Y Y
AG1318 Y Y
AG1854 Y Y Y
AG1973 Y Y
AJ1224 Y Y
AL1541 Y Y
AL1608 Y
AR0491 Y Y Y
NC0020 Y
NC0313 Y Y Y Y
NC0495 Y Y Y Y
TA0289 Y
NTX904AA
AE0142 Y Y Y Y
AE0146 Y Y Y
AE1245 Y Y Y
AG1217 Y Y
AG1218 Y Y Y
AG1220 Y Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
AJ0159 Y Y
AJ0205 Y Y Y
AJ1028 Y Y
AJ2411 Y Y
TA0165 Y Y Y
TA0201 Y Y
TA0320 Y Y
TA0331 Y Y
NTX909AA
AE0115 Y Y Y Y
NTX910AA
AE0116 Y Y Y Y
NTX940AA
AL1109 Y Y
AL1718 Y Y Y
AL1923 Y Y Y Y
AL2042
AL2328 Y
AR0160 Y
NTX941AA
AG2480
AI0625 Y Y
AI0630 Y Y Y Y
AL0797 Y Y Y
AL0803 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
AL1053 Y Y Y
AL1054 Y Y Y
AL1055
AL1182 Y Y
AL1183 Y
AL1192 Y Y
AL1193 Y Y Y
AL1197 Y Y
AL1200 Y Y Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
AL1201 Y
AL1480 Y Y Y Y
AL1570 Y
AL1681 Y Y
AL1753 Y Y Y
AL1759 Y Y Y Y Y Y
AL1782 Y Y Y Y
AL1826 Y Y Y Y
AL1884 Y Y Y
AL1968 Y Y Y Y
AL2021 Y Y
AL2030 Y Y Y Y Y
AL2331 Y Y Y Y
AQ0721 Y Y Y Y
AQ0741 Y
AQ0834 Y
AQ0854 Y
AQ0859 Y
AR0211 Y
NTX942AA
AG1385 Y Y Y
AL1060 Y Y Y
AL1166 Y
AL1298
NTX942AB
AL1790 Y Y
NTX944AA
AR0079 Y Y
AR0081 Y Y
NTX945AA
AC0639 Y Y Y Y
AC0644 Y Y Y
AG1337 Y Y
AL1456 Y Y Y Y Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
AL1457
AL1476 Y Y Y
AL1477 Y Y Y
AL1478 Y
AL1479 Y
AL1482 Y Y
AL1779 Y Y Y
AL1780 Y Y Y Y
AL1781 Y Y Y Y
AQ0717 Y Y Y
AQ0718 Y
AQ0840 Y Y Y
AQ0854 Y
NTX950AA
AC0638
AL0787 Y Y
AL0790 Y Y Y
NTX951AA
AC0639 Y Y Y Y
AL1199
AL1456 Y Y Y Y Y Y
AQ0835
AQ0858 Y Y Y Y
NTX980AA
BC0158 Y
BC0490 Y Y
BC0495 Y
BC0693
BC0858 Y Y Y
BC1259 Y Y Y
BR0176 Y
BR0200 Y
BR0201 Y
BR0223 Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
BV0041
NTXA66AA
AJ0192 Y Y Y Y
AJ0474 Y Y Y
NTXB00AA
AC0131 Y Y Y
NTXB01AA
AC0131 Y Y Y
NTXB02AA
AE0153 Y Y Y Y Y Y
NTXB03AA
AE0167 Y Y Y Y
NTXB04AA
AE0169 Y Y Y Y
NTXB05AA
AJ1257 Y Y
NTXB07AA
AE0154 Y Y Y Y
NTXB08AA
AG0717 Y
NTXB10AA
AG0707 Y
AG0708 Y Y Y
AG0711 Y Y Y
AJ0782 Y Y Y Y Y
AJ0796 Y Y Y
AJ0819 Y Y
AL2529 Y Y Y Y
NTXB11AA
AG0707 Y
AJ0498 Y
NTXB12AA
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
AC0240 Y Y Y
NTXB13AB
AG0636 Y Y Y Y
AG0712 Y
AG0713 Y
AG0714 Y Y
AG0715 Y
AG0716 Y Y Y Y
AG1230 Y
AG1233 Y Y Y
AG1234 Y Y
AJ0178 Y Y
AJ0180 Y
AJ0182 Y Y
AJ0572
AJ0801 Y Y
AJ0802 Y Y
AJ0803 Y
AJ0804 Y Y
AJ1024 Y Y Y
NTXB14AA
AG0710 Y Y Y Y Y
AL2528 Y Y
NTXB17AA
AG1291 Y Y Y
NTXB21AA
AE0481 Y
AE0523 Y
NTXB22AA
AE1240 Y Y Y
AL2530 Y Y Y Y
AL2549 Y Y Y Y
AL2720 Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
NTXB69AA
AE0139 Y Y
AE0140 Y
AE0171 Y Y
AE0172 Y
AE0173 Y
AE0514 Y Y
AE0893 Y Y Y Y
AJ1124 Y Y Y
NTXB75AA
AE0293
NTXB83AA
AG1294 Y Y Y Y
TA0228 Y Y Y
NTXB84AA
AG1231 Y Y
AG1235 Y
AG1236 Y Y Y
AG1237 Y Y Y Y Y
AJ1025 Y Y Y
AJ1256 Y Y
AJ1445 Y Y Y Y Y
AJ1446 Y
NTXE01AA
AL0573 Y Y Y
AL0856 Y Y Y Y
AL0857 Y Y Y
AL0957 Y Y Y Y
AL0958 Y Y Y
AL0959 Y Y
AL0960 Y
AL1230 Y Y Y Y
AL2038
AL2107 Y Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
AL2162 Y Y Y Y Y
AL2260 Y Y
AR0005 Y Y
AR0141 Y Y Y Y
AR0186 Y Y
TA0392 Y
NTXE29AA
AG1506 Y Y
AG1511 Y Y
AG1513 Y Y
AG1560 Y Y
AG1563
AG1570 Y Y
NTXE54AA
AL1174 Y Y Y
NTXF15AA
AL0934 Y Y
NTXF20AA
AL2334 Y Y
AQ1030 Y Y Y
AQ1031 Y
AQ1070 Y Y Y
NTXF70AA
BC1826 Y Y Y Y
BC1827 Y Y Y Y
BC1909 Y Y Y
BC1932 Y Y
BC2003 Y Y
NTXF71AB
AL1276 Y Y
AL1277 Y Y
AL1278 Y
AL1279 Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
AL1280 Y Y
AL1281 Y Y
AL1655 Y Y Y
AL1656 Y Y
AL1657 Y Y Y
AL1658 Y Y Y
AL1659 Y Y Y
AL1660 Y Y Y
AL1663 Y
AL1664 Y
AL1740 Y Y Y
AL2130 Y
AR0124 Y Y
AR0125 Y Y
AR0128 Y Y
AR0129 Y Y
NTXH00AA
AE0448 Y Y Y
NTXH01AA
AE0513 Y
AE0536 Y
NTXH02AA
AE0515 Y Y Y
NTXH03AA
AE0567 Y Y Y
AE0568 Y Y Y Y
NTXH04AA
AE0514 Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
NTXH05AA
AE0567 Y Y Y
AE0568 Y Y Y Y
AE0897 Y Y Y Y
AE0898 Y Y
AJ0205 Y Y Y
NTXH06AA
AE0567 Y Y Y
AE0568 Y Y Y Y
AE0897 Y Y Y Y
AE0898 Y Y
AJ0205 Y Y Y
NTXH07AA
AJ0578 Y Y Y Y
NTXH12AA
AE0546
NTXH13AA
AJ0177 Y Y
NTXH16AA
AJ0181 Y Y Y Y Y
NTXH17AA
AJ0832 Y Y Y
NTXH18AA
AQ1107 Y Y
TA0124 Y Y Y Y Y
TA0125 Y
TA0126 Y Y Y Y
TA0127 Y
TA0132 Y Y
TA0162 Y Y Y Y Y
TA0183 Y Y
TA0193 Y Y
TA0222 Y Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
TA0223 Y Y Y
TA0224 Y Y
TA0280 Y
TA0281 Y Y Y
NTXH19AA
TA0158 Y Y Y
TA0182 Y Y
TA0225 Y Y
TA0226 Y Y Y
NTXH22AA
AC0054 Y Y Y Y Y
AE0056 Y
AE0292 Y Y Y Y
BV1277 Y Y Y
NTXH23AA
AJ0581 Y Y Y Y Y
AJ0851 Y Y Y Y Y
NTXH54AA
AJ1026 Y Y Y Y Y
AJ1255 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
NTXH58AA
AJ1265 Y Y Y
NTXH60AA
AE0735 Y Y
NTXH70AA
AI0407 Y Y Y
AL1929 Y Y Y Y Y
NTXH71AA
AJ0179 Y Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
NTXH77AA
AI0408 Y
AI0409 Y Y
AI0410 Y Y Y Y
NTXH79AA
AJ1124 Y Y Y
NTXH80AA
AJ1124 Y Y Y
AJ1423 Y Y Y
NTXH95AA
AE0838 Y Y Y Y
NTXK12AA
AE0630 Y Y Y Y Y
NTXK13AA
AE0397 Y Y Y Y Y
AE0671 Y Y Y
NTXK70AA
AJ1872 Y Y Y
NTXK71AA
AE0972 Y Y Y
NTXK72AA
AL2457 Y Y Y
TA0163 Y Y
NTXK73AA
AJ1791 Y Y Y
NTXK79AA
AE1007 Y Y Y
AJ1898 Y Y
AJ1899 Y
TA0174 Y Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
NTXK79AD
TA0133 Y Y Y Y
TA0134 Y Y Y
TA0195 Y Y Y Y
TA0196 Y Y Y
NTXN83AA
AL1453 Y Y Y
AR0478 Y Y
NTXP10AA
AL2055 Y
NTXP44AA
AQ0857 Y Y
NTXP72AA
AR0105 Y Y
AR0106 Y Y Y Y Y Y
NTXQ52AA
AL1455 Y Y
NTXR34AA
AF3732 Y Y Y
AF3733 Y Y Y Y
AL2540 Y Y Y
NTXR34AB
TA0174 Y Y
NTXR42AA
AF3658 Y Y Y Y Y Y
TA0174 Y Y Y
NTXR46AA
AL2236 Y Y Y
NTXR72AA
AL2334 Y Y
AR0010 Y Y Y Y
AR0117 Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
AR0118 Y Y
AR0907 Y Y Y Y
AR0908 Y Y Y Y
AR0909 Y Y Y Y Y
AR0910 Y Y Y Y
TA0287
NTXS72AA
AQ0984 Y Y Y Y
NTXU35AA
AE1243 Y Y Y Y
TA0140 Y Y Y Y
TA0141 Y Y Y Y
TA0175 Y Y Y Y
TA0177 Y Y Y Y
NTXU44AA
TA0158 Y Y Y
TA0159 Y Y Y
TA0227 Y Y Y Y
NTXU45AA
TA0169 Y Y Y
TA0170 Y Y Y Y
TA0171 Y Y Y
TA0172 Y Y
TA0233 Y Y
TA0379 Y
TA0543 Y
39005872 Y
NTXU46AA
TA0169 Y Y Y
TA0172 Y Y
TA0235 Y Y Y
NTXU49AA
TA0230 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
NTXU51AA
TA0234 Y Y
NTXU55AA
TA0274 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
NTXU60AA
TA0285 Y Y Y
NTXU62AA
TA0319 Y
NTXU63AA
TA0386 Y Y
TA0387 Y Y Y
39005866 Y
NTXU64AA
TA0328 Y Y Y
TA0329 Y Y
TA0330 Y Y Y Y
NTXU65AA
TA0371 Y
TA0372 Y
TA0373 Y Y
TA0374 Y
TA0375 Y Y
TA0376 Y
TA0377 Y Y Y Y
TA0378
NTXU69AA
TA0549
TA0550 Y
TA0551
TA0560 Y Y
TA0561 Y Y
TA0601 Y Y
39005628 Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
39005643 Y Y Y
39004649 Y
39005869 Y Y Y
NTXU72AA
TA0610 Y Y Y Y Y
NTXU81AA
TA0552 Y Y Y
TA0553
TA0554 Y Y Y
TA0556 Y Y Y Y
TA0558 Y
TA0562 Y Y
TA0563 Y Y Y
TA0564 Y Y
TA0565
TA0566 Y
TA0602 Y Y
TA0603 Y Y Y Y
TA0614 Y
TA0615 Y Y
39005633 Y
39005652 Y
39005862 Y Y
NTXU84AA
TA0544 Y Y Y
NTXU87AA
TA0510 Y Y
NTXU88AA
TA0532 Y
TA0533 Y Y
NTXU90AA
39005695 Y Y
NTXV13AA
AL2721 Y Y Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
AL2722 Y Y
NTXV16AA
AL2632 Y Y Y
NTXV55AA
AE1239 Y Y Y Y Y
NTXW00AA
AE0945 Y Y
AE1099 Y Y
NTXW01AA
AE0946 Y Y Y Y Y
AE1099 Y Y
NTXW02AA
AE0956 Y
NTXW03AA
AE1013
NTXW21AA
AE1106 Y Y Y Y
NTXW23AA
TA0216 Y Y Y
NTXZ12AA
TA0582 Y Y Y
TA0583 Y
NTXZ13AA
TA0584 Y Y Y Y
NTXZ19AA
39005676 Y Y Y Y
NTXZ20AA
39005683 Y Y Y
Unpackaged
TA0272 Y
TA0353 Y
message accounting
—continued—


Feature
TA0354 Y
TA0355 Y Y
TA0356 Y Y
TA0368 Y Y
TA0509 Y Y Y
TA0511 Y Y Y
TA0513 Y Y Y
TA0521 Y Y Y
TA0522 Y Y Y Y
TA0523 Y Y
TA0524 Y
TA0525 Y Y
TA0526
TA0527 Y Y
TA0528 Y Y Y
TA0529 Y Y
TA0530 Y Y
TA0531 Y
TA0535 Y
TA0536 Y
TA0537 Y Y Y Y
TA0538 Y Y Y Y Y
TA0545 Y
TA0546 Y
TA0567 Y
TA0568
TA0597 Y Y Y
TA0598 Y Y Y
TA0612 Y Y
TA0617 Y Y Y Y
39005675 Y Y Y Y
39005876 Y Y
message accounting
End

NER500AA
CIS Signaling
This feature package applies to DMS-100 offices.
NER500AA provides a DMS switch with the capability to act as an interface
tandem switch between an office that uses R1 signaling and a network that
uses T1 or T2 signaling. It also provides T1 multifrequency shuttle (MFS)
to MFS and MFS to dial pulse (DP) end-to-end tandeming capability in a
DMS-100 or DMS-200 switch.
Feature package contents
Feature package NER500AA contents
Feature number Description
TA0129 T1–R1 Local Interworking

TA0130 T2 to R1 Interworking
TA0131 T1/MFS-MFS, MFS-DP End-to-End Tandeming
TA0135 CIS T1-R1 Local Interworking–XPM
TA0136 CIS T2 to R1 Interworking
TA0137 T1/MFS-MFS and T1/MFS-DP End-to-End Tandeming
TA0176 CIS Universal Tone Receiver (UTR) Interface, Maintenance
and Diagnostic
TA0207 T1/MFS.MFPP1(2) – T1/MFPP1(2) Tandem
TA0213 MCT for CIS
TA0214 425, 500 Hz Detection
TA0215 Operator Call Back in T2
TA0241 CIS Call Processing Robustness
TA0242 MFPP4 Register Signaling
TA0254 T1/MFS/MFPP1 (MFPP2) to T1/MFPP1(MFPP2)
Link-by-Link Interworking
TA0255 Reattempt on MFS Register Signaling Failure
TA0257 CIS Call Processing Robustness 2
TA0259 DP Overlap Outpulsing on T1 and T2 trunks
TA0262 T1/MFS/ANIG/DP to T1/ANIG/DP Interworking
TA0263 UTR Single Frequency Detection
TA0286 T2 to R2 Interworking
—continued—
Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i NER500AA–1

NER500AA
Feature package NER500AA contents (continued)
TA0295 CIS Toll Call Ringing

TA0296 CIS Call Waiting
TA0308 Implementation of IFPE Tones for CIS
TA0311 Charging Stop with Clearback
TA0312 Separate Charge Recording for Hotel Subscribers
TA0313 ICAMA for Rayon Operator
TA0315 T1(ANIG/DP) to T1(MFPP1, MFPP2) Interworking
TA0317 Line to T1(MFS/ANIG/DP) Interworking
TA0335 T1(ANIG/DP) to T4(MFPP4) Interworking
TA0336 T1(MFPP1) to T4(MFPP4) Interworking
TA0339 T4(MFPP4) to T2(DP) Interworking
TA0357 T101 Test Lines for T1 Trunks
TA0358 T101 Test Lines for T2 Trunks
TA0440 Common Trunk Group Types for T2/T4 Trunks

TA0441 OM Enhancements for CIS Market
TA0442 Term ARTER Trunk Test for T1 and T4 Signaling
TA0443 AMADUMP Filter for ICAMA
TA0445 Long Call Check Tool
End
BCS history
BCS39i—Features TA0207, TA0213, TA0214, TA0215, and TA0241 added.
BCS40i—Features TA0242, TA0254, TA0255, TA0257, TA0259, TA0262,
TA0263, and TA0286 added.
BCS41i—Features TA0295, TA0296, TA0308, TA0311, TA0312, TA0313,
TA0315, TA0317, TA0335, TA0336, TA0337, TA0338, TA0339, TA0357,
and TA0358 added.
BCS43i—Features TA0440, TA0441, TA0442, TA0443, and TA0445 added.
NER500AA–2 297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

NER500AA
Required feature packages
Feature package Description
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX001AA Common Basic
NTX470AA International Common Basic
NTX472AB International Local Basic
NTX901AA Local Features II
NTX904AA R2 Signaling Base
NTX909AA ANI Toll

NER500AA
TA0129
Feature name
T1–R1 Local Interworking
Description
This feature allows a DMS switch to act as an interface tandem switch
between an office that uses R1 signaling and a network that uses T1
signaling.
BCS history
This feature was created in BCS37.
Restrictions and limitations
For T1 to R1 local tandeming, the terminating office must provide the
appropriate tone (ringback, busy or congestion tone).
With multifrequency shuttle (MFS) register signaling on T1 to R1 local
tandeming, when a valid route is found, the “connection set up” signal
(MF4) is returned. This renders subsequent “disconnection” (MF5) and
“congestion” (MF7) signals ineffective.
Subscriber busy or congestion is not supported in T1 to R1 local tandeming.
R1 to T1 local tandeming is not supported with R1 metering (MTR) trunks.
In R1 to T1 local tandeming, when a clearback (CLB) line signal is received
by a terminating trunk, congestion tone is not supported through the
incoming R1 trunk.
No-interval automatic number identification (ANI) is supported in R1 to T1
local tandeming only if R1 ANI trunks are used.
Feature interactions
This feature interacts with feature TA0135 (CIS T1–R1 Local Interworking
– XPM) that provides the XMS-based peripheral module (XPM) part of the
local tandeming operation.
This feature interacts with feature AJ0159 (R2 Base Enhancements) to
provide interconnection with a Meridian 1 switch.
This feature requires feature TA0130 (T2 to R1 Interworking) to fully
support T1 to R1 local tandeming.

NER500AA
TA0130
Feature name
T2 to R1 Interworking
Description
signaling.
BCS history
This feature does not support operator toll break-in and operator rering.
This feature does not support reanswer.
This feature interacts with feature TA0119 (CIS ANI Reception and Billing).
Datafill
Table Description
TRKGRP Parameter OFFTYP is added to trunkgroup type CISANI.

NER500AA
TA0131
Feature name
T1/MFS–MFS and T1/MFS–DP End to End tandeming
Description
This feature provides T1 multifrequency shuttle (MFS) to MFS and MFS to
dial pulse (DP) end-to-end tandeming capability in a DMS–100 or
DMS–200 switch. This enhances an earlier feature that provided the
capability on a link-by-link basis.
BCS history
Hardware requirements
This feature requires the provision of one or more universal tone receivers
(UTR). The quantity depends upon the number of MFS trunks provided.
If the appropriate parameters in table TRKGRP are not set to End-to-end
signaling fortrunk group types MTR and CISANI, the switch defaults to
link-by-link interworking. Link-by-link interworking does not support DP
signaling.
This feature interacts with feature TA0130 (T2 to R1 Interworking).

NER500AA
TA0135
Feature name
CIS T1–R1 Local Interworking – XPM
Description
signaling.
BCS history
For T1 to R1 local tandeming, the terminating office must provide the
appropriate tone (ringback, busy, or congestion tone).
With multifrequency shuttle (MFS) register signaling on T1 to R1 local
tandeming, when a valid route is found, the “connection set up” signal
(MF4) is returned. This renders subsequent “disconnection” (MF5) and
“congestion” (MF7) signals ineffective.
Subscriber busy or congestion is not supported in T1 to R1 local tandeming.
R1 to T1 local tandeming is not supported with R1 metering (MTR) trunks.
In R1 to T1 local tandeming, when a clearback (CLB) line signal is received
by a terminating trunk, congestion tone is not supported through the
incoming R1 trunk.
No-interval automatic number identification (ANI) is supported in R1 to T1
local tandeming only if R1 ANI trunks are used.
This feature interacts with feature TA0129 (CIS T1–R1 Local Interworking)
that provides the central control (CC) part of the local tandeming operation.
This feature interacts with feature AJ0159 (R2 Base Enhancements) to
provide interconnection with a Meridian 1 switch.
This feature requires feature TA0130 (T2 to R1 Interworking) to fully
support T1 to R1 local tandeming.

NER500AA
TA0136
Feature name
CIS T2 to R1 Interworking
Description
This feature provides the XMS-based peripheral module (XPM) software to
allow a DMS switch to act as an interface tandem switch between an office
that uses R1 signaling and a network that uses T2 signaling.
BCS history
This feature does not support operator toll break-in and operator rering.
This feature does not support reanswer.
This feature interacts with feature TA0119 (CIS ANI Reception and Billing).
This feature requires feature TA0130 (T2 to R1 Interworking) to provide the
central control software for the feature operation.
Datafill
Table Description
TRKGRP Parameter OFFTYP is added to trunkgroup type CISANI.

NER500AA
TA0137
Feature name
T1/MFS–MFS and T1/MFS–DP End to End tandeming
Description
This feature provides T1 multifrequency shuttle (MFS) to MFS and MFS to
dial pulse (DP) end-to-end tandeming capability in a DMS-100 or DMS-200
switch. This enhances an earlier feature that provided the capability on a
link-by-link basis.
BCS history
This feature requires the provision of one or more universal tone receivers
(UTR). The number of UTRs needed depends upon the number of MFS
trunks provided.
If the appropriate parameters in table TRKGRP are not set to end-to-end
signaling for trunk group types MTR and CISANI, the switch defaults to
link-by-link interworking. Link-by-link interworking does not support DP
signaling.
This feature interacts with feature TA0130 (T2 to R1 Interworking).

NER500AA
TA0176
Feature name
CIS Universal Tone Receiver (UTR) Interface, Maintenance and Diagnostic
Description
This feature provides an interface between the facility processor (FP) and
the local processor (LP) of the CIS UTR card, NET6X2AA. This card
provides the out-of-service diagnostic that involves running on-board
diagnostics and performing an enhanced test to verify the capacity of
detecting the multifrequency (MF) and single tones (425, 500, 700,
1100 Hz), as well as the reports corresponding to the associated parameters.
The new UTR card supports the following CIS tone sets:
• CIS I/C MFPP
• ANI Gapless (ANIG)
• MF Shuttle (MFS)
• CIS Miscellaneous
Dual tone Multifrequency (DTMF) and Multifrequency compelled (MFC)

tone sets are also supported. This feature applies to peripheral modules with
the SDTC loads.
This UTR card is designed to be used in the XMS-based peripheral module
(XPM) in place of the NT6X92 card. The UTR card provides the same tone
detection capability for up to 32 channels as the existing NT6X92CA.
The CIS UTR is a 32-channel receiver. One or two UTRs can reside in an
XPM shelf. Any channel that requires tone detection is switched to one of
the channels of the UTR. Each UTR uses one DS30A port on the shelf. The
UTR can handle both A-law and µ-law tones. Tone samples are switched on
to the parallel speech bus by the time switch card and they are collected by
the UTR at the appropriate time slots. The UTR analyzes the samples and
identifies the tones. This card provides the ability to monitor for the CIS
signaling, including the CIS tone sets: ANI Gapless, CIS Miscellaneous, CIS
I/C MFPD, CIS MFS, and R1-MF.
BCS history
This feature was created in BCS38i.
An NET6X2AA UTR card must be installed in the ninth slot of the
international digital trunk controller (IDTC) frame. This allows diagnostic
testing to be performed on this card.

NER500AA
TA0176
This feature depends on the capabilities of the NET6X2AA UTR card. The
UTR card is designed to support CIS tones.
This feature must be used only in the CIS market area, unless the DTMF and
the MFC signaling tone sets are supported by the NET6X2AA UTR card.
This feature needs feature TA0175 (CIS Tones and Cadences) to function
properly. This feature is part of a group of features used by feature TA0177
(CIS UTR Integration Phase 1).

NER500AA
TA0203
Feature name
CIS T4 Line Signaling
Description
This feature implements central control (CC) and XMS-based peripheral
module (XPM) changes to provide T4 line signaling (NTLS25) on a DMS
switch.
In Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) T4 line signaling is used
between:
• toll exchanges
• toll and international exchanges
T4 line signaling works in conjunction with multifrequency pulse packet

type 4 (MFPP4) register signaling.
BCS history
This feature interacts with feature TA0242 (MFPP4 Register Signaling).
Datafill
Table Description
LNSIGSYS Two tuples are added, to define incoming and outgoing NTLS25
line signaling.

NER500AA
TA0207
Feature name
T1/MFS MFPP1 (2)–T1/MFPP1 (2) Tandem
Description
This feature enables the DMS-100 switch to operate as a tandem office by
providing end-to-end tandem capability from T1/Multifrequency Shuttle
(MFS), T1/Multifrequency Pulse Packed 1 (MFPP1) or T1/Multifrequency
Pulse Packed 2 (MFPP2) trunks to T1/MFS, T1/MFPP1 or T1/MFPP2
trunks.
In the existing CIS network, a tandem exchange that serves calls from local
exchanges to a toll exchange type AMTC–KE (E) or AMTC_2,3 uses
MFPP1 or MFPP2 signaling, respectively. If the local exchange is
electronic, the register signaling on the first leg is MFS. If the toll exit code
is received by the tandem exchange via MFS, the tandem office provides a
path between the local and toll exchanges by completing the MFS register
signaling. Communication then continues between the local and toll
exchanges with MFPP1/MFPP2 register signaling.
BCS history
This feature requires the following features:
• TA0131 (T1) MFS to MFS and MFS to DP End to End
Tandeming–XPM
• TA0137 (T1) MFS to MFS and MFS to DP End to End
Tandeming–CC

NER500AA
TA0213
Feature name
MCT for CIS
Description
This feature enables the telephone administration to identify malicious calls
in the CIS network, using one of the following two methods:
• T1 line signaling–both sides disconnection type
• ANI Gapless (ANIG)
BCS history
The Universal Tone Receiver (UTR) card NET6X2AA must be used.
This feature can only be used on international digital trunk controllers
(IDTC) with a unified processor (UP).
For the both sides disconnection method, the outgoing (OG) part and
incoming (IC) part must be datafilled with CALLED in translation table
TRKGRP.
Since a special service code is used after the switchhook flash in the CIS
network, parameter MCT_ACTIVATION_WITH_SERVICE_CODE in table
OFCVAR must be set to Y.
Since MCT can be activated any time before exiting the call in the CIS
network, parameter MCT_TIMER_TO_IGNORE_MCT field of table
OFCVAR must be set to 0.
Trunks that are held due to an MCT activation can only be released with a
force release (FRLS) process from a MAP (maintenance and administration
position) terminal.
After MCT has been activated the calling party’s line is held until the trunk
is released. Only when this is done can the calling party generate a new call.
The called party may generate a new call immediately after going on–hook
from the malicious call.
This feature does not support simultaneous MCT and destination control
request (DCR) signals.

NER500AA
TA0213
• BC2262 International Malicious Call Trace
• TA0059 USSR ANI MF Intervalles Packet (XPM)
• TA0168 R2 Malicious Call Trace–Phase II
• TA0177 CIS UTR Integration–Phase I
Datafill
Table Description
USSRPARM Fields ANI_REQ_COUNT and CALLING_DN_SIZE are added

NER500A
TA0214
Feature name
425, 500 Hz Detection on T1 trunks
Description
This feature provides for the reception of a 500 Hz tone for an automatic
number identification (ANI) request and a 425 Hz tone for second dial tone
on local and outgoing dial pulse (DP) toll calls where the DMS-100 switch
is acting as a local exchange. Both call types use the Multi-Frequency
Intervalless Packet type of ANI.
For the no_ANI condition on local calls field RFHHTMO in table
LNSIGSYS must be datafilled as 0.
The maximum elapsed time between two successive ANI request states
received from the distant office must be less than the value of field
RRANITMO datafilled in table LNSIGSYS for outgoing T1 trunks in the
local DMS-100 switch.
BCS history
The Universal Tone Receiver (UTR) card NET6X2AA must be used.
This feature requires the following features to function properly:
• TA0057 USSR T1 Line Signaling–XPM Part
• TA0059 USSR ANI MF Intervalless Packet
• TA0064 USSR Register Signaling–XPM Part
• TA0115 CIS Toll ARM–20 T1/Decadic I/C Signaling type
• TA0176 CIS UTR Interface Maintenance and Diagnostic
• TA0177 CIS UTR Integration–Phase I
NER500A–16 297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

NER500AA
TA0215
Feature name
Operator Call Back in T2
Description
This feature provides decadic ringing reception, allowing an operator to call
back after the clear back signal has been sent over T2 trunks.
BCS history
A subscriber cannot make a call before timer RCLFTMO expires. In order
to prevent line lockup, field RCLFTMO in table LNSIGSYS must be
datafilled with a value other than zero.

NER500AA
TA0241
Feature name
CIS Call Processing Robustness
Description
This feature improves the reliability and maintainability of call processing in
DMS-100 switches operating in the CIS network. The feature provides for
the following:
• Analysis of the software modules that implement the original call
processing features to ensure compliance with the USSR Signaling
Specification TA0073, and modification as necessary to ensure correct
operation of the exisiting functions
• Investigation and correction of all known call processing problem
• Modification to effect correct interface with other CIS features that are
being redesigned or enhanced
• Modification to improve the reliability and maintainability of call
processing
BCS history
• TA0213 MCT for CIS
• TA0214 425, 500 Hz Detection on T1 trunks
• TA0215 Operator Call Back in T2

NER500AA
TA0242
Feature name
MFPP4 Register Signaling
Description
This feature implements:
• multifrequency pulse packet type 4 (MFPP4) register signaling that is
used between toll exchanges in the Commonwealth of Independent
States (CIS) telephony network
• line-to-MFPP4 interworking
• MFPP4-to-line interworking
BCS history
0Incoming MFPP4 trunks process neither call category (CC) nor echo
suppressor control (SE) digits. These digits are processed by translation
logic.
This feature interacts with feature TA0203 (CIS T4 Line Signaling).
Datafill
Table Description
CONVCC This table is added to map the calling subscriber categories

(KA) to MFPP4 call categories (CC).
RGSIGSYS Signaling selector NTRS15 is created for MFPP4 register

signaling.
TA0242

NER500AA
TA0254
Feature name
T1/MFS/MFPP1 (MFPP2) to T1/MFPP1(MFPP2) Link-by-Link
Interworking
Description
This feature provides the following link-by-link interworking on a
DMS-100i switch:
• T1/MFS/MFPP1 to T1/MFPP1
• T1/MFS/MFPP2 to T1/MFPP2
The link-by-link interworking allows a DMS-100i tandem office to produce

CAMA billing records.
In the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) network, a tandem
exchange connecting calls from a local exchange to the toll network uses:
• multifrequency pulse packet 1 (MFPP1) signaling when connected to an
AMTC-KE(E) toll office
• multifrequency pulse packet 2 (MFPP2) signaling when connected to an
AMTC-2 or AMTC–3 toll office
Signaling between the local office and the tandem office is multifrequency
shuttle (MFS), MFPP1, or MFPP2.
If the DMS-100i tandem office receives the toll exit digit from the local
office as an MFS signal, field TRFC in table TRKGRP is checked. If the
field is set to CAMA, the tandem office implements link-by-link
interworking. If field TRFC is not set to CAMA, the tandem office
implements end-to-end working.
BCS history
Category is not checked and passed.
This feature interacts with the following features:
• TA0207 T1/MFS/MFPP1 (MFPP2) to T1/MFPP1 (MFPP2)
Tandeming
• TA0262 T1/MFS/ANIG/DP to T1/ANIG/DP Interworking

NER500AA
TA0254
Datafill
Table Description
RGSIGSYS ELEMENT4 of signaling type RGHYBRID is modified to allow

register signaling index (ICMFPPSIG) to be used in the
incoming direction

NER500AA
TA0255
Feature name
Reattempt on MFS Register Signaling Failure
Description
This feature invokes reattempt action over a different trunk if a failure
occurs during multifrequency shuttle (MFS) type register signaling. In order
to prevent reattempt over a previously used trunk, the trunk over which
register signaling has failed is not idled.
The failure reason can be one of the following reasons:
• high noise on universal tone receiver (UTR) channels
• receipt of a congestion signal (MF7)
• power level discrepancy of the received signal is more than 6 dBms
• receipt of no information, followed by timeout
• unexpected MF tone
BCS history
This feature interacts with TA0069 (USSR MF Shuttle Register Signaling).

NER500AA
TA0257
Feature name
CIS Call Processing Robustness 2
Description
This feature prevents subscriber busy (SSB), and subscriber free (SSF)
subscriber status tones to be heard during interaction with analog to T2
before answer or busy tone is heard.
This feature provides a constant 700-ms silent period between the first dial
tone and the second dial tone to the line from the originating office. This
silent period is required to separate the second dial tone from the normal dial
tone.
This feature enables to generate a log report to detect the calls originated
from a CIS trunk by using the ‘OP’ command at the MAP.
BCS history
• TA0203 CIS T4 Line Signaling
• TA0242 MFPP4 Register Signaling
• TA0254 T1/MFS/MFPP1 (MFPP2) to T1/MFPP1(MFPP2)
Link-by-Link Interworking
• TA0255 Reattempt on MFS Register Signaling Failure
• TA0259 DP Overlap Outpulsing on T1 and T2 Trunks
• TA0262 T1/MFS/ANIG/DP to T1/ANIG/DP Interworking
• TA0263 UTR Single Frequency Detection
Datafill
Table Description
RGSIGSYS Timer value parameter UTRSLTM is defined for MF shuttle

register signaling incoming and outgoing tuples.

NER500AA
TA0259
Feature name
DP Overlap Outpulsing on T1 and T2 trunks
Description
This feature implements overlap signaling on DMS-100i local and
DMS-100/200i local and tandem switches.
BCS history
The following call types are not supported for dial pulse (DP) overlap
outpulsing:
• international standard line to T1/T2 (multifrequency shuttle (MFS) DP)
trunk local calls on local switches
• international standard line to T1 (MFS ANIG DP) toll calls on local
switches
• local tandeming international T1/T2 (MFS DP) trunk to T1/T2 (DP)
trunk

NER500AA
TA0262
Feature name
T1/MFS/ANIG/DP to T1/ANIG/DP Interworking
Description
This feature provides T1/MFS/ANIG/DP to T1/ANIG/DP link by link
interworking to produce international centralized automatic message
accounting (ICAMA) records on DMS-100i tandem office. If the local
exchange is electronic, that is; register signaling on the first leg is
multifrequency shuttle (MFS) then DMS-100i switch serves as a tandem
office to toll exchanges ARM-20.
This feature uses T1 line signaling (NTLS21) type and the following register
signaling types:
• multifrequency shuttle (NTRS02)
• ANI Gapless Register
• Decadic pulse (NTRS05)
BCS history
In case of link by link tandeming, if ICAMA_ANI_FAILURE_ACTION is
datafilled as CONT, ANI request of toll office can not be received and call is
failed.
• TA0077 T1(DP) to T1(DP) Tandeming
• TA0241 CIS Call Processing Robustness
• TA0254 T1/MFS/MFPP1 (MFPP2) to T1/MFPP1(MFPP2) Link
by Link Interworking

NER500AA
TA0263
Feature name
UTR Single Frequency Detection
Description
This feature allows handling a new message from NET6X2AA CIS
universal tone receiver (UTR) card, indicating detection of a single
frequency component of MF tones for Commonwealth of Independent States
(CIS) .
This message is reported for the following register signaling systems:
• MF ANI Gapless
• I/C MF pulse packet Type 1 and 2
• MF Shuttle
BCS history
This feature is used with NET6X2AA CIS UTR card.

NER500AA
TA0286
Feature name
T2 to R2 Interworking
Description
This feature provides routing calls originated from CIS network over T2
trunks to Meridian-1 switch over R2 trunks directly. The main advantage of
this feature is elimination of R1 part and its overload. As a result of direct
T2 to R2 interworking, called subscriber’s status is passed to the previous
office efficiently.
BCS history
RLCFTMO field of the incoming T2 trunk in LNSIGSYS table must be
datafilled as 0.

NER500AA
TA0295
Feature name
CIS Toll Call Ringing
Description
This activity provides Common Wealth of Independent States (CIS) toll call
ringing on the DMS-100 International switch in compliance with the CIS
requirements. When a call request comes from an incoming T2 and T4
trunk to a line, a distinct ringing is applied to the called subscriber indicating
that it is a toll call.
BCS history

The datafilled ringing type in table LCMINV must correspond with the ring
generators provisioned in the LCMs, that is; a ringing scheme of “C3E”
must be used in conjunction with 6X30AA ring generators.
Each Line Concentrating Equipment (LCE) frame should only contain ring
generators for the same type of ringing.
Datafill
Table Description
LCMINV C3E added to field RNGTYPE for software loads specific to

CIS
BCS history
The datafilled ringing type in table LCMINV must correspond with the ring
generators provisioned in the LCMs, so that a ringing scheme of ”C3E” is
used in conjunction with 6X30AA ring generators. Each Line Concentrating
Equipment (LCE) frame must only contain ring generators for the same type
of ringing.
For the CIS market, the four ringing subcycle control switches on the
6X30AA ring generator card must be set to the configuration 0010111X,
where 0 represents ON, 1 represents OFF and X represents either ON or
OFF.

NER500AA
TA0296
Feature name
CIS Call Waiting
Description
This feature provides call waiting feature interactions with T1 and T2 trunks.
BCS history
If the subscriber who has call waiting feature assigned is:
• called over T2 operator trunk, call waiting is not activated and priority is
given to Toll Break–In (TBI) feature.
• talking with a second party over outgoing T1 or T2 operator trunk,
second party cannot be disconnected by doing register recall.
• talking with a second party over outgoing T1 (bothside), going on hook
does not disconnect second party and the waiting party does not ring the
subscriber who has call waiting feature assigned.

NER500AA
TA0308
Feature name
Implementation of IFPE Tones for CIS
Description
This feature provides the following tones for the Common Wealth of
Independent States (CIS) network:
• call waiting tone:
provided to warn the talking parties that someone is waiting if call
waiting feature is applied
• disconnect tone:
provided to give a warning signal to the conferees if one party exits the
conference call
• special confirmation tone:
is provided to inform the user that feature activation is authorized
BCS history

NER500AA
TA0311
Feature name
Charging Stop with Clearback
Description
This feature enables to stop charging by detection of clearback for toll calls
incoming via T1 trunks in the Common Wealth of Independent States (CIS)
network and prevents excessive charges if clearforward has been lost due to
bad transmission conditions.
BCS history

NER500AA
TA0312
Feature name
Separate Charge Recording for Hotel Subscribers
Description
This feature provides separate charging for hotel originating calls by routing
AMA logs of the hotel subscribers’ calls to another printer device. The logs
generated can be routed to a specific device according to the existing data in
tables LOGCLASS and LOGDEV. In table LOGCLASS, the generated log
name is referred to a class number. In table LOGDEV, according to the class
number dedicated in table LOGCLASS, the log is routed to a device which
is defined in table TERMDEV.
This feature is supported for the following types of calls:
• Line to T1
• Line to R1
• Line to T2 (MFS, DP)
• Line to T4 (MFPP4)
• T1 to R1
• T1 to T2
• T1 to T1
BCS history
In order to start printer device to print logs, a start command has to be
directed from the map terminal at the first run of the system.
• TA0315 T1(ANIG/DP) to T1(MFPP1, MFPP2) Interworking
• TA0317 Line to T1(MFS/ANIG/DP) Interworking
• TA0335 T1(ANIG/DP) to T4(MFPP4) Interworking
• TA0336 T1(MFPP1) to T4(MFPP4) Interworking

NER500AA
TA0312
Logs
Two new logs, AMAB 165 and AMAB 166 specific to hotel originating
calls are created. These log names are included in table LOGCLASS and an
unused class number is assigned to AMAB 165 and AMAB 166. This class
number points a printer defined in table LOGDEV which is datafilled in
table TERMDEV.

NER500AA
TA0313
Feature name
ICAMA for Rayon Operator
Description
This feature provides ICAMA recording functionality for Rayon Operators
in CIS telephony network. The Rayon Operators are connected to DMS Toll
Exchange with T1 (DP) trunks. To get calling subscriber’s Directory
Number and its Category Digit, ANI reception is used. Category
information is necessary for call allowance and Directory Number is used
for billing purposes. Since Rayon Operators do not have any limitation for
call allowance, and since their trunk identity is sufficient for billing
purposes, ANI reception part of the register signalling can be ignored. To
generate ICAMA record ANI Request must not be sent by the Toll Office
since Rayon Operators can not send their ANI digits.
This feature is supported for the following types of calls
• T1(DP) to R1
• T1(DP) to T2 (MFS or DP)
• T1(DP) to Line
BCS history
In table TRKGRP, trunk group type must be datafilled as CIS and
ANIBEFORE must be datafilled as ‘N’ . In TRKGRP table, tuple for
incoming trunk should include a DGNAME which is also datafilled in
DGHEAD table as SPEC (as DTONE parameter) to apply 425Hz second
dial tone. OPERATOR and OPRNUMBER fields which are created in CIS
trunk type in Table TRKGRP with this feature must also be datafilled with Y
and a ten digit calling number, respectively.
In table OFCVAR, ICAMA_REQUESTED and

GENERATE_ICAMA_LOG_ENTRY must be datafilled as ‘Y’.
In TRKSGRP table, line signalling type of the incoming trunk must be

NTLS21.
In RGSIGSYS table, the tuple used by Rayon Operator trunk must be

RGHYBRID, NIL, ICDPSIG, RGANISIG and NIL, respectively.

NER500AA
TA0313
Datafill
Table Description
TRKGRP A new field OPERATOR of CIS trunk type is introduced to

distinguish T1/DP operator trunks from Local or Local Tandem
trunks and a new subfield OPRNUMBER to define the number
of Rayon Operator is added as a subfield of the field
OPERATOR

NER500AA
TA0315
Feature name
T1(ANIG/DP) to T1(MFPP1, MFPP2) Interworking
Description
This feature provides T1(ANIG/DP) to T1(MFPP1, MFPP2) tandeming
functionality for outging toll calls towards AMTC–KE(E) or AMTC–2,3.
This feature is supported for the following type of calls.
• T1(DP) to R1
• T1(DP) to T2 (MFS or DP)
• T1(DP) to line
BCS history
When tandeming is link by link and ICAMA_ANI_FAILURE_ACTION is
datafilled as CONT, and if ANI cannot be received, the call fails since it is
impossible to respond ANI request of the toll office.
Datafill
Table Description
TRKGRP A new field OPERATOR must be added to distinguish T1/DP

trunks from local or local tandem trunks and a new subfield
OPRNUMBER in the field Operator must be defined to
represent the number of the rayon operator

NER500AA
TA0317
Feature name
Line to T1(MFS/ANIG/DP) Interworking
Description
This feature provides line to T1 (MFS/ANIG/DP) Interworking for
DMS-100i local switches. This feature allows to use the same trunk group
for outgoing local and toll calls.
BCS history

NER500AA
TA0335
Feature name
T1(ANIG/DP) to T4(MFPP4) Interworking
Description
This feature provides T1(ANIG/DP) to T4(MFPP4) Interworking for the
DMS switch as toll exchange in Common Wealth of Independent States
(CIS) telephony network.
BCS history
In this interworking, even if ICAMA_ANI_FAILURE_ACTION parameter
of table OFCVAR is datafilled as CONT, the call fails in the first leg if
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) cannot be received, since it is
impossible to pass the second leg without ANI.
• TA0311 Charging Stop with Clear Back
• TA0313 ICAMA for Rayon Operator
• TA0336 T1(MFPP1) to T4(MFPP4 Interworking
Datafill
Table Description
CONVCC Values of the CCARRAY tuple is mapped for each KA from

0 to 9

NER500AA
TA0336
Feature name
T1(MFPP1) to T4(MFPP4) Interworking
Description
This feature provides T1(MFPP1) to T4(MFPP4) interworking for the DMS
switch as toll exchange in the Common Wealth of Independent States (CIS)
telephony network.
BCS history
• TA0335 T1(ANI/DP) to T4(MFPP4 Interworking
Datafill
Table Description
CONVCC Values of the CCARRAY tuple is mapped for each KA from

0 to 9

NER500AA
TA0337
Feature name
Description
This feature provides T1(MFPP2) to T4(MFPP4) Interworking.
BCS history
• TA0335 T1(ANIG/DP) to T4(MFPP4)Interworking
• TA0336 T1(MFPP1) to T4(MFPP4)Interworking
• TA0311 Charging Stop with Clearback

NER500AA
TA0338
Feature name
Description
This feature provides T4(MFPP4) to T2(MFS) interworking functionality on
the DMS-100i switch for the Common Wealth of Independent States (CIS)
telephony network.
BCS history
This feature interacts with the feature T4(MFPP4) to T2(DP) Interworking
TA0339

NER500AA
TA0339
Feature name
T4(MFPP4) to T2(DP) Interworking
Description
This feature provides T4(MFPP4) to T2(DP) interworking functionality on
the DMS-100i switch for the Common Wealth of Independent States (CIS)
telephony network.
BCS history
This feature interacts with TA0338 T4(MFPP4) to T2(MFS) Interworking

NER500AA
TA0357
Feature name
T101 Test Lines for T1 Trunks
Description
This feature provides the existing T101 capability over DMS100i switch T1
trunks. The 101 test line provides a two-way talking connection between a
test position and any incoming or outgoing trunk associated with the
DMS100i switch. This allows maintenance personnel to make calls to
discuss problems between offices.
Originating 101 test lines, called Communication Trunks, permit originating

of 101 calls to distant offices. Terminating 101 test lines, called 101 Test
Trunks, carry maintenance calls from distant offices. DMS100i switch is
provided with the 101 Test Line and the TTP level MAP command;
CALLTRF ( Call Transfer). This allows the maintenance functions to be
performed on 101 calls in addition to talking. CALLTRF is provided to
allow a posted incoming 101 trunk to have its linked circuit; the outgoing
trunk’s control transferred from that of call processing to the TTP. It is then
possible to perform maintenance functions on the posted circuit. The linked
circuit must not be under TTP control and must be call processing busy
(CPB) .
This feature is for T1 line signalling which is used for calls between local
exchanges and for outgoing toll calls.
The register signaling types used by this feature are:
• Decadic Pulse (NTRS05) is used for calls between local exchanges,
from/to tandem and toll calls from ARM–20 and to ARM–20.
• MF Shuttle (NTRS02) is used for both incoming and outgoing local and
tandem calls and also used for incoming toll calls.
• MF Pulse Packet Type 1 (NTRS14) is used for outgoing toll calls if toll
type is AMTC–KE(E).
• MF Pulse Packet Type 2 (NTRS03) is used for outgoing toll calls if toll
type is AMTC–2,3.
• ANIG DP (MF3) is used for outgoing toll calls if toll type is ARM20.
BCS history

NER500AA
TA0357
1A2 Keyset, Terminal Equipment, 2x58AT MTM, 5x30 Card

The Flash feature of the T101 Test Line is not used in this feature since T1
does not have Ring_Forward in its signaling system.

NER500AA
TA0358
Feature name
T101 Test Lines for T2 Trunks
Description
This feature provides the existing T101 capability over DMS100i switch T2
trunks. The 101 Test Line provides a two–way talking connection between a
test position and any incoming or outgoing trunk associated with the
DMS100i switch. This allows maintenance personnel to make calls for
discussing problems between offices.
Originating 101 Test lines, called Communication Trunks, permit originating

of 101 calls to distant offices. Terminating 101 test lines, called 101 Test
Trunks, carry maintenance calls coming from distant offices.
DMS100i switch is provided with the 101 Test Line and the TTP level MAP
command CALLTRF ( Call Transfer). This allows the maintenance
functions to be performed on 101 calls in addition to talking.
CALLTRF is provided to allow a posted incoming 101 trunk to have its
linked circuit; the outgoing trunk’s control transferred from that of call
processing to the TTP. It is then possible to perform maintenance functions
on the posted circuit. The linked circuit must not be under TTP control and
must be call processing busy (CPB).
The register signaling types used by this feature are:
• Decadic Pulse (NTRS05) is used for calls between local exchanges,
from/to tandem and toll calls from ARM–20 and to ARM–20.
• MF Shuttle (NTRS02) is used for both incoming and outgoing local and
tandem calls and also used for incoming toll calls.
BCS history
Maintenance Trunk Module and NT5X30 101 Communication Test Line
Circuit Card are required.

NER500AA
TA0440
Feature name
Common Trunk Group Types for T2/T4 Trunks
Description
In the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) network, all incoming T2
and T4 trunks are datafilled as operator (OPR) trunks to enable toll break in
(TBI). However, most subscriber features are restricted to use with metered
(MTR) trunks, and do not operate with OPR trunks.
This feature permits incoming MTR trunk groups to support both regular
and OPR type calls. It adds the capability of sending and receiving category
information to and from multifrequency shuttle (MFS) trunks.
The following enhancements are made:
• Group type MTR is enhanced to support operator calls.
• MFS register signaling is enhanced to include call category and category
request signals.
• Table CONVMAP is introduced. Tables CONVCC, TRKSGRP, and
LNSIGSYS are modified. See Datafill section for details.
BCS history
Not applicable
The following restrictions and limitations apply:
• The three-conference circuit is not allocated until the expiration of the
OPRTMO timer. Using this timer affects the operation of TBI.
• The time required to receive clear forward (CLF) signals may exceed the
OPRTMO timer value. Conference ports are allocated when the timer
expires. and released when the CLF signals are received. This reduces
the outage of conference circuits during high traffic loads.
Not applicable

NER500AA
TA0440
Datafill
Table Description
CONVMAP Conversion mapping table is added by this feature. It provides

category conversions for T1, T2, T4, RSUP, and ETSI
signaling.
CONVCC Table is modified to handle more flexible category conversions

for T1, T2, T4, ETSI, and RSUP signaling.
TRKSGRP Table is modified to verify the conversion mapping units in table

CONVCC.
LNSIGSYS Timer OPRTMO is added. Range of values: 0 to 6000 (60 s).

Default is 200 (2 s).
Service orders
Not applicable
Operational measurements
Not applicable
Logs
Not applicable
User interface
Not applicable
Automatic message accounting
Not applicable

NER500AA
TA0441
Feature name
OM Enhancements for CIS Market
Description
This feature introduces registers to operational measurements (OM) group
TRK for the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) market.
These registers apply to the following office types:
• DMS100i (OFF100)
• DMS200i (OFF200)
• DMS100i/200i (OFFCOMB)
Refer to “Operational measurements” section below for details.

BCS history
Not applicable
• Answered calls with the FNT option that do not return an answer signal
are not pegged.
• Reanswered calls are not pegged for register NANS.
• The unit of measurement for register ANSU data can be CCS or
deciErlangs.
• This feature does not support test trunks used in ATME, milliwatt, and
looparound tests.
• This feature supports the CIS market only.
This activity interacts with the following features:
• TA0436—CIS-ISUP Base
• TA0438—T1/MFS/ANIG/DP to CIS ISUP Interworking
• TA0439—CIS ISUP to T2/MFS/DP Interworking
Datafill
Not applicable
Service orders
Not applicable

NER500AA
TA0441
The following registers are added to OM group TRK, for CIS:
• ANSU—usage count of answered calls
• NANS—peg count of answered calls
• NANSTMO—peg count of unanswered calls
• NBSY—peg count of subscriber busy calls
• NMF7—peg count of MF7 signals
• NONUM—peg count of undefined numbers
• NPARTD—peg count of missing digits over trunks
• NREATTMP—peg count of reattempts on outgoing trunk
Note that registers NANS and ANSU already exist. They are added for use
in the CIS network. The other registers are created by this feature.
Logs
Not applicable
User interface
Not applicable
Not applicable

NER500AA
TA0442
Feature name
Term ARTER Trunk Test for T1 and T4 Signaling
Description
This feature provides the ARTER trunk tests on T1, T2, and T4 trunks in the
Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) network. These include
expected measured loss (EML), maintenance noise limit (MNL), and
immediate action noise limit (IANL) tests. Both originating and terminating
tests are supported.
These tests may be performed manually at the trunk test position (TTP) or
automatically using the automatic trunk test (ATT) facility.
This feature does not change existing ARTER functionality.
BCS history
Not applicable
• ICAMA reports are not generated for ARTER calls.
Not applicable
Datafill
Not applicable
Service orders
Not applicable
Not applicable
Logs
Not applicable
User interface
Not applicable
Not applicable

NER500AA
TA0443
Feature name
AMADUMP Filter for ICAMA
Description
This feature enhances the FILTER subcommand of the AMADUMP utilility.
It supports the filtering of international centralized automatic message
accounting (ICAMA) records and interadministration accounting (IAA)
records. This enhancement applies to the Commonwealth of Independent
States (CIS) market. Refer to “User interface” section for details.
BCS history
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Datafill
Not applicable
Service orders
Not applicable
Not applicable
Logs
Not applicable
User interface
Two record codes are added to the FILTER subcommand in the AMADUMP
directory:
• BC—for ICAMA records
• BD—for IAA records
These record codes can be specified as “<code> string” values with the
ADD, DELETE, and DISPLAY parameters of the FILTER subcommand.
The user is prompted for filtering criteria. Standard AMADUMP
procedures are not otherwise affected. Refer to the NTP 297-1001–820,

NER500AA
TA0443
Nonmenu Commands Reference Manual, for details on the operation of the
AMADUMP utility.
AMA files are not affected. The files are scanned for records that match the
requirements specified in the FILTER subcommand.

NER500AA
TA0445
Feature name
Long Call Check Tool
Description
This feature provides a tool, CCBCHK, for the detection of calls that exceed
a set duration. It also detects hung calls when the hung party is a trunk.
The CCBCHK tool runs for both line-to-trunk and trunk-to-trunk calls. It
can be set up for all calls, or billable calls only.
Menu command CCBCHK is introduced to datafill information for the
CCBCHK tool. When a valid call event is detected, the related information
is stored in a buffer. A CCBCHK alarm is displayed at the EXT level of the
MAP.
Log report CCHK100 is introduced. This log is generated when the buffer
exceeds its capacity of 50 calls.
BCS history
Not applicable
• This feature does not support line-to-line calls.
• Data can be stored in the tool’s buffer for a maximum of 50 calls.
• All restarts terminate the CCBCHK process.
• During a one night process (ONP) collected information is lost.
Not applicable
Datafill
Not applicable
Service orders
Not applicable
Not applicable

NER500AA
TA0445
Logs
Log report CCHK100 is introduced. This log is generated when the buffer
exceeds its capacity of 50 calls.
User interface
Menu command CCBCHK is introduced to datafill information for the
CCBCHK tool. When a valid call event is detected, the related information
is stored in a buffer. A CCBCHK alarm is displayed at the EXT level of the
MAP.
Not applicable

NER501AA
CIS ISUP
Feature package NER501AA contents
TA0436 CIS-ISUP (RSUP) Base

TA0437 RSUP to/from ETSI-ISUP Interworking
TA0438 T1 to RSUP Interworking
TA0439 RSUP to T2 Interworking
BCS history
BCS43i—Features TA0436, TA0437, TA0438, and TA0439 added.
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX472AB International Local Basic
NTX492AA
NTX904AA R2 Signaling Base
NTX909AA ANI Toll
NTXU35AA
NTXW23AA
NTX661AA

NER501AA
TA0436
Feature name
CIS-ISUP (RSUP) Base
Description
This feature provides some of the call processing Commonwealth of
Independent States (CIS) ISDN user part (ISUP) requirements for the
DMS100i/200i switch.
The following CIS ISUP interworkings are included:
• international line to CIS ISUP
• CIS ISUP to international line
• CIS ISUP to CIS ISUP
In addition, this feature provides definitions for new messages and

parameters specific to CIS ISUP signaling.
BCS history
This feature runs on a PCM30 digital trunk controller (PDTC).
• The CIS ISUP development for the DMS-100i switch is for national
application only. International ISUP requirements are not supported.
• Office parameter RESTRICT_TBI_ON_TOLL in table OFCVAR must
be set to N to permit toll break-in on metered (MTR) trunks.
• The restrictions and limitations specified for features TA0169, TA0170,
TA0232, TA0234, TA0235, and specification TRS-93-153 apply to this
feature.
• TA0437—ETSI ISUP to/from CIS ISUP Interworking
• TA0438—T1/MFS/ANIG/DP to CIS ISUP Interworking
• TA0439—CIS ISUP to T2/MFS/DP Interworking

NER501AA
TA0436
Datafill
Table Description
TRKSGRP V6, referring to the national variant 6 for CIS ISUP, is added to
the range of values for the VARIANT field.
Options CATCHECK and RINGBACK are added to the OPTION

field.
C7UPTMR Ranges of values are increased for NQ764 timers T5, T13, T15,
T17, T19, T21, and T23. These changes affect the CCITT and
CCITT250 protocols only. Other protocols are not affected.
Service orders
Not applicable
Not applicable
Logs
Not applicable
User interface
Not applicable
Not applicable
Supplementary information
This feature implements automatic toll break in (TBI) and operator call back
support for CIS ISUP. These features are supported at the terminating
exchange in ISUP-to-line interworking.

NER501AA
TA0437
Feature name
RSUP to/from ETSI-ISUP Interworking
Description
This feature implements the interworking for the Commonwealth of
Independent States (CIS) ISDN user part (ISUP) signaling call processing.
This interworking provides the ability for an external exchange to use the
European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) ISUP V.1
signaling protocol. This feature supports the additions and modifications to
messaging and timers introduced with CIS ISUP signaling.
BCS history
Not applicable
Toll break-in (TBI) and operator calls back (OCB) options are not supported
by this feature.
This activity interacts with feature TA0436—CIS-ISUP (RSUP) Base.
Datafill
Not applicable
Service orders
Not applicable
Not applicable
Logs
Not applicable
User interface
Not applicable
Not applicable

NER501AA
TA0438
Feature name
T1 to RSUP Interworking
Description
The Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) telephone network uses T1
signaling is used between local or tandem exchanges and toll exchanges.
This feature implements interworking between T1 and CIS ISDN user part
(ISUP) protocols. It provides a controlled transfer of signalling information
across DMS200i exchanges without loss or addition to the information.
The following types of interworking are supported:
• T1 to multifrequency shuttle (MFS)/gapless automatic number
identification (ANIG)/dial pulse (DP)
• T1 to ANIG/DP
This feature supports the requirements for the set-up, preservation, and
release of calls over the network.
BCS history
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Datafill
Not applicable
Service orders
Not applicable
Not applicable
Logs
Not applicable
User interface
Not applicable

NER501AA
TA0438
Not applicable

NER501AA
TA0439
Feature name
RSUP to T2 Interworking
Description
In the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) telephone network, T2
signaling is used between local and toll exchanges. CIS T2 signaling
involves both dial pulse (DP) and multifrequency shuttle (MFS)
interworking.
This feature implements interworking between T2 and CIS ISDN user part
(ISUP) protocols. It provides a controlled transfer of signaling information
across DMS-200i exchanges without loss or addition of information.
This feature supports the requirements for the set-up, maintaining, and
release of calls over the network.
BCS history
Not applicable
• The CIS ISUP development for the DMS-100i switch is for national
application only. International ISUP requirements are not supported.
• The restrictions and limitations specified for features TA0169, TA0170,
TA0232, TA0234, TA0235, and specification TRS-93-153, apply to this
feature.
• The maintenance associated with these interworkings is provided by
feature TA0170—DMS 100i Base ISUP Maintenance.
• TA0436—CIS-ISUP (RSUP) Base
• TA0440—Common Trunk Group Types for T2/T4 Trunks
Datafill
Not applicable
Service orders
Not applicable

NER501AA
TA0439
Not applicable
Logs
Not applicable
User interface
Not applicable
Not applicable

NET110AA
NETAS custom calling features
Feature package NET110AA contents
TA0370 Turkish Tones Modification
BCS history
This feature package was created in BCS42i.

number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX901AA Local Features I
Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i NET110AA–1

NTX110AA
TA0370
Feature name
Turkish Tones Modification
Description
This feature expands the current Turkish tone set to conform with Turkish
Telecom specifications.
The following tones have been added/modified to satisfy the requirements of
these specifications:
• Number Unobtainable Tone
• Call Waiting Tone
• Special Information Tone
• Holding Tone
• Intervention Tone
These tones are downloaded from the central control (CC) during a
return-to-service (RTS), as part of the static data of the XMS-based
peripheral module (XPM).
Field TONESET in table LTCINV must be set to TURK100.
BCS history
Line or trunk peripherals must be provisioned with the NT6X69LA or
NT6X69LB message protocol and downloadable tones (MPDT) circuit
pack.
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
Datafill
Not applicable.
Service orders
Not applicable.
NTX110AA–2 297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

NTX110AA
TA0370
Not applicable.
Logs
Not applicable.
User interface
Not applicable.
Not applicable.
Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i NTX110AA–3

NTX000AA
Bilge
Feature package NTX000AA contents
AG0089 Super CC Sync and LDMATE

AG1239 MTCBASE Performance Enhancements
AL1274 Reload Restart in Restart Progression
AL2037 Concurrent Activity Manager
AL2044 Interrupt Level Trap Handling Enhancements
AL2110 Group Manager and Maintenance Base Enhancements
BC0786 Sanity Check Out
BC0988 Feature Package in SOS
BC1302 Generalized MAP Capability
BC1321 2.75 MW Program Store
BC1747 MAP Level for NOP
BC2300 Optimize MTCCLASS Tasks
BCS history
This feature package was created in BCS10.

NTX000AA
AL1274
Feature name
Reload Restart in Restart Progression
Description
AL1274 modifies the restart progression mechanism on NT40 and
SuperNode offices by attempting a reload restart prior to rebooting.
BCS history
There is an extra set of restarts on SuperNode because the NT40 causes a
reboot when the switch activity (SWACT) count reaches 0, and SuperNode
causes a reboot when the SWACT count becomes negative.

NTX000AA
AL2037
Feature name
Concurrent Activity Manager
Description
AL2037 reduces resource contention by limiting the number of concurrent
recovery activities initiated by the system recovery controller (SRC). This
feature also enhances the SRC by providing the following:
• reduced central control (CC) warm switch of activity (SWACT) outage
time
• active grouping to query members of static groups
BCS history
• AL1570—System Recovery Controller Interfaces
• AL1416—System Recovery Dependency Manager
Datafill
This feature increases program store by a maximum of 4 Kbytes and
increases data store by a maximum of 2 Kbytes.

NTX000AA
AL2044
Feature name
Interrupt Level Trap Handling Enhancements
Description
AL2044 reduces the number of restarts caused by traps in input/output (I/O)
interrupt handlers through the use of optional cleanup procedures.
BCS history
This feature applies neither to the NT40 switch nor to the micro-controller
subsystem (MCS).
Datafill
This feature increases program store by a maximum of 1 kbyte.

NTX000AA
AL2110
Feature name
Group Manager and Maintenance Base Enhancements
Description
AL2110 adds the following enhancements to the group manager:
• a new interface to the system recovery controller (SRC) that facilitates
bulk operations by partitioning a set of objects into a set of groups
AL2110 adds the following enhancements to the maintenance base
(MTCBASE) subsystem:
• new translation targets permit additional applications to display
user-specific information with the MTCBASE debug tool
• MTCBASE can be ported to a local application processor (AP) or link
trunk server (LTS) processor node
BCS history
This feature uses feature AL1570 (System Recovery Controller Interfaces).
Datafill

NTX001AA
Common Basic
AC0285 Dialed Loopbacks on Trunks

AC0308 Fixed Trunk Group Numbering—SMDR
AD2997 Trunk Group Expansion to 8K
AF0149 DIRP CI Robustness
AF0209 Device Independent Support for Application Data
Transmission
AF0916 Enhanced AMA Dump Capability
AF1237 Conference Circuit (3/6 Port) Diagnostic Enhancements
AF1452 Memory Administration—New OM
AF1461 DIRP Recording Space Usage Enhancements
AF1749 Real-time Input OM
AF1780 DIRP Space Rotation
AF2013 Office Routes Capacity Increase
AF2470 Special Application Patching
AF2531 Forced Sequence Application
AF2532 Obsolete Packaging
AF2705 DIRP DDP Reload and SWACT Recovery
AF2815 Patcher Integration
AF2816 Auto-apply Enhancements
AF5766 Parm E1 Outage Robustness Plan
AG0239 Format OM DIRP Output
AG0274 CC Support for DTU Busy, RTS and Test
AG0275 CC Support for DTU Downloading
AG0329 Real-time Study of Current DMSNOS I/F for LBR (Part I)
AG0336 Image Test Enhancements
AG0355 OM Output Robustness
—continued—

NTX001AA
Feature package NTX001AA contents (continued)
AG0361 High Water Mark OMs for CP, EXT, FTRQ

AG0568 Fixed Trunk Group Numbering for the OM System
AG0637 LMD OM Group Optimizations
AG0695 Trapinfo Enhancement
AG0696 Dynamic PC Reconfiguration
AG0724 ParmCalc—Verify Office Parameters (Phase 2)
AG0821 ParmCalc—Verification of Office Parms
AG0855 XPM Outgoing Message Flow Control
AG0919 Decouple CC Hardware and Software System Initialization I
AG1006 Scheduled XPM Patch Application
AG1007 Scheduled CC/CM Patch Application/Image
AG1082 Detection/Correction of Slow CP Babblers
AG1262 O/G Message Flow Control—Follow-up
AG1296 MTC Base Performance Tools
AG1818 CP Long Messaging Implementation I
AG1824 Matching Line Drawer Status over CC Warm SWACT
AG1868 Provide CC Warm SWACT Residency in All Loads
AG1869 CC Warm SWACT Man Machine Interface Enhancements
AG1922 Improve Memory Parity Detection
AG1924 NT40 Mismatch Handler Refinements
AG1925 NT40 CMC RTS Improvements (Diagnostics)
AG1927 BCSMON—Enhanced Monitoring Capabilities
AG2108 One Night Process Enhancements
AG2149 Core SWACT Restart Outage Reduction—Phase I
AG2150 Core SWACT Exec Optimization—Phase I
AG2255 CC Warm SWACT Module Check Program
AG2276 CC Warm SWACT Restart Outage Reduction—Phase II
AG2277 CC Warm SWACT MMI Enhancements—Phase II
AG2323 Logical Reformating for OTC
—continued—

NTX001AA
AJ0191 H/W—S/W Initialization Coordination—II

AJ0192 RCC/LCM Loading Enhancements I
AJ0194 CC Warm SWACT Enhancements
AJ0474 XPM P-side Data Distribution Enhancements
AJ0729 Trunks RTS Enhancements II
AJ1957 Table Integrity Checker
AJ1959 Table Version System
AL0044 Outage Footprint—Phase II
AL0045 Match Command Improvement
AL0046 Outage Footprint Facility
AL0047 Babbling Idiot Enhancements
AL0049 Enhanced LCM Overload Controls
AL0131 PM Autoloading—Phase II
AL0152 Close Logs to SCCS after Restarts
AL0195 ECCB Improvements
AL0205 OMPRT Output Buffering
AL0479 Trunk RTS Enhancements
AL0480 PM Map Enhancements
AL0481 XPM IPML Data Distribution
AL0482 XPM P-side Data Distribution
AL0914 Remote File System Improvements
AL0972 HX Immunity Regions for CI Processes
AL1052 Lost Messages—Reporting Enhancements
AL1149 User Passwords Survivability over BCS Application
AL1518 User Programmable LTP Levels
AL2417 Convert Series I PMs to Recovery Controller
AN0100 CMR Enhancements for ADSI
AQ0841 DMS-Bus Message Flow Control III
BC0046 T101 Agency Rework to Comtrunk
—continued—

NTX001AA
BC0047 T103 Agency Rework to TTLSUPV

BC0049 TTL2 Agency Rework to TTLMWBL
BC0050 T1 Maintenance Level
BC0083 Polling AMA Data—via Datapac—Manual
BC0084 System Monitor Display
BC0113 Polling AMA Data—via Datapac—Manual
BC0124 Interface to Co-located NE/AE Switchboard O/G
BC0125 Interface to Co-located NE/AE Switchboard I/C
BC0127 Interface to Co-located NE/AE Switchboard I/C
BC0156 2-Way (Local) EAS Trunk
BC0248 Identification of Intercept—Outpulse ANI Digit 9
BC0316 Allow Changes to Office Configuration Table
BC0325 Digital Recorded Announcement
BC0385 TSMS Peg Count Source and Disposition up to 16
BC0393 Traf SEP Destination Data
BC0458 (NSG) Route List Chaining
BC0485 NPE-Rework of PM MAP Displays
BC0506 OM Call Processing Restart Pegs (XRef 0382)
BC0628 MTCE Updates for CR TM
BC0637 Robustify TM MTCE
BC0667 Priority MAP Terminal
—continued—

NTX001AA
BC0668 MAP Software Enhancement

BC0672 Enhanced Real Time Indicator
BC0724 Alarming on DMS/RLM Links
BC0806 PM Autoloading—Phase I
BC0820 New Outgoing Idle Supervision for Trunks
BC0821 Trunk Signal Timing Changes
BC0937 OM Tape—Suppression of Zero Data
BC0938 OM Print—Suppression of Zero Data
BC0942 (NSG) Fast Routine to Get Time of Day in Clock
BC0980 Support for EEPROM Cards in DRA
BC0981 Loop Monitor Elimination on 2X83
BC0982 CONF6PR as 2 CONF3PR
BC0985 AMA Real-time Enhancements (AT&T Format)
BC0991 Terminating NPA in AMA Records
BC1017 Machine-independent SOS—Phase 1
BC1036 Default Data
BC1051 Minor POF Enhancement
BC1052 Licensee Foldback
BC1064 Modify TM Tone Diagnostics for NT2X59BA
BC1075 Carrier Enhancements
BC1078 Variable Timing—Analogue DP Trunk Reception &
Outpulsing
BC1090 Provide Optionality Hooks on DCMS
BC1108 Call Timing Office Parameter Cleanup
BC1163 LM Takeover/Takeback Diagnostic
BC1219 System Speedup
BC1241 OM—Outside Plant Measurements—Phase I
BC1273 Enhanced Priority Terminal
BC1295 DTMF Outpulsing on DTCS Without Senders
—continued—

NTX001AA
BC1357 Retention Test of Allocated Memory

BC1384 Enhanced DIRP File Cleanup
BC1392 MAP Support Tools
BC1403 Improved AMA Timing Compensation
BC1422 PM to Facility Maintenance Improvements
BC1433 PM Maintenance Enhancements
BC1490 CLLI Enhancements—BCSA APPL Speedup
BC1501 Peripheral Status Check Report before SWACT
BC1517 Call Processing Robustness
BC1717 AMA Preservation over Peripheral Warm SWACT
BC1729 Enable Gain on CLSI Network
BC1735 OM Xfer Speedup
BC1925 Query Command Enhancements
BC2015 Robustification of LM/RLM Maintenance
BC2016 Carrier Maintenance on MTCMAIN
BC2246 No-Call-Processing Alarm
BC2312 Log System Internal Control Cleanup
BC2330 Trunk Supervision over DTC SWACT—Preparatory
BF0170 DTC—DP Digit Reception/Outpulsing
BF0201 DTC Revertive Pulsing Firmware
BF0210 Revertive Pulsing Facility Maintenance
BF0218 LTC—Speech Path Diagnostic
BF0227 DTC MF Outpulsing Primitives
BF0285 LTC—BCS CC Application Support (C0863, C0864)
BF0363 LTC SWACT—Uncontrolled
BF0364 LTC—SWACT Peripheral Enhancement
BF0366 LGC 500/2500 CP
BF0369 LGC 500/2500 Enhanced CP
BF0374 LGC Backward BCS Compatibility
—continued—

NTX001AA
BF0380 102 Test Line Termination Level (See H0271)

BF0383 DS-1 Card Maintenance Enhancement
BF0389 LGC MP RT Improvements—Phase 2
BF0487 LTC Digit Collection Enhancement
BF0505 MPC ROM Maintenance and CC Loader
BF0568 CC Boot Loader Firmware Enhancement
BF0611 XPM Overload Control—1
BF0612 XPM Real-time Enhancements—BCS16
BF0642 1X67 Terminal Controller Improvements
BF0792 RLM SP Store Saving
BF0938 Trunk RTS Speed-up—Phase I
BF0939 Trunk RTS Speed-up—Phase II
BF0957 LCM Drawer Maintenance
BR0005 ONI to North Electric TSD
BR0010 Interface to Stromberg-Carlson Turret for ONI
BR0045 Outgoing Trunk to 3CL Switchboard (2X85)
BR0046 Incoming Trunk from 3CL Switchboard (2X86)
BR0061 AE LTD Interface
BR0066 Identification of Alarms—Outpulse ANI Digit 8
BR0070 Automatic Intercept Service (Outpulsed Called Number)
BR0084 7- or 10-digit Toll Calls without Prefix 1
BR0085 Remote Make Busy for 2X86
BR0092 115 Repair Service Regenerated to 7 Digits
BR0097 1200-Baud Dial-up Data Set
BR0113 Interface to SC XY for ANI/CAMA
BR0120 VDU & Printer Link Terminal Capability
BR0124 I/F to S-C TSC SCAMA ...ONI/ANIF...
BR0125 I/F to S-C ONI Turret Visual Indicators
BR0126 Dial-up Service Analysis
—continued—

NTX001AA
BR0135 Trunk I/F to AE No. 31 Switchboard

BR0141 Polling for OM Data (UDC Interface)
BR0146 Interface to Co-located NE/AE Switchboard O/G
BR0147 Interface to Co-located NE/AE Switchboard I/C
BR0162 MAP Support for BT100 Terminals
BR0165 Input Command Screening—I/O Port Restrictions
BR0202 Map Support for Cybernex Terminal
BR0221 Trunk Data Base Queries
BR0265 Digital Carrier Module for Small Remotes (DCM-RR)
BR0303 Digital Recorded Announcement
BR0314 Hard-coded OM Names
BR0365 Office ID in TTY Output Header Label
BR0377 Trunk 00S for Data Change
BR0394 Revertive Calls—Selective Announcements
BR0449 1+ Permissive and Non-permissive Dialing
BR0457 Bermuda Special Service Codes
BR0536 Critical Message Prioritization
BR0566 Bell (U.S.) Standard Announcements via PROM
BR0588 Automatic Busy-out of Trunks upon Integrity Check Failure
BR0599 KP & ST Acceptance on an ONI Call
BR0632 Password Command (SHOWPW)
BR0660 Treatment OMS—Separate Categories
BR0666 OM—Act. Call Disp OFZ
BR0667 OM—SBU & MBU on Per-Line PM Basis
BR0692 Local Audible Alarm Retirement
BR0699 Low-voltage Alarm Log Message
BR0710 Enhanced Reorder Treatment
BR0715 Freeze on Re-init Procedure
BT0005 File System
—continued—

NTX001AA
BT0029 Tones
BT0030 Translation and Screening
BT0032 Toll Connecting Trunk (DP/MF) (A/D)
BT0037 Recording Completing Trunk (Digital)
BT0038 Announcements
BT0040 Test Access Network
BT0043 Alarms
BT0066 Line & DN Inventory
BT0075 Table DMO
BT0091 LTSTL—102 (LOC) (O/G)
BT0092 LTSTL—103 (LOC) (O/G)
BT0095 LTP and Associated Level
BT0140 Inc. TTSTL 100
BT0145 O/G TTSTL 100
BT0152 Inc. Trunk Signaling—RB
BT0153 Inc. Trunk Signaling—EM
BT0154 Inc. Trunk Signaling—SF
BT0156 Inc. Trunk Pulsing Control—Immediate Dial
BT0157 Inc. Trunk Pulsing Control—Wink Start
BT0158 Inc. Trunk Pulsing Control—Delay Dial
BT0160 Inc. Trunk Supervision—Hit
BT0161 Inc. Trunk Supervision—INC. Disconnect
BT0162 Inc. Trunk Supervision—Ring Forward
—continued—

NTX001AA
BT0163 Inc. Trunk Supervision—Reverse Make Busy

BT0166 O/G Trunk Signaling—RB
BT0167 O/G Trunk Signaling—EM
BT0168 O/G Trunk Signaling—SF
BT0170 O/G Trunk Pulsing Control—Immediate Dial
BT0171 O/G Trunk Pulsing Control—Wink Start
BT0172 O/G Trunk Pulsing Control—Delay Dial
BT0174 O/G Trunk Pulsing Control Stop-Go Operation
BT0175 O/G Trunk Pulsing Control Var. Interdigital Time
BT0178 O/G Trunk Supervision—Reverse MB
BT0179 O/G Trunk Supervision—Ring Forward
BT0181 2-Way Trunk Glare Resolution
BT0182 2-Way Trunk Guard Timing
BT0183 Toll Translation and Screening
BT0225 MTCE—Core
BT0228 MTCE—Trunk Diagnostics
BT0229 MTCE—TTP
BT0242 Per-Call Testing (Toll)
BT0243 OM—Management
BT0246 ALM—Internal
BT0247 ALM—External
BT0249 ALM—Dead Office (Host)
BT0251 Network Management (PHI)
BT0300 Incoming CAMA
BT0304 Pulsing MF
BT0305 Pulsing DP
BT0306 Pulsing Control IM
BT0307 Pulsing Control WK
BT0308 Pulsing Control DD
—continued—

NTX001AA
BT0311 Pulsing Control Stop Go (SG)

BT0313 Pulsing Control VIDT
BT0315 Supervision Disconnect
BT0316 Supervision Answer
BT0317 Supervision Ring Forward
BT0318 Supervision Ring Back
BT0319 Supervision Hit
BT0320 Supervision RMB
BT0321 Supervision Guard Timing
BT0323 Supervision Glare
BT0324 Outgoing Trunk Selection
BT0326 Tones and Announcements
BT0327 2-Way E/M
BT0328 Inc/Out RB/SF MF/DP
BT0329 Inc/Out SF/RB MF/DP
BT0330 Inc/Out RB/RB MF/DP
BT0331 Inc/Out EM/RM MF/DP
BT0334 Trunk Irregularities
BT0336 Inc/Out TTSTL 100
BT0342 Inc/Out TTSTL Loop Around
BT0346 OM—Common (Pegs & Usage)
BT0348 Operational Measurements (Basic Toll)
BT0350 Inc. SWBD Trunk (V6)
BV0001 Output Routing and Reporting
BV0006 Dead System Alarm Version 2
BV0018 DMO Command Screening
—continued—

NTX001AA
BV0022 Thresholding of Critical Resources

BV0023 Alarms—(LM + Lines)
BR0325 Provision of 1024 Route Ref—Indices in Route Ref. Table
BV0038 Trunk Data Inventory Queries
BV0040 Input Command Screening
BV0073 DMO Command Editing
BV0409 Input Command Screening—Automatic Log On
BV1139 Per-Call Capacity Enhancement
NC0086 Standard Pretranslation Expansion
NC0130 Load Route Selection Enhancements
NC0196 Standard Pretranslation Expansion—Phase II
TA0347 SLM III Firmware and Software Support for DMS-100i
39005679 MS/MLS clock card NT9X53AD

End
BCS history
BCS42i—Feature TA0347 added.
BCS44.1 –– Feature 39005679 added.
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX001AA
AD2997
Feature name
Trunk Group Expansion to 8K
Description
AD2997 increases the limit on the number of trunk groups in an office from
2047 to 8191.
BCS history
This feature applies to all DMS-100 family product lines that support trunks,
and to SL-100.
The size of table TRKGRP cannot be larger than the size of table CLLI.
Table TRKGRP cannot be larger than 8191 tuples.
Tables that are expanded with table TRKGRP are not necessarily reduced
with table TRKGRP.
Not all tables that are keyed by trunk group are increased to 8191 tuples.
A request for an Engineering Administrative Data Acquisition System
(EADAS) trunk group list audit provides data only on the first 2048 trunk
groups datafilled on the switch.
This feature interacts with feature AD2796 (CLLI Table Expansion to 8K).

NTX001AA
AD2997
Datafill
Table Description
AABSOST, Maximum table size increased from 2047 to 8191 tuples

ACDTKMEM,
AMATKOPT,
AOSSBC,
ATTSCHED,
BRANDOPT,
C6TRKMEM,
C7TRKMEM,
DATRKOPT,
D3MAINTD,
ESAFTKPH,
KTMINMAX,
MCCSOST,
NWMCLLI,
OICBC,
PARSDENY,
SILCNWM,
SSPTKINF,
TOPEATRK,
TOPSACTS,
TOPSBC,
TOPSCOIN,
TOPSOIC,
TRKAREA,
TRKGRP,
TRKLATA,
WATS, and
XFROPSEL
VPNTRMRT Range of values in field TRMTRK is modified from 0 to 2047 to
0 to 8191
MCLLICDR Range of values in field EXTNUM is modified from 0 to 2047 to
0 to 8191
TRKMEM With an average of 11 words of data store for each trunk
member, trunk size is limited only by the amount of data store
available (maximum 16,000,000 tuples).
TRKSGRP Table can have up to two tuples for each tuple in table
TRKGRP (maximum 16,384 tuples).

NTX001AA
AD2997
Logs
Logs AMAB122, AMAB160, and AMAB180 are modified. For all three
logs, the highest possible trunk group number in fields ICTRKID and
OGTRKID is modified from 2047 to 8191. Previously, trunk group number
2047 was reserved for a NULL or NOT APPLICABLE value. This feature
changes the NULL value to 8191.
User interface
The following command interface commands are modified to allow the
expanded indexing of up to 8191 trunk group related items:
• TESTDB in directory IYTESTDB
• NEKTEST in directory MNEKTEST
• NEKTEST in directory UNEKTEST
• NEKTEST in directory NEKTEST
• DISP_MTRBLK in directory TESTMTK
• OTGDTST in directory TEST2355
• TRKCONV in directory C7TCVMAP
• CPSELECT in directory CPSEL

This feature modifies automatic message accounting (AMA) record codes
BB, BC, and BE. The fields OG_TRUNK_ID and IC_TRUNK_ID in the
AMA records are modified to have a range of 0 to 8191. A value of 8191
indicates that the incoming or outgoing agent involved in the call is not a
trunk.

NTX001AA
AF1749
Feature name
Realtime Input OM
Description
AF1749 provides additional information for the REAL::TIME tool on a PC
with LOTUS 1–2–3 to predict switch performance based on accurately input
data. Prior to this feature, information used by this tool was estimated.
The additional information provided by this feature is also used by LOTUS
1–2–3 tools such as PRTCALC and REAL::QUICK.
BCS history
This feature is limited by the real time available to the OM system to print or
store the information.
The following OM groups are added to display the required information:
• RTLTSUM is added to provide call origination and termination attempts
based on line or trunk type. Registers include RTOATT, RTOATT2,
RTTATT, and RTTATT.
• RTFEAT is added to contain information required by the REAL::TIME
tool that is based on call features rather than line or trunk type. This
group contains nine registers.
• RTEASUM is added to contain call attempts with a destination
corresponding to the tuple description. This group contains six keys.
Field ACBACBN is added to OM group ACB to count automatic call back
(ACB) attempts to a network. Field ARARN is added to OM group AR to
count auto recall (AR) attempts to a network.

NTX001AA
AF1780
Feature name
DIRP Space Rotation
Description
AF1780 offers a method of managing the space taken up by device
independent recording package (DIRP) files on disk. By using the space
rotatation technique, unexpired processed files are not erased by DIRP
before they have passed a retention period and operating companies have the
capability of setting the maximum size of a disk file. A space rotatation is
initiated when DIRP senses that the system is running low on free space or a
disk file reaches the size limit specified by the user. Under normal
circumstances, a space rotatation writes transfer records to the active file
before closing it.
BCS history
This feature only applies to disk.
When a subsystem uses a pool of devices (type TAPE or DPP), field
MAXDFSIZ in table DIRPSSYS has no effect on the subsystem files.
The old active file is always closed after space rotatations, regardless of the
setting of field ROTACLOS in table DIRPSSYS.
Datafill
The following table was modified for this feature:
Table Description
DIRPSSYS Field SPACROTE is added to specify if space rotate is enabled.
Field MAXDFSIZ is added to specify the maximum size of the

disk file (5 to 64 Mbytes).
This feature increases protected data store by less than 20 words.

Rotates are counted; therefore, higher peg counts occur because of this
feature.

NTX001AA
AF1780
Logs
A value, “space”, is added to reasons 12, 13, 14, and 15 of log DIRP101.
This indicates when a log is generated because of space rotation.
Although automatic message accounting is not modified by this feature,
transfer records 9013 and 9014 are observed more often.

NTX001AA
AF2013
Feature name
Office Routes Capacity Increase
Description
AF2013 increases the office route table (OFRT) capacity from 1023 entries
to 4092 entries by adding tables OFR2, OFR3, and OFR4. Tables
OFRTMA2, OFRTMA3, and OFRTMA4 are also added and are copies of
tables OFRTMAP. (Table OFRTMAP is a pretranslation table for integrated
services digital network (ISDN) routing, which is used as a map into table
OFRT. Tables OFRTMA2, OFRTMA3, and OFRTMA4 are present only in
ISDN feature packages.) Other tables are modified to include the table
name and route ID for a call.
BCS history
Tables OFRT, OFR2, OFR3, and OFR4 are limited to a maximum of 1023
routes per table.
Tables should be datafilled sequentially, starting with index 1.
This feature interacts with the translation verification utility and the service
order system.

NTX001AA
AF2013
Datafill
Table Description
OFRT, Field EXTRTEID includes tables OFT2, OFR3, and OFR4

ACRTE,
ACDGRP,
CTRTE,
DESTNODE,
DNRTE,
FARTE,
FNPACONT,
FTRTE,
IBNRTE,
IBNRT2,
IBNRT3,
IBNRT4,
IBNXLA,
INWTERTE,
OFCRTE,
PXRTE,
RTEREF,
STDPRT,
TREAT, and
WRDN
OFR2, Tables is added as a replica of table OFRT.
OFR3, and
OFR4
OFRTMA2, Tables isadded as a replica of table OFRTMAP.
OFRTMA3,
and
OFRTMA4
CLSVSCRC, Field TMTOFRT is modified to include the office route table
CLSYSCR name (OFRT, OFR2, OFR3, or OFR4) and route ID (0 to 1023).
CUSTANN Field CANNRTE is modified to include the office route table
name (OFRT, OFR2, OFR3, or OFR4) and route ID (0 to 1023).
This feature increases permanent data store by a maximum of 5 Kbytes.

NTX001AA
AF2470
Feature name
Special Application Patching
Description
AF2470 uses the SPECIAL APPLICATION field in the patch file to supply
warnings when checking, applying, or removing a patch.
BCS history
This feature causes the Auto Patch process to leave files in SFDEV that
would previously have been erased. Output files are kept by this auto patch
process for any patch with SPECIAL APPLICATION set to Y.
This feature requires the PATCHER in order to operate.
User interface
This feature causes the SPECIAL APPLICATION field to appear in the
INFORM LIST and adds it to the fields displayed in the DISPLAY
command. The new RESTART REQUIRED field is also displayed in the
INFORM LIST and DISPLAY commands.
The command syntax has not changed. There is a new warning from the
CHECK, APPLY, REMOVE, and PATCHEDIT commands for patches with
the SPECIAL APPLICATION field set to Y.
The INFORM LIST command header changes from AUT to ASR when the
SPECIAL APPLICATION and RESTART REQUIRED fields are added.

NTX001AA
AF2531
Feature name
Forced Sequence Application
Description
AF2531 ensures that patches are applied in sequential order and provides the
following:
• proper sequencing of patch applications
• the highest applied in-sequence number
• forced application of patches that are out of sequence
• an output log for forced applications
• patches ordered in table PATCTRL by sequence number
This feature is enabled by an office parameter in table OFCENG.

BCS history
This feature does not try to recalculate the highest sequence number or the
highest applied in-sequence number if a patch is removed. Once applied, a
patch is always considered applied for sequencing purposes.
Datafill
Table Description
PATCTRL Value OUT_OF_SEQ is added to field ACK to indicate a patch

that is required but is out of sequence.
OFCENG Office parameter APPLY_PATCHES_BY_SEQUENCE is added
to turn on forced sequence application of patches.
This feature increases protected data store by 120 words.

Logs
Log PCH103 is added by this feature. PCH103 is generated when office
parameter APPLY_PATCHES_BY_SEQUENCE is turned on and command
APPLY PATCHID FORCE is used to apply a patch that is out of sequence.
User interface
This feature adds a FORCE parameter to command APPLY. The FORCE
parameter is used to apply patches that are out of sequence.

NTX001AA
AF2531
This feature also adds output to command INFORM MISSING, including
the system log message, the date and time, the highest applied in-sequence
number, and a list of download-checked status patches.
If command GETPAT in directory PROGDIR finds a patch that is required
but will be out of sequence, the patch is put into table PATCTRL with field
ACK set to OUT_OF_SEQ.

NTX001AA
AF2532
Feature name
Obsolete Packaging
Description
AF2532 provides information for the application of packaged replacement
or obsolete patches to the DMS. It ensures that the proper category and
status update is recorded in the patcher inform list. This feature provides
enhancements for the attempted removal of replacement patches and for the
attempted application of an obsolete patch.
BCS history
The package application portion of this feature can be applied to central
control patching only. Patches applied by a package must be removed
individually, not as a package.
The prompts implemented by this feature are issued only for manual patch
actions.
This feature requires the PATCHER in order to operate.
User interface
Warnings and prompts are added to the REMOVE and the APPLY
commands. If users try to remove a package–applied patch, a warning and
prompt are issued. The prompt requires a YES or NO response. If users try
to apply an obsolete patch, a warning and prompt are issued.
Two new parameters, package applied (PA) and package replaced (PR), are
added to the INFORM STATUS command.

NTX001AA
AF2705
Feature name
DIRP DPP Reload and SWACT Recovery
Description
AF2705 creates device type DPP for switches using the distributed
processing peripheral (DPP) as a storage medium for automatic message
accounting (AMA) data.
The device independent recording package (DIRP) performs three types of
recovery on the DPP volumes:
• automatic recovery on reload restart, switch of activity (SWACT), or
BCS insertion
• recovery within 5 minutes after the magnetic tape drive system is
returned to service by a device audit
• instant recovery if, at the time of writing data, the active DPP volume is
unavailable, but the device system has returned to service. A new DIRP
file is opened to continue recording.
BCS history
It is not recommended that magnetic tape volumes be mounted to a pool of
DPPs for regular recording and parallel recording. A pool of DEVTYPE
DPP cannot be used for parallel recording.
During a BCS application, if the switch office is using a DPP, the device
type of the pool housing the DPP volumes in table DIRPPOOL should be
changed manually from TAPE to DPP before a SWACT occurs.
An image reboot is treated as a reload. Any bootable image containing DPP
must point to proper DPP hardware. A new image is required if the DPP
configuration is changed, as older images may point to incorrect hardware.
DPPs and tape drives should use different ranges.
Datafill
Table Description
DIRPPOOL DPP is added to the range of values for field DEVTYPE.

NTX001AA
AF2705
Logs
Three reason codes are added to log DIRP101: two regarding the success
and failure of DPP RELOAD/SWACT recovery and one regarding the
success of DPP real-time error recovery.

NTX001AA
AF2815
Feature name
Patcher Integration
Description
AF2815 provides an audit to monitor the status of XMS-based peripheral
module (XPM) and intelligent services node (ISN) patches in the central
controller and computing module (CC/CM), and the ISN and XPM. This
feature also provides:
• logs for patching sessions
• enhanced patcher error messages
• alarms for missing patches
BCS history
The patcher audit is not run during routine exercise (REX), dump and
restore, autoimage, or autopatcher operations. If one of these operations is
active when the audit is scheduled, the audit is cancelled and a log is
generated.
Log PCH104 is not generated during loadbuild.
Log PCH105 is generated only for actions performed through the patch
process. For example, a REMOVE action of an XPM patch does not go
through the patch process; therefore, log PCH105 is not generated if a
failure occurs.
This feature interacts with existing patcher code for CM nodes, ISNs, XPMs,
ISN and XPM maintenance, and the log system.
Datafill
Table Description
PATCHOPT Table is added to turn patcher functions on and off, and to

schedule optional patcher functions, such as the patch audit.

NTX001AA
AF2815
Logs
The following logs are added:
• PCH104 is generated when nine patch actions have been successfully
completed or when the user exits the patcher facility.
• PCH105 is generated immediately after a patch action fails.
• PCH106 is generated when nine ISN or XPM nodes or units are audited
successfully, or at the end of the audit.
• PCH107 is generated immediately after the ISN or XPM finds a
discrepancy during an audit, or if the audit cannot be run.

NTX001AA
AF2816
Feature name
Auto-apply Enhancements
Description
AF2816 enhances the Autopatch feature as follows:
• Log reports are provided during the autopatch session.
• Screen messages for command GETPAT are enhanced.
• Warnings are provided to maintenance personnel.
• Command interface commands are introduced to control the autopatcher.
• ACT patches are handled to allow almost 100 % of all released patches
to be be auto-applied.
• Switch sanity is monitored before and after the autopatcher process.
• A log message is generated and an alarm is produced to alert
maintenance personnel if the switch does not pass the sanity check.
BCS history
This feature does not allow GEN patches to have the AUTO field set to NO.
ACT patches can be applied automatically. If a patch requires a restart, it
should be written as a class C ACT patch.
Datafill
Table Description
PATSET Field PREMON is added to datafill the amount of time between

a LOGUTIL count snapshot and the start of the autopatch
process.
Field POSTMON is added to datafill the amount of time

between a LOGUTIL count snapshot and the end of the
autopatch process.
Field THRSHOLD is added to datafill a threshold value against

which the amount of change of LOGUTIL counts is compared,
to determine whether the autopatch process should run.
Field APLNSYNC is added to datafill whether patches are

applied in sync or out of sync.

NTX001AA
AF2816
Logs
The following logs are added by this feature:
• PCH108 is generated to summarize the auto-apply session.
• PCH109 is generated to summarize command GETPAT execution.
• PCH110 is generated when the autopatch session is cancelled by the
system.
• PCH111 is generated to display autopatch switch sanity.
• PCH112 is generated when command AUTOPATCHER is executed.
User interface
Command level AUTOPATCH is introduced. Maintenance personnel can
use command level AUTOPATCH to START, STOP, CANCEL,
SCHEDULE, or QUERY the autopatch process.

NTX001AA
AG0724
Feature name
PARMCALC – Verify Office Parameters (Phase 2)
Description
AG0724 provides a number of modifications and refinements to the output
of CI command PARMCALC.
BCS history
If batch change supplement monitoring (BCSMON) is not run prior to
command PARMCALC, an error message is displayed.
Limitations of the CI interpreter are taken into account in both table
PARMFORM and command PARMCALC output.
High water register operational measurements are applicable only to a subset
of the office parameters in table PARMFORM.
The maximum percent value usage cannot exceed 100 percent.
A stack size of 7000 is required prior to running command PARMCALC.
If a restart is required in order to change the value of an office parameter, but
it has not been performed, then the mean, peak percentage calculations, and
current value of the parameter are incorrect because the calculations are
based on the value datafilled in the specific table. For example, if a
parameter is set at 300 and changed to 500 without performing a restart, then
calculations are based on the 500 value.
User interface
Field MEMORY CHANGE (WORDS) is added to the output of CI
command PARMCALC to display the amount of memory in words that is
required if an office parameter in table OFCENG is increased in value or the
amount of memory in words that is saved if an office parameter in table
OFCENG is decreased in value. CI command PARMCALC ALL displays
an additional line at the end of the output to indicate the total amount of
memory that is required or saved. Output from command PARMCALC is
modified so that an office parameter’s name and its corresponding data are
displayed on one line. The output date is added to the output from the batch
change supplement monitoring (BCSMON) 30 day high water register.

NTX001AA
AG0919
Feature name
Decouple CC Hardware and Software System Initialization
Description
AG0919 enables central control (CC) hardware initialization tasks to be
decoupled from the software installation process in order to improve digital
multiplex system (DMS) office recovery. This feature is also used by the
following DMS hardware: ENET modules, line group controllers (LGC),
line trunk controllers (LTC), digital trunk controllers (DTC) and other
peripheral modules of ENET. This feature is transparent to the user.
BCS history
This feature can reduce recovery time.

NTX001AA
AG1082
Feature name
Detection/Correction of Slow CP Babblers
Description
AG1082 provides error detection and correction of call processing terminals.
This feature identifies a terminal that has exceeded a predefined threshold
for call processing errors (specifically call suicides and traps) and removes
the terminal from service for diagnosis by system maintenance. If
diagnostics do not identify a problem, the terminal is returned to service. If
the terminal continues to be the source of call processing errors, it is
removed from service again and manual action is required to recover the
terminal.
BCS history
This feature disables terminals that are encountering excessive errors;
therefore, No Dial Tone conditions may occur on some lines.
A maximum of 32 terminals can be out of service at a time.
Information on trouble lines and trunks is not saved following a restart.
Datafill
The following tables were modified for this feature:
Table Description
OFCENG Office parameter CPERRORTHRESHOLD is added to specify

the maximum number of call processing errors allowed in 1
minute.
OVCAR Office parameters CMINALARM and CMAJALARM are added

to specify the minor, major and critical alarm thresholds for lines
with a failure flag of ’c’.
Each office parameter added to table OVCAR increases data store by

3 words.

NTX001AA
AG1082
Logs
Log LINE209 and log TRK424 are added by this feature. These logs are
generated when
• a line exceeds the call processing error thresholds for the first time and it
is scheduled for a system diagnostic test
• when the line fails the system–initiated diagnostic test
• when the line exceeds the call processing error thresholds within 15
minutes of system diagnosis
User interface
CI command POST in directory LN_LTP_DIR is modified to post line
entries of the CPTERMERR queue that are currently out of service. Also,
the parameters that are posted by diagnostic failure include CMIN and
CMAJ. CI commands ALMSTAT CMIN and ALMSTAT CMAJ in
directory LN_LTP_DIR are used to set the alarm thresholds for lines with
the ’c’ failure flag. The output of command ALMSTAT is modified to
include minor CPERROR (CMIN) and major CPERROR (CMAJ) alarm
statistics. CI command POST in directory TRK_TTP_DIR is modified to
post trunk entries of the CPTERMERR queue that are currently out of
service.

NTX001AA
AG1474
Feature name
Improved Terminal Response
Description
AG1474 moves all non-critical audit processes in the DMS-100 family
central control (CC) unit from the background scheduler class to the audit
scheduler class. Prior to this feature, approximately 20 percent of the 260
processes running in the background scheduler class were audit processes.
As a result of this feature, audit processes do not compete with the
background scheduler class for central processing unit (CPU) time and
terminal response time is improved by 10 to 40 percent.
BCS history
User interface
The symbol names for the scheduler classes in module NUCDEFS are
modified as follows:
• System Scheduler Class symbol changed from SYS7 to SYS
• System Tool Scheduler Class symbol changed from SYS6 to SYSTL
• Guaranteed Terminal Scheduler Class symbol changed from GBKG to
GTERM
• Audit Scheduler Class symbol changed from DBKG to AUDIT
• Idle Scheduler Class symbol changed from SYS0 to IDLE.
The following tools and CI commands are modified by the symbol name
modification:
• ANALYSIS
• FWTIMECT
• HOGCT
• OVERLOAD
• PREXCT
• PROCCT
• SCHEDCT
• SYSCT
• TERMCT
• TIMECT
• QUERY

NTX001AA
AG1818
Feature name
CP Long Messaging Implementation I
Description
AG1818 implements phase I of the base system that provides long
messaging capabilities for call processing (CP) applications.
This feature enhances CP to add:
• more peripheral types, that is, XMS-based peripheral modules (XPM)
with transaction processing task (TPT) and 6X69 messaging cards
• a larger terminal address space
• applications like Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) and
CLASS
BCS history
This feature affects only XPMs with TPT and 6X69 messaging.
This feature cannot transport message transport service messages. Remote
cluster controllers are not affected by this feature.
This feature requires 6X69 messaging in the XPMs in order to operate.
Datafill
The OFCENG parameter NUMLONGBUFFERS is changed. For
SuperNode, NUMLONGBUFFERS defaults to NUMCPLETTERS.
Logs
LOST114, a new LOST log, indicates that there are no available buffers in
the central control for long messaging.
LOST115, a new LOST log, indicates incomplete long messages for which
packets have been lost.
New reason text, basic format packetization (BFP) incomplete buffer, is
added to log AUD399. AUD399 indicates that the long buffer audit detected
an incomplete message for which a packet was lost.

NTX001AA
AG1824
Feature name
Matching Line Drawer Status Over CC Warm SWACT
Description
AG1824 provides automatic verification of line drawer states over a BCS
application, which is the process of upgrading an office to a new BCS.
BCS history
Restrictions and Limitations
Only the following peripheral modules are supported by this feature:
• line concentrating modules (LCM)
• remote line concentrating modules
• enhanced line concentrating modules for ISDN (LCME)
• ISDN line concentrating modules (LCMI)
• international line concentrating modules (ILCM)
• emergency stand alone line concentrating modules (ELCM)
• extended memory line concentrating modules (XLCM)
• Austrian line concentrating modules (ALCM)
• digital line module (DLM)
• remote digital line module
This feature interacts with the existing BCS application driver.
297-1001-801i Volume 1 of 3 January 2000 NTX001AA–37

NTX001AA
AG1868
Feature name
Provide CC Warm SWACT Residency in All Loads
Description
AG1868 provides the software necessary to make the central controller (CC)
Warm SWACT tools resident in all software loads.
BCS history
Only the SWACT base software is affected. International specific tools are
not affected.
This feature interacts with all applications that use SWACT.
This feature requires AG1511 (BCS Application Driver) in order to operate.
Logs
New logs are created to correspond with the feature becoming resident.
SWNR100 is converted to SWCT104 and is generated when the user needs
information during the execution of the Warm SWACT process.
SWNR101 is converted to SWCT107 and is generated after execs are
successfully loaded into nodes as part of the Warm SWACT process.
SWNR102 is converted to SWCT108 and is generated after an unsuccessful
attempt to load execs into the node during the Warm SWACT process.
Two new logs have been added to the STATUSUPDATE/STATUSCHECK
commands of the SWACT process. Log SWCT109 is used for
STATUSUPDATE/STATUSCHECK steps that PASS. Log SWCT110 is used
for STATUSUPDATE/STATUSCHECK steps that FAIL. These logs help to
identify problems that occur within STATUSCHECK during the Warm
SWACT process.

NTX001AA
AG1869
Feature name
CC Warm SWACT Man Machine Interface Enhancements
Description
AG1869 enhances the central controller (CC) Warm SWACT interface.
BCS history
User interface
The STATUS SWT command, which displays the current state of the
SWACT, is a new command found in the BCSUPDATE command interface
directory. The STATUS SWT command displays the critical steps that have
been completed, and whether the system is ready to perform the SWACT.
The DEBUGSET and SWCTSTATE commands are removed as options.
The DISP command is expanded to DISPLAY.
The ABORTSWCT command is a new command with the same function as
the RESTARTSWCT command. The RESTARTSWCT command is
changed and cannot be executed until the PRESWACT command has been
successfully completed. The OVERRIDE command can set steps as being
completed, but should be used only for steps that have been investigated for
the current application.

NTX001AA
AG1922
Feature name
Improve Memory Parity Detection
Description
AG1922 improves the system’s ability to detect program store and data store
port parity faults.
BCS history
User interface
Additional HELP information has been added to the TST command at the
PS and DS levels of the MAP. This additional information describes the
memory retention test function and provides a brief explanation of the
command. Also, test pattern values are recommended with the HELP
information.

NTX001AA
AG1924
Feature name
NT40 Mismatch Handler Refinements
Description
AG1924 improves log reports that indicate an NT40 central control
mismatch. If a central control fault or mismatch is not repairable by the
system, then log report messages are generated to insure that effective
actions are performed by operating company personnel to isolate the fault.
BCS history
Logs
Log reports CC102, CC105, and MISM have been modified to include new
reasons to indicate central control faults.
297-1001-801i Volume 1 of 3 January 2000 NTX001AA–41

NTX001AA
AG1925
Feature name
NT40 CMC RTS Improvements (Diagnostics)
Description
AG1925 modifies the return-to-service sequence of the central message
controller (CMC). This feature ensures that a CMC with a major fault is not
returned to service and that a CMC with a minor fault is not prevented from
returning to service.
BCS history
Logs
Logs CMC100 and CMC113 are modified to include new text strings to
indicate reasons for RTS failure.
User interface
New responses to the RTS command have been added at the CMC level of
the MAP to indicate reasons for RTS failure.

NTX001AA
AG1927
Feature name
BCSMON–Enhanced Monitoring Capabilities
Description
AG1927 modifies the BCS monitoring (BCSMON) system by providing
commands that display the following: a list of added patches, a list of the
twenty logs that have occurred most often in the switch, high water mark
registers for call processing (CP) occupancy, and the number of digit blocks
used by digilator tables. This feature also converts the BCSMON system to
a super command (SUPERCOM) within the switch. This enables a user to
enter the BCSMON level and execute BCSMON commands directly. A
special command is also added to provide a quick method of producing an
office performance report (OPR).
BCS history
Command OPR (Office Parameter Report) displays switch performance
monitoring system (SPMS) results only when the customer has purchased
feature package NTX738AB or NTX738AC.
The list of tables displayed by command DBLOCKS varies between offices.
With this feature, two or more BCSMON system users cannot
simultaneously display and reset data.
Datafill
This feature creates a protected table of integers using 1440 bytes of
memory and a protected procvar table using 16 words of memory; the store
is allocated upon entering a procedure, but is not kept permanently.
Commands added to the BCSMON system increase data store by 3 kbytes
and increase program store by 5 kbytes.
User interface
Directory BCSMON is added by this feature.
The following DUMP command options are modified by this feature:
• ALL option is renamed command DUMPALL.
• OMS option is renamed command OMS. This command now displays
only those operational measurements (OMs) that have a non–zero value.
• LOGCOUNT option is renamed command LOGCOUNT.
• RESTARTS option is renamed command RESTARTINFO.
• LOGS option is renamed command LOGBUFFER.

NTX001AA
AG1927
• CONFIG option is renamed command PMCONFIG.
• COUNTS option is renamed command EQPCOUNTS and several
additional counts are added.
• MEMORY option is renamed command MEMORY.
• LOADS option is renamed command PMLOADS.
• HIGHWATER option is renamed command HIGHPARMS and the
command is modified so that –1 is not displayed for days where no data
exists.
Command NEWPATCH is added by this feature to display the patches
applied to the switch. Command HIGHCPOCC is added by this feature to
display the peak percentage of central control (CC) time spent on call
processing (CP) for the last 30 days. Command HIGHLOGS is added by
this feature to display the twenty logs that have occurred most often in the
switch. Command OPR is added by this feature to display an office
performance report (OPR). Command DBLOCKS is added by this feature
to display the number of digit blocks used by the various digilator tables.
Command RESET ALL is expanded to include the reset of command
NEWPATCH.

NTX001AA
AG2108
Feature name
One Night Process Enhancements
Description
AG2108 enhances one-night-process data transfer utilities by reducing the
amount of time required to perform an on-site transfer of table data during a
DMS-100 BCS application.
Real-time savings are achieved by:
• identifying and flagging empty tables in advance
• reducing the number of lines of information output for each transferred
table
• automating manual steps
• leaving tables open during the dump and restore process
• eliminating the need to locate a tuple before the tuple is read
• eliminating the need to make more than one call to the original
procedure when datafilling a single tuple
BCS history
User interface
Output from command MOVEBCS is modified.
The following two lines of output are added during the setup of command
MOVEBCS before table data is moved:
• GETTING LIST OF EMPTY TABLES FROM ACTIVE SIDE
• FINISHED MARKING EMPTY TABLES AS COMPLETE
The output for the transfer of table data is reduced from four lines of
information to one.
The following status lines are removed wherever they occur:
• EXECUTING PRE-DUMP PROC FOR <table name>
• EXECUTING POST-DUMP PROC FOR <table name>
• EXECUTING PRE-STORE PROC FOR <table name>
• EXECUTING POST-RESTORE PROC FOR <table name>

NTX001AA NTX001AA
AG2149 AG2149
Feature name
Core SWACT Restart Outage Reduction—Phase I
Description
AG2149 provides enhancements that reduce the restart outage time
associated with a BCS upgrade.
BCS history
This feature affects only SuperNode switches.
Switches not supported by this feature include NT40 and DMS-100 or
DMS-200 international (SuperNode or NT40).
This feature interacts with existing software responsible for maintaining and
updating hardware states.
User interface
Command SWCTNORESTART is added to perform a CC warm switch of
activity (SWACT).

NTX001AA NTX001AA
AG2150 AG2150
Feature name
Core SWACT Exec Optimization—Phase I
Description
AG2150 loads second-generation XMS-based peripheral module (XPM)
execs before a central control (CC) warm switch of activity (SWACT) to
reduce outage time after the SWACT.
BCS history
This activity is visible only at the time of a BCS application. Feature
activity does not include series I peripheral modules (PM), DMS-100, or
DMS-200 international PM types.
This feature interacts with features AG1511 (BCS Application Driver) and
BC1675 (Enhanced Data Transfer Utility (EDT)).
Logs
Logs SWCT111 and SCWT112 are added. Log SWCT111 is generated
when exec preloading is complete. Log SWCT112 is generated for every
XPM that fails to have execs preloaded.
User interface
Command STATUS is added to query the status of the PRELOAD_EXECS
step that is initiated in PRESWACT.
Command RESTARTSWACT is modified to include a check to determine
which XPMs require execs to be loaded after a SWACT.

NTX001AA
AG2255
Feature name
CC Warm SWACT Module Check Program
Description
AG2255 searches both the inactive and active sides of a switch during the
pre-SWACT process for program modules required to perform a central
control warm switch of activity (SWACT). Missing modules are highlighted
and the following information is provided:
• missing program module name
• system impact (either critical or degradation)
• module responsibility
This feature also allows operating company personnel to override the

missing modules and continue the pre-SWACT process.
BCS history
This feature does not load missing modules; it only highlights missing
modules for further investigation.
The command MODCHECK is valid only on the active side when the
switch is out of synchronization.
A SWACT is not allowed until all highlighted missing modules have been
investigated and overridden.
This feature interacts with the following functions: SWACT (SWCTUI,
SWCTNRUI, SWCTCI), BCSUPDATE (APPLYUI), and EDT (DXFRUI).
Datafill
This feature increases permanent store by a maximum of 10 Kbytes.

NTX001AA
AG2255
Logs
Logs SWCT113 to SWCT 116 are added, as follows:
• Log SWCT113 is generated when a module check is completed
successfully.
• Log SWCT114 is generated when a module check fails.
• Log SWCT115 is generated to provide information on each missing
SWACT module.
• Log SWCT116 is generated to provide information on each overridden
module.
User interface
Command MODCHECK is added in directory SWCT. MODCHECK can be
issued repeatedly to perform the module check and highlight the missing
modules. The option OVERRIDE allows a missing module to be
overridden.

NTX001AA NTX001AA
AG2276 AG2276
Feature name
CC Warm SWACT Restart Outage Reduction—Phase II
Description
AG2276 modifies the switch of activity (SWACT) base code to support a
central control (CC) warm SWACT without a restart.
BCS history
This feature applies only to SuperNode switches (other than the DMS-100 or
DMS-200 International switch). This feature does not apply to NT40
switches.
This feature interacts with the software that maintains and updates hardware
states.
Datafill
This feature increases program store by a maximum of 1 Kbyte and
increases data store by a maximum of 1 Kbyte.

NTX001AA NTX001AA
AG2277 AG2277
Feature name
CC Warm SWACT MMI Enhancements—Phase II
Description
AG2277 reorganizes man-machine interface (MMI) output and allows the
isolation of applications that cause failures during a switch of activity
(SWACT).
BCS history
The change in spelling from SWCT to SWACT modifies directories
BCSUPDATE and SWACT.
Logs
Log SWCT106 is generated when a CC warm SWACT application
encounters execution problems.
Log SWCT110 is generated when a device status application fails.
User interface
Commands RESTARTSWCT, ABORTSWCT, FORCESWCT, and SWCT
are renamed.
Commands RESETALARM and STATUSUPDATE are deleted, and
command STATUSCHECK is modified.

NTX001AA NTX001AA
AG2323 AG2323
Feature name
Logical Reformatting for OTC
Description
AG2323 implements logical level data reformatting for tables that use old
table control (OTC). This feature provides a standard means of writing
restore-side reformats for OTC tables that is consistent with the existing new
table control reformat process.
BCS history
This feature interacts with the MOVEBCS process and the RESTAB utility.

NTX001AA
AJ0191
Feature name
Hardware–Software Initialization Coordination II
Description
AJ0191 provides more efficient system restarts for all of the following
digital multiplex system (DMS) switch components: networks, XMS-based
peripheral modules (XPM), line concentrating modules (LCM), and lines.
This feature is transparent to the user.
BCS history
Feature Interaction
This feature interacts with feature AG0919, Decouple CC Hardware and
Software System Initialization.
Datafill
This feature increases protected data store by the following amounts:
• 220 bytes for each group of 10 line concentrating modules (LCM)
• 560 bytes for each group of 10 XMS-based peripheral modules (XPM)
(assuming 5 peripheral-side LCMs) or 340 bytes for each group of 10
XPMs (assuming 0 peripheral-side LCMs, that is, digital trunk
controllers)
• 300 bytes for each network module (assuming a heavy load of peripheral
modules)
• 150 bytes for all lines.
In addition, the initialization manager (INITMGR) increases miscellaneous

store by 2000 bytes.
Logs
Log IMGR100 is added by this feature to report faults detected by the
initialization manager (INITMGR). For example, log IMGR100 is
generated when the initialization times out.

NTX001AA
AJ0194
Feature name
CC Warm SWACT Enhancements
Description
AJ0194 upgrades the central control (CC) Warm SWACT feature to
accommodate more switch activity (SWACT) applications of the DMS-100
family of switches. This feature supports BCS25 to BCS28 (inclusive) and
handles a larger number of SWACT applications for BCS28 and higher.
BCS history
The restrictions and limitations that apply to the CC Warm SWACT feature
also apply to this feature.
Command SWCT is available only when the NONRES module switch
activity command interpreter (SWCTCI) is loaded in the switch for BCS
applications and central control warm switch activities.
Datafill
This feature increases data store by approximately 150 words.
Logs
Log SWCT105 is added by this feature to describe the reason for central
control (CC) warm SWACT communication failure. For example, log
SWCT105 is generated when either the mate communication register (MCR)
or the MATELINK does not allow communication between the active and
inactive central processing units (CPU).
User interface
The responses to CI commands STATUSUPDATE, STATUSCHECK, and
DISP are modified to identify a node by its external identity or location. In
addition, CI command STATUSCHECK returns a value based on the return
reason. For example, value 6 indicates that communication with the MATE
failed.

NTX001AA
AJ0729
Feature name
Trunk Return to Service (RTS) Enhancements II
Description
AJ0729 modifies feature AL0479, Trunk RTS Enhancement, by reducing the
call processing unit (CPU) time required to return trunks on line trunk
controllers (LTC) and remote cluster controllers (RCC) to service, when the
peripheral module is returned to service. Prior to this feature, trunk return to
service (RTS) enhancements dealt with digital trunk controllers (DTC) only.
This feature also reduces the number of return to service messages when an
entire carrier is returned to service and reduces the amount of real time, to
enable the call processing unit (CPU) to perform other functions.
BCS history
This feature uses the unused store on the 6X47AB card (2 M memory).
This feature is available only for trunks using standard trunk return to
service (RTS).
The amount of time required to send trunk data is directly proportional to the
amount of data to be sent.
The maximum amount of data is sent when all trunks on a peripheral module
use standard trunk return to service and every trunk belongs to a different
subgroup.
Trunk data is sent during office reloads and when peripheral modules are
returned to service (only when the trunk data has changed).
Datafill
This feature increases XMS-based peripheral module (XPM) data store by
11000 bytes and increases XPM program store by 7000 bytes. DSTEMP
store is increased by 1000 words for each XPM, while the static data is
being sent to the XPM. Once data has been loaded, the DSTEMP store is
released.

NTX001AA
AJ1957
Feature name
Table Integrity Checker
Description
AJ1957 verifies data integrity on a DMS switch, replacing the existing data
verification tool CHECKTAB. The improvement provided by the
TABAUDIT is that it runs with the switch in sync as a command interpreter
(CI) process. CHECKTAB operates on the inactive side of a DMS switch;
while it is running, the inactive side is not available for backup service.
BCS history
TABAUDIT allows only one session to be active at a time, except for the
following situations:
• TABAUDIT is excuted on different tables using the TABAUDIT only
command.
• TABAUDIT is excuted on the same table using the TABAUDIT only
command and no output device is specified.
• One session is either TABAUDIT ALL or TABAUDIT FROM and
another session is TABAUDIT only.
This feature interacts with existing table controls and the data dictionary to
verify table data syntax.
User interface
This feature adds command TABAUDIT at a MAP terminal to initiate data
verification.
This feature modifies command CHECKTAB at a MAP terminal to indicate
replacement of the CHECKTAB tool with the TABAUDIT tool.

NTX001AA
AJ1959
Feature name
Table Version System
Description
AJ1959 provides the ability to identify and manage table-control changes
that occur after the development of a general software release. This feature
deals specifically with changes that provide additional feature capabilities
but also affect the format of customer data table entries.
BCS history
Patches may be written in BCS31 to BCS33 and any active SPARE streams
to ensure operation of this feature when transferring data from one of these
loads to the BCS34 load.
This feature interacts with command RESTAB, MOVEBCS messaging, and
designer-written, restore side formats.
This feature affects storage and reference of equivalent types. Feature
misuse results in data transfer errors during MOVEBCS.
Datafill
This feature increases program store by a maximum of 4 Kbytes.
User interface
This feature modifies commands RESTAB and RFMTDISP VERSIONS at a
MAP terminal.
Command RESTAB recognizes a new data modification order (DMO)
command that is followed by a list of numbers specifying the table’s version
history.
Command RFMTDISP VERSIONS displays the version history of all tables
that indicate a version.

NTX001AA
AL0479
Feature name
Trunk Return to Service (RTS) Enhancement
Description
AL0479 reduces the amount of central processing unit (CPU) time required
to return trunks on digital trunk controllers (DTC) to service. This feature is
achieved by reducing the number of return-to-service (RTS) messages when
an entire carrier is returned to service and reducing the amount of real time
to enable the CPU to perform other functions.
BCS history
This feature is not supported for small load digital trunk controllers or any
Series I peripherals.
The amount of trunk data to be sent depends on the number of subgroups to
which the trunks on the digital trunk controller belong (more subgroups
equals more data and time needed).
Trunk data is sent during office reloads and when digital trunk controllers
are returned to service (only when the trunk data has changed).
All large digital trunk controllers should be loaded with digital trunk
controller (DTC) loads only, as they cannot be returned to service with other
loads.
Datafill
This feature increases digital trunk controller (DTC) data store by
10200 bytes. While digital trunk controller static data is being loaded, an
extra 1000 bytes of data store is required for each digital trunk controller.

NTX001AA
AL0914
Feature name
Remote File System Improvements
Description
AL0914 modifies the robustness, maintainability, and error handling of the
remote file system. Robustness is improved through changes to the
communication protocol. Maintainability is improved by separating the part
of the file system that handles remote node communication from the rest of
the file system which deals only with local files. In normal operation, the
user is not aware that the remote file system has been modified.
BCS history
The maximum number of files that can be open concurrently is limited only
by the amount of free store available.

NTX001AA
AL1052
Feature name
Lost Messages Reporting Enhancements
Description
AL1052 modifies the lost log reporting system to
• improve the format of log text
• provide internal support for a programming interface that notifies feature
applications when lost logs occur for particular equipment
• locate the lost log reporting system in one module, LOSTLOGS.
BCS history
Datafill
This feature increases data store requirements by 25 words at the time of
implementation; this enables five applications to supply log formatting and
system action targets. If the number of applications increases, 5 additional
words of data store are required for each new application. Internal queues
require 5,600 words of store. Program store requirements are dependent on
the individual applications using this feature.
Logs
Logs LOST101 to LOST112 inclusive are modified to identify the following
fields:
• actual message
• application information
• buffer type
• date reported
• device number
• interrupt handler reason
• IO error number
• lost log number
• lost log type
• lost message ID
• message type
• node number
• route
• terminal number
• time reported

NTX001AA
AL1052
Prior to this feature, information was output in a numerical dump with no
fields identified. Log LOST113 is added by this feature; it is generated
when the LOST logs system is overloaded with a large number of LOST
messages.

NTX001AA
AL1149
Feature name
User Passwords Survivability over BCS Application
Description
AL1149 ensures that all user passwords are preserved following a BCS
upgrade by including the user password information as part of table
USERINF. This feature also provides password security, because passwords
are temporarily encrypted during the dump phase and decrypted during the
restore phase and table USERINF cannot be accessed by customers.
BCS history
The dump and restore process of table USERINF should be one of the last
tables completed on the customer’s premise. This ensures that all user
changes that take place during the 5-day BCS upgrade are captured.
This feature interacts with the PASSWORD command, the Dump and
Restore feature, and the Table Control feature.
Datafill
Table Description
USERINF Four fields are added by this feature: E_P_C, PASSWORD,

HASHED_PASSWORD, and PASSLENGTH.
User Interface
Command PERMIT is used to datafill table USERINF for the first time. For
subsequent image upgrades, the dump and restore process datafills table
USERINF automatically and the table is not accessible to users.

NTX001AA
AL1518
Feature name
User Programmable LTP Levels
Description
AL1518 allows users to define their own line test position (LTP) levels at the
MAP. New commands are still implemented and assigned a default value,
but users can create menus for LTP sublevels and can control the availability
and display of sublevel commands.
BCS history
The added flexibility of the LTP sublevels applies only to the existing
sublevels (LTPMAN, LTPLTA, LTPDATA) and to the user-defined
sublevels. This feature does not apply to the optional sublevels IBNCON,
CSDDS, or LTPMTR.
Sublevels of a user-defined sublevel are not supported by this feature.
Command names in the user-defined levels must be unique. Two commands
cannot have the same command string.
This feature allows a maximum of 16 user-defined sublevels. Each sublevel
can have a maximum of 32 available commands (displayed or hidden).
Users cannot create macros of existing LTP sublevel commands.
Tuples in the table LTPDEF cannot be deleted because Dump and Restore
does not delete tuples for replacement tables.
Binary man-machine interface (BMMI) cannot translate the user-defined
names in table control.
• Data Dictionary
• Table Control
• Dump and Restore

NTX001AA
AL1518
Datafill
Table Description
LTPDEF New table is added.

LTPAUX New table is added.
A new table, LTPDEF, is added and contains the entries for the sublevels
LTPMAN, LTPLTA, and LTPDATA.
A new table, LTPAUX, is added and contains the entries for the
user–defined levels.
User interface
Although this feature interacts with the user interface to provide customized
LTP MAP sublevels, the user interface has not changed for line
maintenance.
The user–defined sublevel names are accepted as valid commands in the
LTP level and sublevels.
The LEVEL command is updated to accept user–defined sublevel names as
parameters. The HELP information for the LEVEL command is updated to
display the user-defined sublevel names as valid sublevel parameters.

NTX001AA
AL2319
Feature name
DDM Capacity Enhancement to Support More Than 200 DTC7
Description
AL2319 investigates the ability of the distributed data manager (DDM) to
support more than 200 digital trunk controller 7 (DTC7) units (the previous
maximum was 106). DDM performs four basic functions for applications:
data synchronization, audit, operational measurements (OM) collection, and
dynamic updating. This feature investigates the capacity to support DTC7s
only for the OM and dynamic updating functions.
BCS history

NTX001AA
AL2417
Feature name
Convert Series I PMs to Recovery Controller
Description
AL2417 provides the software support for Series-I peripheral modules (PM)
to utilize the system recovery controller (SRC) for coordination of the
recovery activities. This feature allows the system automatically to load
system busy (SysB) PMs. The SRC provides a faster recovery interval and
reduces the frequency of manual action.
BCS history
Feature AL2417 also interacts with feature AL2037 (Concurrent Activity

Manager).
Datafill
This feature increases data store by a maximum of 1 Kbyte and increases
program store by a maximum of 10 Kbytes.

NTX001AA
AN0100
Feature name
CMR Enhancements for ADSI
Description
AN0100 enhances the maintenance operations available to the peripheral
module (PM) level of the MAP. This feature allows a craftsperson to load
the Custom Local Area Signaling Service (CLASS) modem resource (CMR)
card without first loading the XPM.
BCS history
This feature requires the XPM to be equipped with two CMR cards
(NT6X78), one for each XPM unit.
The XPM unit must be in service (InSv) or in-service trouble (ISTb) when
the CMR card that resides in it is loaded.
The CMR card must be manual busy (ManB) when it is loaded.
The following optional parameters of command LOADPM are not supported
when loading the CMR card: FORCE, ALL, 1_name, r_name.
The command interpreter (CI) process is suspended and a message is
displayed at the MAP terminal if a CMR card is loaded in an active unit of
an XPM. This action affects real-time call processing for the XPM unit.
The CMR should be loaded during off-peak office hours, unless an
emergency deems it necessary to load during busy hours.
This feature interacts with existing MAP PM level software, MAP PM level
maintenance software, and XPM maintenance software.
• AG1215—CLASS: CMR Firmware Downloading
• AG0779—CLASS: CMR Resource Management
• AG1161—CLASS: CMR Maintenance

NTX001AA
AN0100
User interface
This feature modifies command LOADPM in directory LGCDIR by adding
the optional parameter CMR to specify that only the CMR card is loaded.
Depending on the syntax used, this may be the CMR cards in each unit of
the XPM, or just one CMR card in a particular unit.

NTX001AA
AQ0841
Feature name
DMS-bus Message Flow Control III
Description
AQ0841 introduces DMS-bus hardware message flow control using the
N04C device and the card maintenance unit (CMU) firmware (NT9X17AA
and NT9X17AD). This feature is intended for SuperNode four-port
interface cards. This feature enhances BCS33 feature AL1884 (DMS-Bus
Message Flow Control II). This feature exercises the message flow control
capability of N04C in various configurations with different control
parameters and documents the results.
BCS history
This feature requires the N04C device and CMU firmware (NT9X17AA and
NT9X17AD) on SuperNode four-port interface cards.
Datafill
This feature increases program store by a maximum of 1 Kbyte.

NTX001AA
AR0225
Feature name
AINSSP—Basic Trunk Trigger Processing
Description
AR0225 restructures basic trunk call processing software into the Advanced
Intelligent Network (AIN), Release 0.1 ‘‘Basic Call Models.” This feature
also implements the AIN trigger detection points (TDP) applicable to trunk
type agents. AIN is a service-control architecture that is engaged during
basic call processing when a certain event occurs or a pre-specified
condition is met.
BCS history
This feature supports the following trunk facilities: IBNT1, IBNT2, IT, T1,
and T2.
All domestic ISDN user part (ISUP) trunk facilities are supported along with
multifrequency (MF), dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF), and dial-pulse
(DP) signaling type trunks associated with the trunk types listed above.
This feature uses the following features:
• AR0219 AINSSP Base: Trigger Tables
• AR0222 AINSSP Base: FPE Based Trigger Processors
(Orig/Term)
• AR0223 AINSSP: AIN Line Call Processing to Support
Orig/Term Trigger
• AR0224 AINSSP Base: FPE to Support into Collect/Analyzed
Triggers
• AR0226 AINSSP: Message Encoder/Decoder I

NTX001AA
NC0086
Feature name
Standard Pretranslation Expansion
Description
NC0086 expands the number of pretranslator names in the table STDPRTCT
from 256 to 1024.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
STDPRTCT Tuples added
In table STDPRTCT, the maximum number of tuples that can be datafilled is

increased from 256 to 1024.

NTX001AA
NC0130
Feature name
Load Route Selection Enhancements
Description
NC0130 enhances the DMS-100 central control (CC) autoload process as
follows:
• if necessary, all eight potential load routes are attempted by the CC
• the data store (DS) parity correction routine is performed once during the
autoload process
BCS history
This release of CC firmware can be implemented on the following cards:
NT1X46CA, NT1X46CB, NT1X46CC, NT1X46CD, and NT1X46DA. The
resulting product engineering code (PEC) is NT1X46EA.
A swap out of NT1X46 cards is required to implement this feature. Since
the CC must be dropped out of synchronization for the replacement,
replacement should be completed during a low traffic period.
This feature cannot detect a corrupt load.

NTX001AA
NC0196
Feature name
Standard Pretranslation Expansion—Phase II
Description
NC0196 expands the maximum number of tuples with expansion data in the
standard pretranslator (STDPRT) subtables associated with table
STDPRTCT.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
STDPRTCT Table is expanded to maximum of 2048 tuples with expansion

data for each subtable.
This feature increases data store by 5 to 10 Kwords, depending on the office

datafill in table STDPRTCT, and increases program store by 4 Kbytes.

NTX001AA
TA0347
Feature name
SLM III Firmware and Software Support for DMS-100i
Description
This feature propagates the functionality to incorporate the system load
module (SLM) III into the DMS network for the international market. The
initial code changes were introduced by feature AR1828 (SLM III Firmware
and Software Support).
The general focus of this feature is to make SLM III available for both the
SuperNode and SuperNode SE switches with minimum effort.
Release history
Two NT9X44AD SLM III assembly cards and six NT9X19AA filler plates
are required.
User interface
When you try to back up a volume or file to tape, a warning message is
displayed if there is not enough capacity on the tape.

NTX001AA
39005679
Feature name
Clock card NT9X53AD on DMS100i
Description
This feature provides the software support for the NT9X53AD clock card on
the message switch (MS)/local message switch (LMS). The NT9X53AD
replaces clock cards NT9X53AA, NT9X53AB, and NT9X53AC.
The MS synclock software synchronizes the Master MS to the external
source. The external source can be a Stratum 3 clock or a reference T1
signal from another office. The master clock provides the clock and frame
pulse signal to the DMS100i switch.
The maintenance software solves the problems related to hardware. This
software sends card maintenance unit (CMU) messages to and from the MS.
The NT9X53AD clock card provides the following enhancements:
• This feature uses a dual frequency oscillator to generate the system and
subsystem clocks. This design provides reliability and a stable clock
relationship. This design also removes the need for a phase locked loop
(PLL) synchronization algorithm.
• The card’s fault detectors can detect excessive or missing clock and
frame pulse signals. The NT9X53AD clock card provides more fault
detectors than its predecessors.
• An analog to digital converter monitors the output of the digital to
analog (DAC) converter chip.
• The NT9X53AD has circuitry to allow the two MS clocks to
communicate through the mate clock cable. This allows operating
company personnel to make sure the system has one master MS and one
slave MS.
• The NT9X53AD clock card uses a more accurate phase detection circuit
than its predecessors. This circuit increases synchronization
performance when syncing to a reference clock or mate MS clock.
• The program memory size (SRAM) increases from 32K bytes to 64K
bytes.
• The data memory size increases from 8K bytes to 16K bytes.
• This feature provides full functionality when working in LMS.
• This feature provides a circuit and method for regulating the timing
between the system and subsystem frame pulses.
The clock card CMU allows operating company personnel to perform the
following circuit pack functions:
• message with the MS/LMS processor

NTX001AA
39005679
• message with the remote clock module
• control a maximum of two separate PLLs
• perform background maintenance, including fault detection
• configure a DMS office as one of the following:
— master external office
— master internal office
— slave office
— remote office (LMS)
The NT9X53AD clock card supports downloadable firmware loads. The

loads can exist in an SRAM or erasable programmable read only memory
(EPROM).
The clock card runs the EPROM version when the MS executes some
maintenance procedures. For the time of these procedures, the MS
processor runs on its firmware in the EPROM, for a short period of time.
The MS begins to run its software load, which executes the clock firmware.
The EPROM version must be compatible with the syntax of the MS
processor firmware.
The NT9X53AD clock card stores its firmware in an SRAM, which allows
faster downloading. The SRAM version must be compatible with the syntax
of the MS processor software.
BCS history
Feature 39005679 was introduced in BCS44.1i.
This feature requires NT9X53AC and NT9X53AD.
The software for clock card NT9X53AD does not support the following
functionalities:
• the mate clock cable communication facility
• the 32.768 MHz on the master message switch (MS) will not be
available to improve office synchronization performance
• the time of day (TOD) clock facility
Clock card NT9X53AD enables Stratum 2 for NT9X53AD for the INT45
offstream in the DMS library.

NTX001AA
39005679
Datafill
This feature provides the following changes to table SYNCLK:
• Field REMOTE_CLOCK_CONFIG is not available.
• Operating company personnel can enter Stratum 2 datafill for the
NT9X53AD card.
• If the office is in an incorrect clock configuration, the TABAUDIT
command fails.
Table MSCDINV supports code NT9X53AD.
Service orders
Not applicable
Not applicable
Logs
Logs MS104, MS307, MS400, and MS1000 report the clock faults specific
to NT9X53AD.
User interface
This feature adds the following changes to the user interface commands:
• Card lists that the system generates at the MS MAP level can include
clock card NT9X53AD.
• Faults that the system reports from the MS MAP level can include faults
specific to NT9X53AD.
• Command QUERYCD displays a single clock firmware load.
• Command TABAUDIT changes to fail if the office has an incorrect
clock configuration.
• Command PRECHECK on the ONP identifies clock configurations that
are not recommended or supported.
Not applicable

NTX041AB
CCS7 — MTP SCCP
This feature package contains features that modify linkset management. It
also allows for national and international variations of point codes.
This feature package applies to DMS-100 SuperNode and DMS-STP offices.
Feature package NTX041AB contents
AL1248 CCS7 Base Expansion

AL1249 CCS7 Static Data Audits
AL1499 CCS7 CC Store Reduction for NT40
AL1249 CCS7 Static Data Audits
AL1496 Removal of CLLI from CCS7 RTESET and LINKSET
AL2334 SRC Controlled Restart and No-Restart SWACT for CCS7
NC0110 MSB7 OMs
AL1344 CCITT7 MTP Australian Screening
BF0650 CCS7 — Signaling Terminal
BC1814 CCS7 Base
BC2289 CCS7 Base Insertion
BV2000 CCS7 Link Set Management
BF0551 CCS7 MSB Commissioning Load
BF0526 CCS7 MSB ST Interface Handling
BV2001 CCS7 Route Set Management
BF0658 CCS7 SCCP for SSP
BF0550 CCS7 ST Commissioning Load
BF0457 CCS7 ST MP Buffer Retrieval
BF0454 CCS7 ST MP Pro/Congestion Control and Flow Control
AC0443 Data Manager Robustness
BF1025 Generalize XPM/MSB7 Channel Allocation
BC1807 Linkset — Basic Link Management — MSB
BC1811 Linkset — Man Machine Interface — CC
—continued—
Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i NTX041AB–1

NTX041AB
Feature package NTX041AB contents (continued)
BC1813 Linkset Table Control — CC

AC0228 MTP — CC Restart Handling Improvements
AC0150 MTP — CC Routing Capability
BC2292 MTP — Congestion Handling
BC2290 MTP — Congestion/Timer Option Table Control
AC0149 MTP — COV, CBK, Reroute Enhancements
AC0225 MTP — Distributed Data Audits and OM Collection
AC0226 MTP — Distributed MTP Data
AC0148 MTP — Generic Distributed Data Manager
AL0076 MTP — Message Transfer Part
AC0223 MTP — Multi-MSB Capability
AC0220 MTP — Multi-MSB MMI
BF1024 MTP — Point Code Routing Algorithm
BC2291 MTP — Quasi Associated Signaling
BF0989 MTP — Robustness Improvements
AC0411 MTP — Robustness Improvements
BC2293 MTP — ST Pools for CCS7 Signaling Links
BF0942 MTP Audits for CCS7
BC1798 Routeset — Basic Routing Control — MSB
BC1800 Routeset — Distributor — MSB
BC1803 Routeset — Man Machine Interface — CC
BC1799 Routeset — Router — MSB
BC1804 Routeset — Table Control — CC
BF0941 Routeset — Changeover/Changeback — MSB
AC0107 SCCP — Audits and Enhancements
AC0141 SCCP — Data Distribution
AC0143 SCCP — For DMS-SCP
AC0144 SCCP — Management Robustness
AC0306 SCCP — MMI Changes
—continued—
NTX041AB–2 297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

NTX041AB
AC0140 SCCP — Routing Control

BC1749 SCCP Man Machine Interface
AC0431 SCCP Management Robustness
BC1750 SCCP Table Control
BC2046 SCCP — Connectionless Control
BC2047 SCCP — Management — PC Management
BC2048 SCCP — Management — Subsystem
BC2045 SCCP — Routing Control
AC0361 CCS7 Timer Enhancements
AE0313 CCITT7 MTP (DMS-250)
AL1474 CCITT7 National Network Point Code MMI
AL1330 Signaling Link Marginal Performance Report
End
BCS history
BCS36 — AL2334 added.
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX270AA New Peripheral Maintenance Package

NTX041AB
AL2334
Feature name
SRC Controlled Restart and No-Restart SWACT for CCS7
Description
This feature allows the system recovery controller (SRC) to control the
recovery of Common Channel Signaling 7 (CCS7) links, linksets, routesets,
and pools during warm, cold, and reload restarts, or during a no-restart
switch of activity (SWACT).
BCS history
The no-restart SWACT for CCS7 offices is a function of office size, and
certain configurations may not meet the target maximum of 30 seconds for
complete switch recovery. Partial call processing will be available within
the 30-s limit.
This feature does not support the CCS7 part of service control point I (SCPI)
nodes.
This feature does not support the CCITT-based versions of signal connection
control part (SCCP).
This feature is one of four features that function together to allow CCS7,
link peripheral processors (LPP), and ISDN user part (ISUP) to use the SRC
for core restart recovery. The other features are as follows:
• AI0704 SRC Restart and No-Restart SWACT Support for SCCP
and DDM
• AI0705 SRC Restart and No-Restart SWACT Support for LIMs
and LIUs
• AR0467 SRC Restart and No-Restart SWACT Support for ISUP

NTX044AA
Central Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA)
TA0167 R2 Local TBI—Phase 2
BCS history
This feature package was created in BCS38i.
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX801AA Toll Features I

NTX044AA
TA0167
Feature name
R2 Local TBI–Phase 2
Description
This feature provides enhanced functions for the Toll Break-in (TBI)
capability over R2 trunks on NTLS16, NTLS15, and NTLS24 line signaling
systems. The TBI feature allows an operator or a maintenance call to be
connected to a busy subscriber.
The enhanced TBI functions this feature provides are:

• preventing TBI on toll calls
• applying background tone from a conference circuit at the terminating
office or allowing the operator position to apply it
• allowing test calls to make automatic TBIs
• TBI implementation in two-way operation
Note: This feature is not currently enabled.
BCS history
This feature requires the NT3X67BB card (conference card) to support TBI
background tone and its parameters are not optional.
This feature supports TBI at terminating and tandem offices.
TBI is supported at the terminating office with NTLS15, NTLS16, NTLS24

line signaling and programmable R2 MFC register signaling protocols.
TBI is not initiated for the following cases:
• When the subscriber that the operator wishes to reach is in the dialing,
outpulsing, or feature activation state, or has already activated a feature
• When the TBI line signal parameters are not datafilled
• When the calling or called party is the operator or has the Subscriber
Premise Metering (SPM) option, or if either party is a COIN line
TBI is initiated when the subscriber that the operator wishes to reach is
involved in a:
• line-to-line call
• line-to-trunk local call

NTX044AA
TA0167
• trunk-to-line local call
TBI is initiated when treatment is applied to the line that operator wants to
reach (tone or announcement).
TBI is not allowed on the subscriber that the operator wants to reach, if
TBI_RESTRICT_ON_TOLL is set to Y, and this subscriber is involved in a:
• trunk-to-line call and incoming trunk’s traffic class is TLLC
• line-to-trunk call and translation class is not LOCAL
TBI background tone is applied from the NT3X67BB card (conference

card). Its parameters (such as frequency, level, cadence) are not optional.
Signaling bit (A or B) is datafillable only for NTLS15 and NTLS24
signaling protocols. TBI line signaling bit A is not optional for NTLS16.
This feature does not support continuous forward transfer (FOT) and
subscriber free (SSF) signals.
When the terminating office is a DMS-100 switch, it does not generate more
than two pulses for the SSF signal.
The following line options prevent TBI:
• International No Double Connect (INDC)
• International Do Not Disturb (IDND)
• Denied Toll Break-in (DTBI)
• AE0244 Toll Break-in Background Tone
• AG0710 Toll Break-in for China DMS-100
• BC2265 International Toll Break-in
• TA0159 TBI Local Phase I

NTX044AA
TA0167
Datafill
Table Description
OFCVAR TBI_RESTRICT_ON_TOLL, TBI_LOCAL_TONE,

AUTO_TBI_ON_TEST, TOLL_OFFER_END ALLOWED office
parameters are added.
LNSIGSYS Values RMINSSF, RMAXSSF, SSFDUR, SSFPAUSE are added

to fields NTLS15 and NTLS16.
Values SSF and SSPAUSE are added to field NTLS24.
TRKSGRP Value range of ALERTCTL field is extended by MUTUAL.

NTX048AA
Synchronization
AL0422 Synatum-2 Clock (Slave Office) Synchronization

AQ0777 Master External Remote Clock
BC0114 A Synchronous Link Maintenance S/W
BC2296 Synchronizable Clock Maintenance
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX048AA NTX048AA
AQ0777 AQ0777
Feature name
Master External Remote Clock
Description
AQ0777 provides the software required to support the clock synchronization
for the remote master external office configuration. This feature enhances
clock system robustness by switching from the external reference to a
Stratum 2 or Stratum 2.5 internal reference when both external references
are lost. This feature also enables monitoring and detection of differences in
frequency between the two input signals from the external references.
Office datafill is extended to include remote master external office
configuration.
BCS history
This feature requires the message switch clock card (NT9X53AC or
NT9X54AC/AD) to function in a remote clock master external
configuration.
This feature is disabled if the switch is equipped with either an
NT9X53AA/AB or an NT9X54AA/AB card. The existing hardware does
not support the new architecture.
• AC0663—NT9X53AC Base Firmware
• AC0664—Remote Sync Firmware for NT9X53AC
• AC0608—DMS-bus System Clock NT9X53AC Software Support
Datafill
Table Description
SYNCLK Field REM_SYNC is added to specify a remote master external

configuration.


NTX048AA
AQ0777
Logs
This feature modifies logs SYNC204, SYNC205, SYNC206, MS248, and
MS249.
Log SYNC204 is generated when the tuning control in a clock is updated.
Log SYNC205 is generated to display clock information and the status of
the timing links.
Log SYNC206 is generated whenever a fault condition is detected.
Log MS248 is generated when information is required about a system card.
Log MS249 is generated when information is required about a remote clock.
User interface
This feature modifies commands SYNC, DPSYNC, and ADJUST in
directory CLOCKDIR at a MAP terminal.
Command SYNC starts the synchronization of the DMS system.
Command DPSYNC drops synchronization of the DMS system.
Command ADJUST adjusts the frequency of the selected clock.
This feature deletes commands REMOTE and REMADJ from directory
CLOCKDIR at a MAP terminal.

NTX054AA
Line Test Position (LTP)
This feature package applies to ISDN offices.
Feature package NTX054AA
BR0043 Line Cutover State

BV0024 Line Transmission Tests – MW QTerm
BV0062 LTP – Digitone Testing
BV0025 LTP – Insertion Loss, Tone Generation
BV0061 LTP – Monitor, Talk, Balance Offhook Tests
BV0063 LTP – Send Functions (Coin and Ringing Functions)
BT0095 LTP and Associated Level
BC0829 Auto Retest of ALT Functions
BC2324 LTP Robustness
AG0052 LTP – Robustness – Phase 2
AL0944 ISDN Loop Maintenance Enhancements
BCS history
BCS29 – AL0944 added.
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX054AA
AL0944
Feature name
ISDN Loop Maintenance Enhancements
Description
AL0944 provides modifications to the Integrated Services Digital Network
(ISDN) loop maintenance software. The modifications are as follows:
• extension of automatic line testing (ALT) to support ISDN loops
• extension of bit error rate performance (BERP) testing to terminate on
ISDN B-channels
• displaying of the connected party and the active logical terminal
identifier (LTID) when a call processing busy B-channel is posted
BCS history
If all lines in an ISDN line concentrating module (LCMI) are ISDN, use the
LINETYPE ISDN option of the DEFINE command to test that LCMI.
The LCMI requires the same test equipment to run automatic line testing as
the LCM requires. The line insulation test (LIT) cannot perform the
capacitance test on ISDN lines. LIT is not available on the ISDN Line Card
(ISLC).
BERP does not seize a B-channel that has an active special connection on it.
If both B-channels of an ISDN line are in use when BERP tries to access it,
a seize failure is recorded. SUSTATE does not work when a BIC
looparound is in effect on an ISDN line.
ALT is supported on ISDN lines.
BERP is able to terminate on ISDN lines.

NTX054AA
AL0944
Datafill
Table Description
ALTSCHED Field LINETYPE is added to indicate the type of lines that an

ALT test will run on.
Fields DCDFT, ACDFT, TGDFT, RGDFT, TRDFT, CAPDFT, are

added to indicate whether the craftsperson wants to use default
values for the LIT parameters.
Default values for LIT parameters are no longer written into the
table.
The amount of storage required by each tuple in table ALTSCHED increases

by 1 byte.
Logs
Additional text reasons for ISDN DIAG failures is added to log ALT101 for
displaying after the DIAGNOSTIC RESULT label.
A LINETYPE field is added to log ALT108, ALT110, and ALT111 to
indicate the line type selected for the test.
ALT109, which is a detailed report on the status of LENS after an LCD test
set has received ALT testing, is modified for this feature.
User interface
The display for a posted CPB B-channel in CI Command POST is modified
to include the DN of the active party and the DN of the connected party.
A LINETYPE option is added to the DEFINE command to select the type of
lines that ALT will test.
Command LITINFO is added to the LIT sublevel of the MAP in position 3
of the menu, to allow the craftsperson to display the system default values
for the LIT parameters.
The parameters of the DEFINE and LOOPBK commands are changed to
allow the specification of an ISDN loopback type.

NTX056AA
Enhanced Administration
This feature package applies to DMS-100, DMS-200, DMS-250, DMS-300,
NT40, and SuperNode CM offices.
Feature package NTX056AA
BR0241 Bulk Data Modification

BV0027 Bulk Modification
BV0005 DM System: Journal File
BR0022 DM System: Pending Order File
BR0237 DMO: Journal File
BC0078 Journal File Restart Improvements
BR0101 Local Slave TTY to a Remote Master for DMS Operation
BC0162 Pending Order File Due Date Specification
BV0195 Pending Order File Retrieval by Service Order Number
BR0065 Service Order Echoing of DM0–S (Cable Pair)
AG0377 Data Distributor
BC1543 Journal File Option with DMOPRO
BC1488 Optional Parameter for DMOPRO to Suppress Summary
Message
BR0246 DMO – Pending Order File (Service Orders)
AG1524 JFFREEZE – DMO Enforcement for Journal File
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTXG21AA DMS-250 EIOC Base Package
or

NTX056AA
AG1524
Feature name
JFFREEZE – DMO Enforcement for Journal File
Description
AG1524 modifies the journal file capability for BCS applications. Prior to
this feature, certain types of data changes, such as hardware or hardware
states that were not captured by the journal file system were lost following a
BCS upgrade. This feature disallows all non-restorable data changes and
maintains a history file of all journal files created during the preapplication
data freeze period.
BCS history
Operational measurement (OM) commands OMACCTAB, OMACCGRP,
OMACCFLD, and OMCLASS are disabled when this feature is active.
Data is table FREEZETAB can be modified only during the dump and
restore process.
The following commands are disallowed during a data freeze:
RENAMECLLI, JFSTOP, XFER DEFINE, DRAMREC ASSIGN, and
DRAMREC RECORD.
Command DMOPRO is modified during a data freeze. If a journal option is
not specified, the DMOPRO changes are not written to the journal file.
Command OVERRIDE is disallowed during a data freeze, however the
switch in sync check is removed. Only the check for active journal file
remains. No data modification orders (DMO), restricted or otherwise, are
permitted when the journal file is not running.
There are 30 tables that are restricted (data is locked as read-only) during a
data freeze.
This feature interacts with the JFDUMPF application utility.

NTX056AA
AG1524
Datafill
The following table was added for this feature:
Table Description
FREEZTAB Table is added to contain a list of tables to be restricted during a

pre-application data freeze.
Table contains two fields: TABNAME to enter the table name

and OPTIONAL to indicate if the table is to be frozen or not.
This table increases data store by 168 bytes.

User interface
This feature adds the command JFFREEZE. Command JFFREEZE with the
STATUS parameter displays the status of JFFREEZE and the date of
activation. Command JFFREEZE with the ON parameter activates the
feature. Command JFFREEZE with the HISTORY parameter displays the
status of the feature and the current contents of the history file.

NTX060AB
Network Management
This feature package applies to DMS-100 and SuperNode offices.
Feature package NTX060AB
BR0250 Directional Reservation Equipment (DRE)

BV0080 Mass Calling
BC0235 Mass Calling
BV0007 Network Management
BT0251 Network Management (PHI)
AF2087 NWMSD Table Rewrite
AF0154 Cancel and Skip Controls
AF0166 Enhanced Code Controls
AF0181 Machine Congestions (MC) Enhancements
AF0056 Network Management Trunk Group Controls Interface
Reorganization
BC0739 Prefix Code Controls
BC0595 (NSG) Enhanced Network Management (Code Controls)
BC1718 DMS Routing Control Enhancements
BC0070 Network Management (Code Blocking)
BC0623 Country Code Blocking
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX060AB
AF2087
Feature name
NWMSD Table Rewrite
Description
AF2087 rewrites table Network Management Signal Distribution (NWMSD)
and its subtable Network Management Signal Distribution Points
(NWMSDPT) using “New Table Control”. This enables dynamic allocation
of memory so that each site uses only as much data store as is necessary for
the table. This feature also enables signal distribution groups to be assigned
or removed in table NWMSDPT as required.
BCS history
This feature requires the 2X55AA, 2X57AA, or 2X57AB circuit card for
network management signal distribution (SD) points.
Memory is allocated for table NWMSD according to the number of signal
distribution groups designated by the SIZE field in table DATASIZE, for the
entry with field DATSKEY equal to NWMSD.
The maximum size of table NWMSD is limited to 512 signal distribution
groups (0–511).
Up to seven signal distribution points can be added to table NWMSDPT for
each signal distribution group.
AF2087 interacts with the following features: Network Managment
Dynamic Overload Control, Internal Dynamic Overload Control (IDOC),
and Trunk Group Busy (TGB).

NTX060AB
AF2087
Datafill
Table Description
NWMSD Table is modified to permit its size to be dynamically increased

or reduced.
Subtable NWMSDPT is deleted and rewritten in table

NWMSDPT.
NWMSDPT Field SDGROUP is renamed field SDGRPPT.
Subfield NWMSDGRP in field SDGRPPT is added to specify

the point’s SD group.
Subfield SDPOINT in field SDGRPPT is modified from a key

value to a multi–key value.
Parameter FREE in field SDPTTYP is deleted.
Data store required for each entry in table NWMSD is unchanged at 32

words, however, the size of the table is no longer set to 32 tuples. Since
most offices require fewer entries in this table, data store requirements may
decrease with this feature.
User interface
Command SUB in table NWMSD is replaced by command TABLE in table
NWMSDPT in order to access table NWMSDPT directly. Table
NWMSDPT entries are not automatically added or initialized as FREE
points; instead, signal distribution points must be added to the table as they
are assigned. Points can be assigned either as Trunk Group Busy (TGB) or
as Internal Dynamic Overload Control (IDOC) using command ADD. Two
parameters are added to command POSITION, SD group and SD point.
Command DELETE is used to delete an existing table entry. Command
CHANGE is used to modify fields in an existing table entry.

NTX066AB
Bilingual Interface
BR0253 Bilingual Interface

BC1260 (KS) BNR Changes for German BMMI
NC0102 BMMI Enhancements
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX066AB
NC0102
Feature name
BMMI Enhancements
Description
NC0102 increases the storage capacity of the bilingual man-machine
interface (BMMI).
BCS history
This feature increases the upper limit of the number of word pointers in the
variable word-list data structure to 4096K items. Only the amount of
storage that is required is allocated, not the maximum size of the data
structure.

NTX074AA
Disk Data Storage System
AG1004 Log Retrieve Facility for E1 Incidents

AG1043 Prescheduled Image Taking for IOC Disks
AL0928 Disk Software Rewrite—Phase 2
AL1885 DDU Robustness—I
AR0127 IOC Disk File System Robustness
BC0112 Loading/Unloading of Office Image Non-Res
BC0280 Data Recording and Recall Operational Measurements
BC0313 Data Recording and Recall Automatic Message Accounting
BC0330 Data Recording and Recall Journal File
BC0420 Disk Storage of Peripheral Loads
BC0421 Data Recording and Recall Operational Measurements
BC0435 Enhanced Disk Maintenance
BC0765 150-Mbyte Disk Support
BC1123 Semi-Automatic DIRP Disk to Tape Copy
BR0219 Pending Order File on Disk
BR0279 14-in. Winchester Disk Drive
BR0284 14-in. Winchester Disk Drive
BR0792 Disk Physical File System Rewrite
TA0288 International FMA Support for SCSI–DDU
BCS history

NTX074AA
number
NTX000AA Bilge
Either
or

NTX074AA
AG1004
Feature name
Log Retrieve Facility for E1 Incidents
Description
AG1004 enables log messages to be captured and retrieved without the
intervention of the craftsperson.
The logs are captured using the device independent recording package
(DIRP) and a maximum of 10 percent of all available disk space. If the disk
space allocated to logs has been filled, the oldest logs on the disk are
overwritten. Every 24 hours or when the log file becomes full, the log file is
automatically closed and a new file takes its place.
Closed logs can be accessed by a command interpreter (CI) command and
read with the SCANLOGS command.
BCS history
This feature is made available only to offices with disk software.
Secret and secure logs are not captured by this feature.
This feature does not allow for the use of non–standard formatting and the
user interface is available only in English.
This feature interacts with other log facilities such as SYSLOGS,
ISYSLOGS, FOOTPRINT, and LOGUTIL.
Datafill
Table Description
DIRPSSYS The range of values of field AUTOXFER iis ncreased to include

NOKEEP, indicating that the subsystem’s files may be erased
any time after they are closed if the DIRP requires this space to
continue recording new data.
DIRPOOL Table DIRPOOL must be datafilled first, to ensure the new

DIRPSSYS tuple will be rejected.

NTX074AA
AG1004
Office parameter DISKLOGMEMORY is added to indicate the number of
bytes that are being used for the log interception function. The greater this
value, the more unformatted logs that are captured.
Logs
DIRP logs provide information about the new DLOG DIRP subsystem.
User interface
Command LOGFORMAT is added to format the log files containing raw
data into user–readable log files.

NTX074AA
AL1885
Feature name
DDU Robustness — I
Description
AL1885 improves the robustness of the input/output controller disk-drive
unit (DDU) software. Improvements to DDU data structures in the DMS
core include:
• moving the structures that contain DDU and volume information to
permanent data store in the DMS-core, in order to improve reliability
and provide a more stable environment for applications dependent on the
DDU software
• reducing corruption from the DDU and volume control units
BCS history

NTX074AA
AR0127
Feature name
IOC Disk File System Robustness
Description
AR0127 improves the input and output controller (IOC) disk file system.
This feature modifies some procedures to support improvements made to
data structures in feature AL1885 (DDU Robustness I). Feature AR0127
corrects PRSs accumulated over two years ago.
BCS history
This feature interacts with feature AL1885 (DDU Robustness—I).
Datafill
This feature increases program store by a maximum of 1 Kbyte.
Logs
This feature modifies log DDU100 by increasing the message size from 32
to 60 characters. In previous BCSs, the volume name is not output in the log.
In this BCS the full volume name is output in the log.

NTX074AA NTX074AA
TA0288 TA0288
Feature name
International FMA support for SCSI–DDU
Description
This feature introduces a new Product Equipment Code (PEC) NT1X55FA
to enable the IOC SCSI DDU to be recognized by the system. This PEC
allows the IOC SCSI DDU to be recognized by the system and to be
datafilled into table DDU. Since the CC only address the virtual controller
on the board; the only required change in the CC software is to add a new
PEC “dsk_1x55fa_pec” and allow the PEC “1x55FA” to be datafilled into
table DDU. This change is for office administration purpose only. There are
no functional software changes between NT1X55AA, NT1X55AB,
NT1X55CA, NT1X55DA and NT1X55FA.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
DDU A new PEC NT1X55FA is added

NTX136AA
Automatic transmission measuring system
BCS history
This feature package was created in BCS44.1.
39005665 C1/MFC and ETSI ISDN PRI interworking

NTX136AA
number
NTX000AA Bilge
Either
or

NTX136AA
39005665
Feature name
EDTU on DMS100i
Description
This feature provides software changes to the central controller (CC) to
allow the enhanced digital test unit (EDTU). The EDTU requires the
NT4X45AA card and four-channel loading for the card.
The EDTU replaces the digital test unit bit error ratio test (DTU BERT),
transmission test trunk (TTT), and transmission test unit (TTU)
functionalities. The EDTU emulates the DTU, TTT, or TTU depending on
the type of test required. Each virtual channel on the EDTU is equal to a
DTU, TTT, or TTU channel. A DTU has two virtual test units, while a TTT
or TTU has one virtual test unit. One EDTU can replace two DTUs, four
TTTs, four TTUs, or a combination of DTUs, TTTs, and TTUs.
BCS history
Feature 39005665 was created for BCS44.1i.
The EDTU card (NT4X45AA) is a four-channel card that resides in
integrated service module (ISM) or maintenance trunk module (MTM)
shelves.
The load file for the EDTU requires a disk drive to store volume files on the
CC. The disk drive must have space for an additional four files. Operating
company personnel create these files when using the LOADFW command
for the first time.
This feature has the following restrictions and limitations:
• This feature does not support the off-hook balance network test (OHBT).
• Multi-channel loading is only available for the EDTU.
• DMS100i offices have TTT and TTU test environments. The EDTU
supports DTU, but the DMS100i offices do not provide the DTU
environment.
• If the loader does not have enough resources to provide four-channel
loading, the MAP display message requests the user to try later.
Not applicable
Datafill
This feature adds the product engineering code (PEC) NT4X45AA to table
TRKSGRP.

NTX136AA
39005665
This feature adds the office parameter EDTULDFILE to table OFCVAR.
Office parameter EDTULDFILE stores the default name of the EDTU local
software load.
Service orders
Not applicable
Not applicable
Logs
Not applicable
User interface
The maintenance and administration position (MAP) display changes to
indicate EDTU when operating company personnel use the POST command.
This feature does not permit the NOWAIT option for the LOADFW
command.
Not applicable

NTX167AB
CCS7—Trunk Signaling
BCS history
AC0046 ISUP Continuity Test

AC0078 Loopback Trunk Access for ISUP to POTS Line
AC0080 ISUP Supervision Clean Up
AC0112 ISUP—FPE Enhancement to Handle ISUP
AC0120 ISUP Testline Enhancements
AC0121 ISUP/POTS Lines Interworking
AC0186 ISUP IBN Feature Access via Looparound Trunks
AC0199 ISUP 105 Testline
AC0248 ISUP Access to Console via Loopback Trunks
AC0249 ISUP/IBN Features Interactions II (CPK, MADN, CNF6)
AC0250 ISUP/IBN Feature Interactions I (DISA, MEETME, ACD)
AC0251 ISUP/IBN Feature Interactions III (3WC, EBO, DCPU)
AD0342 Attendant Console and ISUP Trunk Call Processing—Phase I
AD0343 Attendant Console and ISUP Trunk Call
Processing—Phase II
AD0359 ISUP Trunks and Attendant Console Interworking—Busy
Verify Line
AD0363 ISUP Trunks to Attendant Console Interworking 5
AD1800 PRA Version Control for Interexchange Carrier Interworking
AE0543 ISUP Trunk Maintenance Enhancement
—continued—

NTX167AB
AE0747 BTUP, TUP & Maintenance Enhancement and Basic TUPE

Maintenance
AG0511 ISUP/AC Interwork Camp-on
AG0704 Loopback Reduction for ISUP/AC
AG0705 ISUP PBX Trunk Interworking
AG0921 ISUP Protocol Version Control
AG0922 ISUP Operational Measurements
AG1538 ISUP Release Cause to Treatment Mapping
AJ1040 Circuit Group Blocking
AJ1179 DMS 300—CCITT7 Service Analysis Enhancements
AR0114 ISUP Maintenance Enhancements II
BC2108 ISUP Maintenance System
BC2109 ISUP Table Operations
BC2318 ISUP TTP Enhancements
BC2319 ISUP Group Message Handling
BC2320 ISUP Toll Signaling
BC2321 ISUP—Interworking to TOPS
BC2322 ISUP Tandem Call
BC2323 ISUP Test Lines—TL100, TL102
BF0654 CCS7 ISDN User Part Interlocal
BV1998 CCS7 ISDN User Part
TA0194 Maintentance Enhancement for NTC7 MTP
End
BCS history
BCS38i—TA0194 added

NTX167AB
number
NTX000AA Bilge
Either
or

NTX167AB
AR0114
Feature name
ISUP Maintenance Enhancements II
Description
AR0114 improves robustness and performance of the ISDN user part (ISUP)
maintenance timer. This feature also enhances the use of ISUP maintenance
message buffers in the computing module (CM). This is achieved by
allowing dynamic allocation of these buffers, reducing store requirements,
and increasing the rate at which messages are sent to either of the following
peripherals:
• message switch and buffer for Common Channel Signaling 7 (MSB7)
• link peripheral processor (LPP)
BCS history
The maintenance messaging between the CM and the LPP is increased to 50
messages per second for offices with only LPP. The messaging rate is
increased to 30 messages per second for offices with MSB7 only and offices
in the transitory MSB7/LPP state.
This feature guarantees proper provisioning when the number of ISUP
maintenance buffers is increased, providing enough memory is available.
This feature only affects the way that ISUP handles maintenance internally.
Datafill
Table Description
OFCENG Office parameter NUMCONCURRENTISUPMTCMSGS is

deleted and replaced by dynamic allocation of maintenance
buffers.
This feature changes data store depending on the size of the ISUP
component of the office.
Logs
This feature modifies log C7UP121 by adding a message to inform the user
if there is not enough data store available to update the number of buffers for
ISUP maintenance messages.

NTX167AB
TA0194
Feature name
Maintenance Enhancement for NTC7 MTP
Description
TA0194 implements the handling of CTUP maintenance messages with the
24-bit point code telephone label structure.
The Chinese network that uses 24-bit point code is called the NTC7
network. The NTC7 requires a message transfer part (MTP) with 24-bit
point code values.
TA0194 changes the Common Channel Signaling 7 (CCS7) maintenance
capability of Chinese telephone user part (CTUP) trunks so that the trunks
can support 24-bit point code. Without this feature, the trunks support 14-bit
point code.
BCS history
The maintenance of test calls is not supported.
The following messages are not supported by this feature:
• Continuity (COT)
• Continuity Check Request (CCR)
• software-generated group
The following requirements must be satisfied so that the DMS-100 switch

can support maintenance-oriented group blocking and unblocking messages:
• All CCS7 trunks on the carrier must have the same external protocol.
• All CCS7 trunks on the carrier must belong to the same routeset.
• All CCS7 trunks on the carrier must have ascending circuit identification
codes (CIC). The CICs do not have to be consecutive.
• At least ten idle CCS7 trunks on the carrier must be trunks that can be
group blocked. (Offline trunks cannot be group blocked. Non-CCS7
trunks can be on the same carrier as the CCS7 trunks.)
The following requirements must be satisfied so that the DMS-100 switch
can support hardware-oriented group blocking and unblocking messages:
• All CCS7 trunks on the carrier must have the same external protocol.
• All CCS7 trunks on the carrier must belong to the same routeset.

NTX167AB
TA0194
The following restrictions apply to circuit group reset (GRS) messages:
• A range field with zero in it is not supported. If the value is zero, the
received message is discarded and a C7UP120 log is generated.
• This feature supports GRS messages with a value in the range field of up
to 256.
• Blocking and unblocking and group blocking and unblocking messages
are not supported for outgoing CTUP trunks.
• AE1111 Hardware Group Blocking
• AJ0568 NUMBER 7 TUP and ATUP TRK MTCE for Australia
• AJ1113 CCITT#7 Circuit Group Blocking Capability
• TA0124 CTUP Call Processing
Datafill
Table Description
C7UPTMR The following fields are added for maintenance purposes:

T3BLOSHO, T4BLOLON, T5UBLSHO, T6BLLON,
T23GRSSHO, T24GRSLON, T25GRS2ND, T28CGBSHO,
T29CGBLON, T30CGB2ND, T32CGUSHO, T33CGULON, and
T34CGU2ND.

NTX244AB
Enhanced Sequential Trunk Hunting
This feature package applies to DMS-100, DMS-200, DMS-250,
International, Traffic Operator Position System (TOPS), and Integrated
Business Network (IBN) offices.
AF2586 Sequential Trunk Enhancements

BR0515 Sequential Trunk Selection
AF0177 Circular Trunk Hunting
AF1252 Expanded Trunk Guard Timing
BC1438 Sequential Trunk Selection Real-Time Improvements
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX244AB
AF1252
Feature name
Expanded Trunk Guard Timing
Description
AF1252 provides improved guard timing for trunks that use the sequential
trunk selection method and the circular trunk selection method.
Trunk guard timing prevents two-way or outgoing trunk members from
being prematurely seized after disconnect.
BCS history

NTX270AA
New Peripheral Maintenance Package
This feature package applies to DMS-100 office switches equipped with the
new messaging extended multiprocessor system (XMS)-based peripheral
module (XPM). Depending on the hardware configuration of a particular
switch, various processor combinations can be supported, including the
master processor (MP), signaling processor (SP), file processor (FP), ISDN
signaling processor (ISP), and unified processor (UP).
AC0151 DS-1 EFF Card—(NT6X50AB)

AF1647 LCM Takeover/Takeback Enhancement
AF1747 Processor Occupancy OMs for XLCM
AF2583 XPM RTS Enhancements
AF2987 Enhanced Field Failure Information
AF2988 XLCM Diagnostic Enhancement
AF2989 XPM REX/SWACT Robustness
AF3053 CM Static Data Update Tracking
AF3086 XLCM Diags Phase II—6X54 Relay, Scan Chip
AF3200 XPM REX Results/FFI PH II
AF3234 XLCM REX Results/FFI PH II
AF3271 UTR Diagnostic Enhancements—Tone Filtering
AF3684 XPM Static Data Management
AF3685 SWACT Evolution: CC XPM Maintenance
AF3747 Enhanced Warm SWACT
AF4826 Loadtime Enhancements
AF5006 PM Diagnostic History
AF5007 XPM Pre-SWACT/Post-SWACT Audit
AF5008 XPM REX Control and Trouble Notification Improvements
AG0309 XPM IPML Messaging for Office Recovery
AG0310 XPM Bootstrap IMC/IPML Messaging Enhancement for
NT6X69
—continued—

NTX270AA
AG0366 Audible Alarms for Remote C-side Link Failures

AG0664 XPM Sync Diagnostic
AG0917 Trunk Access Measurements
AG1046 6X50 Loop Diagnostic
AG1241 CC Manual Support for Dead System Recovery
AJ0338 XPM Parity Audit
AJ0964 Enhanced XPM SWACT Management
AJ0965 Cold SWACT Recovery on Failures of Planned SWACTs
AJ1038 SWACT Operation Robustness
AJ1039 XPM Data Management Robustness
AL0095 XPM ROM Diagnostic MMI
AL0173 6X50AB Diagnostic
AL0174 Enhanced XPM DS-1 Maintenance
AL0227 DTSR Realtime Enhancements
AL0335 XPM RTS Enhancement
AL0474 XPM ROM Diagnostic Improvements
AL0477 Better CC Interpretation of Messaging Failures
AL0495 DTSR on a per-PM Basis
AL0563 Enhanced CC Support for 6X50AB on Host Peripherals
AL0608 Decouple CC Reload Restart and XPM Static Data
AL1460 XPM MTC for DMS-X Part 2
AL2416 Convert Series II PMs to Recovery Controller
AN0336 XPM Base Card Analysis and Test
AN0337 P-side Looparound Facility Redesign
AR0086 Add MAPCI Perform Level for the DTCI
BC0474 MSB—DTC NUC Basic MTCE
BC0475 NPE-MSB Basic MTCE—Dev S/W
BC0476 NPE—LCM Basic MTCE—Dev S/W
BC0477 NPE—LGC/DTC Basic MTCE—Dev S/W
—continued—

NTX270AA
BC0482 NPE—LCM MTCE Enhancements

BC0498 NPE—Basic T1 MTCE for DTC, LGC
BC0499 NPE—Basic PM Loader
BC0617 NPE—LGC MTCE Enhancements
BC0626 Enhanced MSB MTC
BC0651 Loader Enhancements
BC0669 NPE—LCM Maintenance Enhancements II
BC0670 NPE—LGC/DTC Maintenance Enhancements II
BC0671 NPE—Loader for LGC
BC0712 NPE Enhanced NPE Loader
BC0880 LCM Enhancements
BC0883 NPE—PM Load File Patcher
BC1184 PM MAP/Log Robustness
BC1217 LM Speech Link Diagnostics
BC2093 CC Data Support for 6X50AB
BF0954 XPM Real-time Enhancements
BF0955 XPM Routine Exercise Test
BF0969 XPM Diag Driver Enhancements
BV1103 Dial Tone Speed Recording for LCM
BV1111 NPE—OMs for LGC/DTC
NC0033 OMs for XPM Links
NC0105 E911 Warm SWACT Enhancement
NC0108 DTSR OM Enhancements
NC0322 PM180 Cleanup
TA0195 IXPM= on 2-Processor Backplane
TA0196 IXPM+ Robustness Enhancements
TA0273 Third UTR for IDTC+
End

NTX270AA
BCS history
BCS40i—Feature TA0273 added
number
NTX000AA Bilge
or

NTX270AA
AF1647
Feature name
LCM Takeover Takeback Enhancement
Description
AF1647 reduces the time of pulse code modulation (PCM) transmission
breaks on stable calls during central control (CC) line concentrating module
(LCM) activity switches to 100 milliseconds. This reduction ensures that a
data application call involving a modulator demodulator (MODEM) with an
interruption of 100 milliseconds or more does not drop the call.
BCS history
This feature requires the expanded memory line concentrating module
(XLCM) software load which is dependent on the NT6X51AB processor
card.
AF1647 increases the time required for a line concentrating module (LCM)
to perform a solicited takeover or takeback.
This feature applies only to controlled LCM activity switches (activity
switches that are requested through software).

NTX270AA
AF1747
Feature name
Processor Occupancy OMs for XLCM
Description
AF1747 introduces operational measurements (OM) group PMSTAT, which
provides processor occupancy measurements for the expanded memory line
concentrating module (XLCM) family of peripherals equipped with the large
memory load (256 kbyte). Processor occupancy refers to the percentage of
time the NT6X51AB card (extended LCM processor) spends working.
BCS history
This feature requires the following hardware:
• NT6X51AB card (extended LCM processor) in the XLCM and
international XLCM (IXLCM)
• NTBX34AB card (ISDN line module processor upgrade) in the
enhanced line concentrating module (LCME) and small remote unit
(SRU)
This feature does not support the ISDN LCM (LCMI).
The functionality provided by this feature is not available with the small
memory LCM.
If the XLCM goes into takeover mode, OMs continue to be collected from
the in-service (InSv) or in-service trouble (ISTb) XLCM unit. Data
collection resumes on the busy unit as soon as it returns to service.
If the XPM from which the XLCMs are connected undergoes a warm or cold
switch of activity (SWACT), data for that 15-min period is lost.
OMs are not collected if the extended remote line concentrating module
(XRLCM), the outside plant module (OPM), or the SRU go into emergency
stand-alone (ESA) mode. Data collection resumes when ESA mode is
terminated.
This feature requires features AF4194 (XLCM Overload Controls) and
NC0108 (DTSR OM Enhancements).

NTX270AA
AF1747
Datafill
Office parameter PMSTAT_OM_CONTROL is added to table OFCVAR.
PMSTAT_OM_CONTROL activates or deactivates processor occupancy
measurement collections for OM group PMSTAT for all XLCMs.
This feature increases data store by a maximum of 5 kbytes and increases
program store by a maximum of 3 kbytes.
This feature adds OM group PMSTAT, which records the following usage
measurements on the XLCM:
• occupancy due to overhead
• total processor occupancy
• occupancy due to call processing
• peak occupancy
• low occupancy
• available time

NTX270AA
AF2583
Feature name
XPM RTS Enhancements
Description
AF2583 reduces the return-to-service (RTS) sequence time for any
XMS-based peripheral module (XPM) found at read-only memory (ROM).
The RTS time is reduced by eliminating excess messages and initializations
when an XPM unit with a corrupted software load is returned to service, and
when an inactive XPM unit (at ROM level with out-of-service tests) is
returned to service.
BCS history
AF2583 interacts with REX Test, Cold SWACT, and Warm SWACT.

NTX270AA
AF2987
Feature name
Enhanced Field Failure Info
Description
AF2987 provides additional field failure information on the central control
(CC) and XMS-based peripheral module (XPM), including:
• static data log detail, to provide detailed information about datafill
changes that result in static data updates
• XPM routine exercise (REX) failure information, which identifies
whether the last REX passed or failed, and places the failed node and
XPM unit into the new in-service trouble (ISTb) state REX_FAILED.
REX can now be run on an ISTb peripheral if the only ISTb is
REX_FAILED.
• XPM footprint phase II, to collect data when key events occur in the
XPM so that the cause of failure can be determined
• digital phase-locked loop (DPLL) clock-failure information, to provide
information on XPM synchronization problems
BCS history
The dump and restore process does not generate TUPC logs.
This feature cannot be deactivated by the operating company.
This feature does not allow an audit to return an XPM unit to service if a
failure is found during a REX test. Operating company personnel must
perform one of the following actions to return an XPM unit to service:
manual return to service, manual REX, or automated REX.
During a REX, if the failure occurs during a switch of activity (SWACT),
the side to which activity is switched is set to ISTb, with the failure reason
REX_FAILED.
This feature interacts with the table editor, the command DMOPRO, warm
SWACT, and feature AJ1115 (XPM Footprint).
Datafill
This feature increases permanent store by a maximum of 1.7 Kbytes.

NTX270AA
AF2987
Logs
Logs TUPC100 to TUPC103 are added for the static data log detail portion
of this feature, as follows:
• Log TUPC100 is generated when a tuple is added in one of the specified
inventory tables.
• Log TUPC101 is generated when a tuple is deleted from one of the
specified inventory tables.
• Log TUPC102 is generated when a tuple is changed in one of the
specified tables. TUPC102 identifies the old tuple (the tuple changed
from).
• Log TUPC103 is generated when a tuple is changed in one of the
specified tables. TUPC103 identifies the new tuple (the tuple changed
to).
• Log PM189 is modified for the XPM footprint phase II portion of this
feature. PM189 is generated when the XPM is returned to service if the
XPM has lost synchronization and the CC has not acknowledged the
SYNC LOST message. PM189 is also generated whenever a large
out-of-phase reading is detected.
User interface
The output of the following commands in directory LGCDIR is modified for
the XPM REX failure information portion of this feature: QUERYPM,
QUERYPM with option FLT, and TST REX QUERY.
The command QUERYPM specifies whether the last REX test for a posted
XPM passed or failed. When an XPM unit fails during REX, command
QUERYPM with option FLT includes the in-service trouble reason REX
FAILED.
The command TST REX QUERY includes the time stamp for the last REX
that PASSED or FAILED.

NTX270AA
AF2988
Feature name
XLCM Diagnostic Enhancements
Description
AF2988 modifies expanded line concentrating module (XLCM) diagnostics
to do the following:
• prevent complete LCM takeover when drawer faults are detected or too
many unsolicited messages report the same failing drawer. This feature
prevents both units from going down due to too many unsolicited
messages.
• diagnose overload conditions of a ring generator caused by the ring
generator or a faulty line card
• provide additional user interface information, including the system busy
reason and the diagnostic test that failed
BCS history
This feature requires expanded memory card 6X51AB with an XLCM load
(256K).
Only BCS32 or higher loads can be used with this feature.
During a ring generator overload condition, automatic number identification
and coin functions are not allowed on the XLCM unit with the fault.
This feature does not support mixed loads in a line concentrating equipment
(LCE) frame. LCE X, LCM X 0, and LCM X 1 must each have a large
memory load (256K).
In order to isolate faults, there must be at least one faultless ringing
generator.
Logs
Log PM181 is modified to indicate faulty hardware or the results of a
ring-generator overload diagnostic.
User interface
The command QUERYPM with option FLT in directory LCMDIR is
modified. A message is added to indicate the reason for failure.

NTX270AA
AF2989
Feature name
XPM REX/SWACT Robustness
Description
AF2989 enhances the stability, reliability, and maintainability of central
control (CC) software and XMS-based peripheral module (XPM) software.
The main functions of this feature are:
• to analyze reported field issues involving XPM routine exercise (REX)
and switch of activity (SWACT)
• to perform code inspections of CC and XPM software responsible for
XPM REX and SWACT reliability
• to improve XPM REX and SWACT software performance
• to eliminate operational measurement pegs, minor alarms, and PM128
logs caused by the REX test
BCS history
Datafill
This feature increases permanent data store by a maximum of 1 Kbyte.
As a result of removing six PM128 logs, the following registers no longer
increment:
• register PM2ERR in operational measurements (OM) group PM2
• register PMERR in OM group PM
• register PMTERR in OM group PMTYP
Logs
Six PM128 logs are replaced with log PM131. Log PM131 is generated
when the XPM node status changes to in-service trouble during a REX test.
The difference between log PM128 and log PM131 is that log PM131
provides information only; it does not generate a minor alarm.
Log PM181 is modified to highlight a REX recovery attempt and the result
of the REX recovery attempt.

NTX270AA
AF3053
Feature name
CM Static Data Update Tracking
Description
AF3053 tracks and reports the need to update static data in the central
control (CC). The feature performs the following functions:
• monitors office data modification (ODM) changes that affect static data
and sets severity of in-service trouble (ISTb) conditions against an
extended peripheral module (XPM)
• stores the level of severity of the data mismatch condition against each
XPM
• monitors maintenance actions performed on an XPM and clears or sets
ISTb conditions
• displays procedural messages at the MAP to instruct the user in updating
static data
BCS history
All XPM types datafilled in tables LTCINV and RCCINV use feature
AF3053. The following XPMs use the CC static data tracking mechanism:
• line trunk controller (LTC)
• line group controller (LGC)
• digital trunk controller (DTC)
• Software Management System (SMS)
• Subscriber Carrier Module-100 Rural (SMR)
• Subscriber Carrier Module-100 Urban (SMU)
• remote cluster controller (RCC)
This feature does not apply to international and ISDN XPMs.

This feature does not monitor distributed data manager (DDM) failures and
it does not provide XPM table identifiers for DDM.
This feature also interacts with the CC, transferring the status of the data
synchronization process from the XPM.
Datafill

NTX270AA
AF3053
User interface
This feature introduces a standard message format for the display of static
data mismatch information in response to commands ADD, CHANGE,
DELETE, and QUERYPM. Instructions for updating static data are
displayed at the PM level of a MAP terminal, in response to command
QUERYPM, if the ISTb fault STATIC DATA MISMATCH WITH CC is
displayed. The FLT option is needed on the QUERYPM command to display
the instructions for updating static data.

NTX270AA
AF3086
Feature name
XCLM Diags Phase II—6X54 Relay, Scan Chip
Description
AF3086 implements central control and extended line concentrating module
(XLCM) software that tests the tip/ring reversal relay on each bus interface
card (BIC) of a given XLCM. This test can be performed separately for
each logical drawer, and can be invoked manually from the MAP level or
can be scheduled to run automatically by the system.
BCS history
At least one NT6X17 line card per line concentrating module (LCM) drawer
is needed to perform the tests.
The logical drawer is made manual busy before the system BIC relay test is
run. If lines are in a call processing busy state, the drawer is skipped for this
test cycle.
The drawer must be made manual busy by operating company personnel
before the manual BIC relay test (BRT) is run.
If at least one NT6X17 line card is not datafilled in each logical drawer, the
drawer is not tested.
This feature applies to the XLCM only and does not operate in a regular
LCM.
During a test, this feature takes each drawer out of service and suspends call
processing for approximately 7 seconds.
If an automatic line test runs simultaneously with a BIC relay test, both tests
can be delayed, because they are both competing for the same test
equipment.
A forced manual busy aborts the system BRT on a given LCM.
If a routine exercise test (REX) has already started on a given LCM, the
BRT is not run on that LCM.
If an in-service test is in progress, the BRT does not run.

NTX270AA
AF3086
Datafill
Table Description
LCMINV New field BICTST is added to table.
A new field, BICTST, is added to table LCMINV to activate the BIC test.
A new office parameter, BICRELAY_XLCM_TEST_SCHEDULE, is added
to table OFCVAR to indicate the window and the days of the week in which
the BRT runs.
A new office parameter, BICRELAY_NUM_SIMUL_TESTS, is added to
table OFCVAR to indicate the total number of BIC relay tests that can be run
simultaneously at any given time. This parameter also allows the user to
adjust the total number of LCMs to be tested within a given window.
Logs
Log PM181 is modified by this feature.
A new log, PM132, is generated when a relay test has been completed on a
given LCM.
User interface
A new option, RELAY, is added to the TST DRWR command at the LCM
MAP level. When RELAY is entered as an option, a BRT is run on the
specified drawer.
Additional information is added to the QUERYPM FLT command. This
information is displayed only if one or more drawers have failed the BRT. It
also provides a list of all the drawers that have failed the BRT and are set to
in-service trouble.
A new command, BICRELAY, is added to allow the BIC relay test to be
enabled, disabled, reset, allowed, disallowed, or queried for the entire office.

NTX270AA
AF3179
Feature name
SWACT Evolution—XPM Maintenance
Description
AF3179 identifies all areas of central control (CC) XMS-based peripheral
module (XPM) maintenance that may need to be moved into the Init
Manager initialization procedure. This feature also identifies how these
areas relate to the new switch of activity (SWACT) recovery mechanism.
BCS history
This feature applies only to SuperNode switches.
The CC warm SWACT application process in this feature is not the same as
the CC/CM MAP levels or XPM warm SWACT.

NTX270AA
AF3200
Feature name
XPM REX Results/FFI PH II
Description
AF3200 enhances the reporting of routine exercise (REX) tests for
XMS-based peripheral modules (XPM). The maintenance system stores
additional information concerning the results of recent REX tests in the REX
maintenance record. This information includes the pass or fail status of the
last REX test performed, the failure reason if the last REX test failed, and
the date and time stamps for previous REX tests.
In addition, MAP commands TST TEX QUERY and TST REX NOW are
modified.
BCS history
The REX maintenance record survives warm and cold restarts. It is
re-initialized on reload restarts and BCS applications.
Logs
This feature modifies the wording of log PM181, which is generated when a
system-generated or manually-generated REX test occurs.
User interface
Command TST REX QUERY is modified at the LGCDIR, RCCDIR, and
MSBDIR levels of a MAP terminal to display the full REX maintenance
record.
Command TST REX NOW is modified at the LGCDIR, RCCDIR, MSBDIR
levels of a MAP terminal to include the optional parameter NOWAIT.

NTX270AA
AF3234
Feature name
XLCM REX Results/FFI PH II
Description
AF3234 enhances the routine exercise (REX) test for the line concentrating
module (LCM) peripheral and its variants (LCM, ILCM, CCMI, ELCM, and
LCME). Enhancements are made in the areas of LCM and emergency
stand-alone (ESA), independent LCM REX tests, MAP commands for
manual REX tests, fault indicators, REX test maintenance records, and MAP
commands to access REX test failure results.
BCS history
Both units of the LCM must be either in the in-service state or in-service
state trouble before the LCM REX tests can be run.
A manual REX test performed on an LCM equipped with an ESA does not
invoke the ESA REX as part of the LCM REX.
An LCM equipped with an ESA that fails a system-scheduled REX test does
not invoke the ESA REX test.
A successful audit does not try to clear an in-service trouble flag with REX
failure as a reason.
A restart reload erases the data stored in the maintenance record while a
warm or cold restart does not alter the data.
Logs
Log PM128 is generated upon completion of the REX indicating the status
(passed, failed, aborted, or terminated) of the units.
Log PM128 is also generated if a REX subtest fails with the reason REX
FAILED.
User interface
Command TST in directory LCMDIR is modified to provide direct access to
REX testing. REX testing can be enabled, disabled, queried, or activated on
one posted LCM. The REX subcommand does not support the ALL option.
Command QUERYPM in the LCMDIR directory is modified to provide
more information on REX.

NTX270AA
AF3271
Feature name
UTR Diagnostic Enhancements: Tone Filtering
Description
AF3271 provides three universal tone receiver (UTR) diagnostic tests: a
twist test, a frequency deviation and noise test, and a total power offset test.
These tests detect filtering faults that impair the detection of tones and they
verify that the tones reported to the UTR are within the prescribed limits.
BCS history
This feature requires an NT6X92 card (universal tone receiver).
This feature applies to North American UTRs only.
Datafill

NTX270AA
AF3684
Feature name
XPM Static Data Management
Description
AF3684 improves the extended peripheral module (XPM) data management
to process data changes in a more robust and maintainable way than with the
original software design. This feature also provides ongoing documentation
describing the general format and handling of each data table.
BCS history
This feature affects all XPMs.

NTX270AA
AF3685
Feature name
SWACT Evolution: CC XPM Maintenance
Description
AF3685 implements the high level design described in feature AF3179
(SWACT Evolution—XPM Maintenance). Feature AF3685 implements the
software changes required for recovery from central control (CC) warm
switch of activity (SWACT) for the following DMS components:
• extended peripheral modules (XPM) that are datafilled in table LTCINV
and table MSBINV
• line concentrating modules (LCM)
• Subscriber Carrier Modules–100S Remote (SMSR)
• signaling terminals (ST)
• inter-peripheral messaging links (IPML)
• emergency stand-alone (ESA)
• remote maintenance module (RMM)
BCS history
This feature applies only to SuperNode offices.
• AG2149—Core SWACT Restart Outage Reduction—Phase I
• AG2276—CC Warm SWACT Restart Outage Reduction—Phase II
• AJ0191—H/W-S/W Initialization Coordination II
• AL2416—Convert Series II PMS to Recovery Controller

NTX270AA
AF3747
Feature name
Enhanced Warm SWACT
Description
AF3747 enhances the capability of calls that survive a warm switch of
activity (SWACT) on an extended peripheral module (XPM). This feature
allows surviving calls to activate new subscriber features, and allows
intra-office calls to survive far-end changes.
BCS history
This feature is deactivated if an unsupported subscriber feature is active
during the warm SWACT. In this case, the call defaults to non-enhanced
warm SWACT handling.
This feature affects all North American XPMs.
This feature interacts with feature NC0105 (Call Status Preservation Across
Warm SWACT).
This feature is compatible with all subscriber features, if the subscriber
features are activated after the controlled warm SWACT. If the subscriber
features are activated during the SWACT, this feature is only compatible
with a subset of subscriber features.
This feature does not affect the operation of any subscriber features.
Datafill
This feature increases data store by a maximum of 15 Kbytes and increases

NTX270AA
AF5006
Feature name
XPM Diagnostic History
Description
AF5006 captures diagnostics results that indicate the health of the extended
multiprocessor system (XMS)-based peripheral module (XPM). Diagnostic
failure counts and card fault counts are stored for each XPM unit. The data
is used by feature AF5007 (XPM Pre-SWACT/Post-SWACT Audit) to help
determine whether an XPM SWACT is advisable. The data is also available
through MAP commands to aid in maintenance activities and outage
analysis.
BCS history
BCS36—Changed
The diagnostic history is supported on the following XPMs:
• line trunk controller (LTC) and LTC with unified processor (UP) (LTC+)
• line group controller (LGC) and LGC with UP (LGC+)
• digital trunk controller (DTC) and DTC with UP (DTC+)
• ISDN DTC (DTCI)
• remote cluster controller (RCC), RCC2, RCC with UP (RCC+), and
ISDN RCC with UP (RCCI+)
• subscriber carrier module-100 access
• subscriber carrier module-100 rural (SMR)
• subscriber carrier module-100S (SMS)
• subscriber carrier module-100 urban (SMU)
• subscriber carrier module-100S remote (SMS-R)
On NT40 switches, only the diagnostics (and associated cards) required by

feature AF5007 are recorded.
This feature can stand alone, but it is needed by feature AF5007 (XPM
Pre-SWACT/Post-SWACT Audit).
Logs
Log PM601 is generated whenever the long-term failure (LTF) counters for
a particular PM are manually reset. A summary of the counters previous to
reset are listed in the log to ensure that no data is lost.

NTX270AA
AF5006
User interface
A new option is added to command DISP at the PM level of the MAP
terminal. This option displays the diagnostic history data (as shown below)
for all XPMs in the office or for all XPMs of a given PM type.
Disp <Option> {state<state>{SysB, ManB, Offl, CBsy, ISTb, InSv},
DiagHist}
[pmtype]
Command QUERYPM, at the directory of a posted PM, is enhanced to
display the diagnostic history data (shown below).
QUERYPM [<option> {Flt,
Cntrs,
DiagHist [<diag> {DIAG},
<card> {CARD),
<reset> {RESET}]}]
Option DIAGHIST is added to command QUERYPM to allow the following
actions:
• The default action displays the failed diagnostics and associated cards.
• Option DIAG displays the summary of diagnostic failures counts.
• Option CARD displays the summary of the cards reported as hardware
failures.
• Option RESET resets the LTF counters to zero and displays log PM601
with a summary of the counters prior to the reset.

NTX270AA
AF5007
Feature name
XPM Pre-SWACT/Post-SWACT Audit
Description
AF5007 enhances the existing audit that occurs before a switch of activity
(SWACT), creates a centralized SWACT controller, creates a post-SWACT
audit, and implements a SWACT back capability. The overall purpose of
this feature is to reduce extended multiprocessor system (XMS)-based
peripheral module (XPM) outages by preventing a SWACT (whether
initiated manually or by the system) if the inactive unit is deemed unreliable.
AF5007 also checks to see if the newly active unit can communicate with
the central control (CC) after a SWACT, and performs a SWACT back to the
previously active unit if the newly active unit cannot communicate.
BCS history
BCS36—Changed
The warm SWACT enhancements are supported on the following XPMs:
• line trunk controller (LTC) and LTC with unified processor (UP)
(LTC+), without an ISDN signaling preprocessor (ISP)
• line group controller (LGC) and LGC with UP (LGC+), without an ISP
• digital trunk controller (DTC), DTC with UP (DTC+), without an ISP
• CCS7 digital trunk controller (DTC7)
• remote cluster controller (RCC) and RCC with UP (RCC+)
• ISDN RCC (RCCI+)
• subscriber carrier module–100 rural (SMR)
• subscriber carrier module–100S (SMS)
• subscriber carrier module–100 urban (SMU), without an ISP
• subscriber carrier module–100S remote (SMS–R)
The warm SWACT enhancements are supported on the following commands

at the PM level of the MAP terminal attempting a warm SWACT:
• SWACT <no option>
• SWACT ALL
• SWACT FORCE
• SWACT NOW
• SWACT TEST
• BSY UNIT <unit_no> (where unit_no is the active unit)

NTX270AA
AF5007
• BSY ACTIVE
• TST REX NOW (provided by feature AF5008, XPM REX Control and
Trouble Notification Improvements)
The following are also supported:
• REX initiated by the system
• warm SWACT initiated by the XPM
In the event of a SWACT back, all calls made after the SWACT and before
completion of the SWACT back are taken down.
The system cannot automatically recognize that a card has been replaced to
repair a fault on which the SWACT controller bases a SWACT decision.
If the fault is a fault used by the SWACT controller and stored in the history
database in the CC (by feature AF5006, PM Diagnostic History), the
SWACT controller continues to deny a SWACT to the unit for which the
fault was repaired until the fault counters for that unit are cleared. The
operating company personnel must cause that unit to successfully gain
activity to clear the fault counters. Option FORCE of command SWACT
can be used for this purpose.
If the fault is used by the SWACT controller and stored in the status
information in the XPM (by feature AF5006), the SWACT controller
continues to deny a SWACT to the unit for which the fault was repaired until
the fault indicators for that unit are cleared. The XPM must run the
appropriate diagnostics and these must pass for the fault indicator to be
cleared.
Operational measurements (OM) and peg counts are not reinitialized
following a SWACT back. Data will be lost for the 5-s time period that it
may take to SWACT and SWACT back.
When a SWACT back occurs, no OM counts for the two transfers of activity
(SWACT and SWACT back) are incremented. Affected counters are as
follows:
• PM2MWXFR Peripheral Module Dual-unit Manual Warm Transfer
• PM2SWXFR Peripheral Module Dual-unit System Warm Transfer
• PMMWXFR Peripheral Module Manual Warm Transfer
• PMSWXFR Peripheral Module System Warm Transfer
This feature is not functional without prior loading of the BCS35

communications module (CM) load.

NTX270AA
AF5007
This feature requires feature AF5006 (PM Diagnostic History) and is used
by AF5008 (XPM REX Control and Trouble Notification Improvements).
Logs
The existing PM181 log that reports a SWACT is enhanced to report that a
SWACT override occurs when personnel use option FORCE of command
SWACT MAP to override the SWACT controller’s denial of a SWACT.
PM181 log is enhanced as follows:
• When users override the SWACT controller, the log indicates which user
name performed the override.
• The log that indicates whether a SWACT passed, failed, or aborted
contains an override string when appropriate.
• When a SWACT back occurs, the log indicates XPM SWACT Back.
User interface
This feature affects commands BSY, and the SWACT at the PM;POST level
of the MAP terminal also affects the TST REX NOW command.

NTX270AA
AF5008
Feature name
XPM REX Control and Trouble Notification Improvements
Description
AF5008 creates log PM600 (REX Failed), which is produced upon routine
exercise (REX) failure. The log is a record of each maintenance action
performed during REX, the extended multiprocessor system (XMS)-based
peripheral module (XPM) unit affected, and the time each action began. The
log includes the failure reason and, if applicable, supplemental data
consisting of the failed diagnostics and card list reported by the XPM. This
feature significantly reduces the number of logs produced during REX. This
feature also allows REX to use the enhanced pre-activity switch (SWACT)
query and SWACT back created by feature AF5007 (XPM
Pre-SWACT/Post-SWACT Audit).
BCS history
BCS36—Changed
The system REX runs on only one XPM at a time if the office uses the NT40
processor. SuperNode supports concurrent REXs for up to ten XPMs with
the same REX test class: line group controller (LGC), remote cluster
controller (RCC), subscriber carrier module–100S remote (SMS–R), and
message switch and buffer (MSB).
A REX can be run only on a unit in one of the following states:
• in service (InSv)
• in-service trouble (ISTb) due to REX failed
• ISTb due to peripheral-side (P-side) DS-1 links of carrier type trunk
OOS (out of service)
If a warm SWACT is not possible, REX terminates rather than performing a
cold SWACT.
REX does not fail as a result of the pre-SWACT audit for the following
peripheral types that do not support the audit:
• message switch and buffer CCIS6 (MSB6)
• message switch and buffer CCIS7 (MSB7)
• subscriber module access (SMA)
• Traffic Operator Position System (TOPS) message switch (TMS)
• small-memory digital trunk controller (DTC)

NTX270AA
AF5008
After successful completion of the REX, the XPM has a new active unit due
to the SWACT.
Operational measurements (OM) normally generated for certain system
actions are suppressed if REX initiates these actions.
The last REX date and time stored in the maintenance record may be due to
either a system REX or manual REX, and is measured from the last system
reload restart.
The REX maintenance record does not survive BCS applications.
If a restart occurs while REX is in progress, log PM600 is not generated,
because the restart aborts the REX and deallocates the temporary data store
used to build the PM600.
The capture and MAP display of diagnostics that fail during XPM REX
applies to all XPMs.
Log PM600 and associated log reduction provided by this feature applies to
the following XPMs:
• line trunk controller (LTC) and LTC with unified processor (UP) (LTC+)
• line group controller (LGC) and LGC with UP (LGC+)
• digital trunk controller (DTC), DTC with UP (DTC+), DTC7
• remote cluster controller (RCC), RCC with UP (RCC+), and ISDN RCC
with UP (RCCI+)
• subscriber carrier module–100S (SMS) and SMS with UP (SMS+)
• subscriber carrier module–100 access (SMA)
• subscriber carrier module–100 remote (SMR)
• subscriber carrier module–100 urban (SMU) and SMU with UP (SMU+)
• enhanced subscriber carrier module–100 urban (ESMU)
• subscriber carrier module–100S remote (SMS–R) and SMS-R with UP
(SMS-R+)
No SWACT controller override is provided for REX.
This feature requires feature AF5007 (XPM Pre-SWACT/Post-SWACT
Audit) for REX to use the enhanced pre-SWACT audit, post-SWACT audit,
and SWACT back capability.

NTX270AA
AF5008
Logs
Log PM600 (REX Failed) is produced if a REX fails. The log is a record of
each action performed during REX (BSY, RTS, TST, SWACT, pre-SWACT,
or SYNC), which unit the action affected, when the action was initiated, the
failure reason, and supplemental data consisting of diagnostics that failed,
applicable card list, or list of problems detected by the pre-SWACT audit.
Log PM600 allows the suppression of multiple logs during REX (a REX
pass produces 3 logs instead of 17; a REX failed produces 3 logs instead of
up to 32 logs).
User interface
REX failure reasons are updated to specify, if applicable, the unit with a
failure and the diagnostics that failed. If REX fails during the pre-SWACT
step, TST REX QUERY displays the reason for pre-SWACT failure.

NTX270AA
AJ0338
Feature name
XPM Parity Audit
Description
AJ0338 provides an audit in the XMS-based peripheral module (XPM) to
detect hard fault, soft fault, and intermittent fault parity errors in the
module’s memory. When a parity error is detected, this feature provides
improved fault recovery action to prevent deterioration of the unit.
BCS history
Pack diagnostic specifics
This feature improves fault coverage for the NT6X46 and NT6X47 fault
insertion cards. The percentage of coverage improvement is over 95 percent
of the parity check. When an error is detected, the unit goes into system
busy (SYSB) state.
Logs
Log PM128 is generated when a hard memory parity error is detected. Log
PM180 is generated when the parity audit detects a parity error in the
processor’s memory. Log PM189 is generated when either a hard parity
fault or an intermittent parity fault is detected.

NTX270AA
AJ0964
Feature name
Enhanced XPM SWACT Management Phase 1
Description
AJ0964 provides three modifications to XMS-based peripheral module
(XPM) management as follows:
• initiates an immediate warm switch activity (SWACT) operation for an
XMS-based peripheral module (XPM)
• increases the speed of the dynamic data sync under high traffic
conditions when the XPM inactive unit is returned to service
• provides a warning message to display the number of terminals with
calls that can be affected by switch activity operation.
BCS history
This feature is supported by the following peripherals only:
• Digital Trunk Controllers (DTC)
• Line Trunk Controllers (LTC)
• Line Group Controllers (LGC)
• Subscriber Module Urban (SMU)
• Subscriber Module Remote (SMR)
• Subscriber Module SLC-96 (SMS)
• Remote Cluster Controllers (RCC)
• Dual Remote Cluster Controllers (DRCC)
• ISDN Line Trunk Controllers (LTCI)
• ISDN Digital Trunk Controllers (DTCI)
• Digital Trunk Controllers with CCS7 (DTC7)
User interface
Parameter NOW is added to command SWACT to initiate an immediate
warm switch activity operation for the XMS-based peripheral module shown
on the MAP terminal’s display.

NTX270AA
AJ0965
Feature name
Cold SWACT Recovery on Failure of Planned SWACTs
Description
AJ0965 modifies the robustness of XMS-based peripheral modules through
early detection of failure of a planned switch activity (SWACT) operation.
When a failure is detected, a cold SWACT is performed immediately and the
newly active unit is returned to service without diagnostics being performed;
this restores call processing quicker than with the full return-to-service
(RTS) process.
BCS history
This feature is supported by the following peripheral modules only:
• Digital Trunk Controllers (DTC)
• Dual Remote Cluster Controllers (DRCC)
• ISDN Digital Trunk Controllers (DTCI)
• ISDN Line Trunk Controllers (LTCI)
• Line Group Controllers (LGC)
• Line Trunk Controllers (LTC)
• Remote Cluster Controllers (RCC)
• Subscriber Module Remote (SMR)
• Subscriber Module SLC-96 (SMS)
• Subscriber Module Urban (SMU)

NTX270AA
AJ1038
Feature name
SWACT Operation Robustness
Description
AJ1038 enhances switch activity (SWACT) robustness by improving
SWACT operation, improving the diagnosis of SWACT failures, and
modifying peripheral recovery during a SWACT. Enhancements include
• the removal of out-of-service (OOS) diagnostics from manual SWACTs
• the application of an OOS diagnostic decision table based on the drop
reason
• the addition of a drop reason to the existing logs
• the addition of a pre-SWACT audit
• the addition of a software reset through the mate unit
BCS history
Logs
A new log, PM181, is generated whenever the central control receives a
message from an active XMS-based peripheral module (XPM) unit
indicating that activity was dropped due to a critical fault.
User interface
The parameter TEST is added to the command SWACT to allow full OOS
diagnostics to be performed on a newly inactive unit after the SWACT is
completed. In addition, a warning message is added if the pre-SWACT audit
fails during the execution of a manual SWACT command.

NTX270AA
AJ1039
Feature name
XPM Data Management Robustness
Description
AJ1039 provides additional audits and checks to ensure data consistency in
the XMS-based peripheral module (XPM) and central control (CC), as
follows:
• expands the non-resident tool, LTCCH, to display XPM peripheral side
(P-side) information
• provides an audit on the XPM central side (C-side) to ensure that a
terminal is not holding more than one channel
• speeds up XPM node translation table transfer when the inactive unit is
returned to service, and makes the transfer process more robust
• blocks data sync and transfer of the node translation table between the
inactive and active unit when the inactive unit is returned to service
• notifies the CC when node table mismatch is encountered between the
active and inactive unit
• controls static data audit over data changes
BCS history
The non-resident tool, LTCCH, applies only to line trunk controllers (LTC)
and line group controllers (LGC).
Audits on channels held by single terminals are provided only for those
peripheral module (PM) types that support LGC CC speech audit.
The following capabilities do not apply to PMs with small peripheral loads:
• blocking data transfer from an active to inactive unit
• speeding up node table transfer
• making node table transfer more robust
• adding new in-service trouble reasons on node table mismatches
• controlling static data audit over data changes
Logs
Logs AUDT203 and AUDT204 are modified by this feature. The logs are
generated when the LGC speech audit uncovers a terminal that is using more
than one C-side channel.

NTX270AA
AJ1039
User interface
The CI commands LTCCH, RTS, and QUERYPM are modified by this
feature. The LTCCH command is expanded to provide P-side information
on the XPM. The option NODATASYNC is added to the parameters UNIT
and INACTIVE of the RTS command to send static data to the inactive unit.
The command QUERYPM with the parameter FLT is modified to display a
datasync failure or a mismatch between the node tables of the active and
inactive unit.

NTX270AA
AL1460
Feature name
XPM MTC for DMS-X Part 2
Description
AL1460 introduces frame transport system (FTS) messaging capability on
the digital trunk controller (DTC7, PDTC, or IDTC), in order to provide a
message path between the digital trunk controller and link interface unit
(LIU) peripherals through the message switch. This feature also provides
the basis for incorporating the link peripheral processor , which enhances the
capacity of the common channel signalling (CCS7) service switching point.
BCS history
Although this feature requires processor cards of version NT6X45BA or
later to determine whether the XMS-based peripheral module (XPM) is at
the ROM or TASK level, the computing module maintenance code is
backward compatible with firmware prior to NT6X45BA.
This feature is supported on digital trunk controller (DTC7, PDTC, or
IDTC) XPMs, when the modules are connected to an enhanced network and
are equipped with messaging card NT6X69.
Messaging facilities provided by this feature are not supported when digital
trunk controller (DTC7, PDTC, or IDTC) XPMs are connected to a junctor
network.
This feature converts the digital trunk controller XPM to DMS-X mode.
Message switch and buffer 7 (MSB7) XPMs do not support the DMS-X
mode on the central-side messaging channels.
This feature provides a modified messaging path for CCS7 applications to
send FTS messages between a digital trunk controller (DTC7, PDTC, or
IDTC) and an LIU7.

NTX270AA
AL1460
Datafill
Table Description
OPCOPT Office parameter XPM_CSIDE_DMSX is added to allow XPM

C-side messaging links to run DMS-X level 2 protocol.
This feature increases data store by less than 50 words and increases
program store by 1K words.

NTX270AA
AL2416
Feature name
Convert Series II PMs to Recovery Controller
Description
AL2416 implements the first phase of converting series II peripheral
modules (PM) so that they can be used by the system recovery controller
(SRC) for coordinating recovery activities. This feature allows the system to
broadcast load groups of PMs automatically. This feature reduces outage
time and manual intervention.
BCS history
This feature requires the extended multiprocessor PM (XPM) hardware
(version NT6X45BA or later).
Both the XPM and line concentrating module (LCM) peripherals must have
filenames datafilled in table PMLOADS for the automatic broadcast loading
feature to function.
• AL1570—System Recovery Controller Dependency Manager
• AL2037—Concurrent Activity Manager
Datafill
This feature increases data store by a maximum of 2 Kbytes and increases
User interface
This feature adds a load progress indicator for command POST at the PM
level of a MAP terminal. This indicator tells the user that the SRC is in the
process of coordinating some maintenance activity on the posted PM.

NTX270AA
AN0336
Feature name
XPM Base Card Analysis and Test
Description
AN0336 studies the hardware and diagnostic software of the three XPM
cards, then proceeds to correct software bugs and deficiencies as well as
make recommendations for future enhancments. The results of the study are
used for the following tasks:
• to determine if existing fault detection code is correct and if additional
fault detection is possible
• to determine if existing fault isolation code is correct and if additional
test coverage is possible
• to document thoroughly the diagnostic software
• to correct any software bugs found during the investigation and make
long-term recommendations if the issue is too large to be addressed by
this feature
• to improve the organization, modularity, and readability of the diagnostic
code when possible
The cards selected for investigation are (in order of investigation)
• 6X72 (remote formatter card)
• 6X41 (speech bus formatter card)
• 6X69 (CPP message protocol and tones card)
BCS history

NTX270AA
AN0337
Feature name
P-side Looparound Facility Redesign
Description
AN0337 reduces outages in the extended multiprocessor system
(XMS)-based peripheral module (XPM), including outages in the XPM with
unified processor (XPM+), and in the common peripheral module (CPM).
This reduction is achieved by enhancing peripheral-side (P-side) loop
allocation and isolating faulty P-side loops to avoid inappropriate severe
maintenance actions. As a result, the system is less susceptible to region
error traps during P-side loop allocation.
BCS history

NTX270AA
AR0086
Feature name
Add MAPCI PERFORM Level for DTCI
Description
AR0086 enables the extended multiprocessor system (XMS)-based
peripheral module (XPM) real-time and performance tools to include the
digital trunk controller (DTC) supporting ISDN (DTCI) in the peripheral
module types that are monitored from the PERFORM level of the MAP.
The PERFORM level for DTCI is equivalent to that offered for DTC. This
level includes results for primary rate interface (PRI) call originations and
terminations in the MAP display.
BCS history
This feature requires a DTCI or a line trunk controller (LTC) that is
provisioned for PRI ISDN.
The restrictions and limitations are the same as those for feature AG0485
(XPM PERFORM Tool Robustness).
Only one user can access performance data for any one peripheral.
Only the active unit can be queried.
A maximum of ten peripherals can run the PERFORM tool concurrently, but
only five MAPs can display the performance data at any one time.
PERFORM level measurements are not preserved over a cold or warm
switch of activity (SWACT); however, they are preserved over a busy (BSY)
or return to service (RTS) of the active unit.
• AC0024—XPM Performance Tools
• AG0485—XPM Performance Tool Robustness
• AL1322—ISG Performance Tools
• AL1296—ISG Performance Map Display
User interface
This feature supports the existing PERFORM level user interface.

NTX270AA
NC0033
Feature name
OMs for XPM Links
Description
NC0033 adds operational measurements (OM) to provide link blockage and
usage information for extended multiprocessor system (XMS)-based
peripheral modules (XPM) that have line controlling devices (LCD) as
subtending nodes. Specifically, this feature records the following statistics:
• central side (C-side) and peripheral side (P-side) link call busy usage
• C-side and P-side link allocation attempts
• C-side and P-side link blockage
• C-side and P-side maintenance busy usage
BCS history
BCS35Data store increased from a maximum of 0.5 kbyte to a maximum
of 1 kbyte.
Datafill
This feature increases program store by a maximum of 2 kbytes and
increases data store by a maximum of 1 kbyte.
This feature adds OM group XPMLNK to provide link blockage and usage
measurements for each XPM.

NTX270AA
NC0105
Feature name
Call Status Reservation Across Warm SWACT
Description
NC0105 enhances the handling of public safety answering point (PSAP) 911
calls, to ensure that calls are unaffected by a controlled extended peripheral
module (XPM) warm switch of activity. An E911 call can only have one of
the following features active during a warm switch of activity and retain the
enhanced E911 SWACT capability:
• Three-way Calling
• Single Button Transfer
• E911 Ringback
• E911 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
BCS history
The enhanced E911 controlled warm SWACT is disabled for the duration of
the call when a subscriber feature other than Three-way Calling, Single
Button Conference, E911 Ringback or an ACD feature is active over the
warm SWACT.
This feature interacts with feature AF3747 (Enhanced Warm SWACT).
Datafill

NTX270AA
NC0108
Feature name
DTSR OM Enhancements
Description
NC0108 enhances the existing dial tone speed recording (DTSR) operational
measurements (OM) by recording the instances in which the subscriber
experiences a dial tone delay of greater than 3 s and abandons the call before
receiving dial tone.
BCS history
• NT6X51AB card (extended LCM processor) is required in the line
concentrating module (LCM) or remote LCM (RLCM)
• NTBX34AB card (ISDN line module processor upgrade) is required in
the 2B1Q ISDN LCM (LCME)
• NTBX34CA card (ISDN line module processor upgrade) is required in
the small remote unit (SRU)
If dial tone is not received, the dial pulse delay register is incremented for
both dial pulse and Digitone lines.
This feature does not apply to line modules (LM) and remote LMs (RLM),
since they do not use real calls for determining the DTSR OM.
This feature does not significantly (less than 1%) affect the real-time usage
of the peripheral processors.
Datafill
This feature increases data store by a maximum of 2 kbytes and increases
This feature modifies OM groups DTSR, DTSRPM, and SITE to include the
recording of instances in which a subscriber experiences a dial tone delay of
greater than 3 s and abandons the call before receiving dial tone.

NTX270AA
NC0108
User interface
This feature modifies MAP command QUERYPM in directory LCMDIR,
and modifies MAP commands ADD and CHANGE in directory TABDIR.
Command QUERYPM displays information about the LCM.
Command ADD allows data to be added in table LCMINV.
Command CHANGE allows modification of data in table LCMINV.

NTX270AA
NC0322
Feature name
PM180 Cleanup
Description
NC0322 analyzes the existing source of PM180 logs in relation to hardware
faults and generates a new log indicating the hardware actions to be taken.
BCS history
Only the most critical software modules are analyzed for the new log.
This feature does not analyze software-related PM180 logs for states
affecting service.
Logs
A new log, PM777, is generated when a hardware fault is detected by the
software.

NTX270AA
TA0195
Feature name
IXPM+ on 2-processor Backplane
Description
This feature provides the software changes to support the unified processor
(UP) on the international digital trunk controller (IDTC+) and on the
international line group controller (ILGC+) with the two-processor
backplane. This feature uses the load created for the three-processor
backplane international XMS-based peripheral module (IXPM+), that is,
EIL and EID for the ILGC and IDTC, respectively.
BCS history
This feature supports only shelf code 6X02UC and frame code NT6X01AC
for IDTC+/ILGC+ on the two-processor backplane.
This feature supports only the 6X69 messaging card.
This feature uses only the loads EIDxxnn for IDTC+ and EILxxnn for
ILGC+ that will run on the UP (NTMX77).
For more detail about IXPM+, refer to the following features:
• TA0163 NTLS24 and NTLS15 Enhancements
• TA0134 Unified Processor on IDTC/ILGC–XPM Portion
This feature does not affect any of the current XPM and IXPM functionality.
This activity requires the following features:
• TA0133 Unified Processor on IDTC/ILGC–CC Portion
• TA0134 Unified Processor on IDTC/ILGC–XPM Portion
Datafill
Table Description
LTCINV Value 6X02UC is added to field EQPEC. Values MX77nn are

added to field PECS6X45.

NTX270AA
TA0196
Feature name
IXPM+ Robustness Enhancements
Description
The international digital trunk controller (IDTC)+ and international line
group controller (ILGC)+ are the peripheral modules (PM) equipped with
NTMX77 card. This feature provides the software modifications in order to
support the robustness improvements for these PMs.
BCS history
This feature only runs on the IXPM+.
This feature only uses the loads EIDxxnn for IDTC+ and EILxxnn for
ILGC+. These run on the unified processor (UP).
This feature does not affect any of the current XPM and IXPM functionality.
This activity requires the following features:

• TA0133 Unified Processor on IDTC/ILGC–CC portion
• TA0194 Maint Enhance for NTC7 MTP

NTX270AA
TA0273
Feature name
Third UTR for IDTC+
Description
This feature provides support for a third universal tone receiver (UTR) card
on an international digital trunk controller with a unified processor (IDTC+).
This additional UTR provides 30 more receiver channels for call processing
and is supported on both two-processor and three-processor backplanes.
The NT6X92CB card can be used in any peripheral that accepts the
NT6X92CA card but three UTRs can only be configured for the IDTC+.
BCS history
This feature only runs on an international XMS based peripheral module
equipped with an NTMX77 card (IXPM+) and requires at least one
NT6X92CB UTR card per shelf in any UTR slot.
The following restrictions apply to this feature:
• Only the loads named EIDxxnn which run on the NTMX77 unified
processor (UP) are used.
• The OPTCARD field in table LTCINV must be datafilled properly with
the slot numbers of the UTRs.
This feature requires features TA0133 (Unified Processor on IDTC/ILGC –
CC Portion) and TA0134 (Unified Processor on IDTC/ILGC – XPM
Portion).
OM group UTR is increased according to the number of UTR cards in the
peripheral module (PM).
User interface
The PMACT tool output is changed to record the available UTR channel
number as 94 when three UTRs are in the PM.

NTX274AA
DTC 30 Carrier Maintenance
AE0480 Carrier Maintenance Enhancement

AE0488 Japanese Tones for New Messaging PDTC
AE0777 6X27 Interface Control
AE1056 PDTC Enhanced Warm SWACT
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX274AA
AE1056
Feature name
PDTC Enhanced Warm SWACT
Description
AE1056 provides enhanced warm switch of activity (SWACT) capabilities
for the 1-, 2-, and 3-processor PCM30 digital trunk controller (PDTC).
Synchronization data for stable trunk calls is sent to the inactive PDTC,
allowing these trunks to accept changes in supervision after a SWACT, with
no disruption of service or intervention from the control component (CC).
BCS history
This feature requires a 1- or a 3-processor PDTC.
This feature does not address non-terminal-processing task areas, or
application-specific call processing problems uncovered by the changes.

NTX470AA
International Common Basic
AC0081 International Killer Trunks

AC0109 PCM-30 Robustness
AC0184 International Overload Control Enhancements
AC0304 International OM Support and Packaging
AE0554 Downloadable Tone Enhancement
AE0643 Dynamic Configuration Data Update in IXPM
AE0646 ILCM Capacity Enhancement
AE0652 Dynamic Data Update for International XPMs
AG0719 IXPM Enhanced Flow Control
AG1031 IXPM Performance Monitoring
AJ0171 IXPM Static Data Audit
AJ0183 C1 DID/DOD PBX Trunks
AJ0187 Flexible Call Pre-answer Supervision
AJ0580 Call Party Control via Translations
AJ0746 DMS-100 P-side and C-side Channel Audit
AJ0821 IDTC MFC Trunk Robustness
AJ0837 Quiet Termination Test Line
AJ1027 MFC Monitor Tool
AJ1088 Market_of_Office Enhancements
AJ1126 Universal Translation Verification Tool
AJ1129 K&S Service Code Translation Hooks
AJ1223 Cross-architecture Feature Interactions
BC0962 International Trunk Testing
BC1060 Support for A-law Cards (TTT, TTU, RCVRMF, and DRAM)
BC1185 International TRAVER
—continued—

NTX470AA
BC1190 Trunk Data Modifications

BC1211 Message Transport System
BC1301 General Interworking System Part I
BC1338 International Trunk Maintenance Aspects
BC1914 Convert Ambiguous Head Table to Segstor
BC1920 Add Fields into Logical Level of MTR and OPR Trunks
BC1927 International Peripherals Overload Control
BC2285 International OM Conversion
BF0375 A-law Network Crosspoints
BF0376 A-law TTU
BF0379 A-law TTT
BF0393 LTC Event Recorders and Transmitters
BF0394 LTC Waveform Processors
BF0395 Line Signal Processors
BF0398 Register Signaling Processors
BF0399 Terminal Application Processors
BF0436 SP/FP Transaction Processing Part I
BF0437 SP/FP Transaction Processing Part II
BF0474 XPM 3 Processor IPC
BF0560 Trunk Maintenance
BF0805 International Trunk to Announcement (speedup)
BF0874 Outpulse 18 Digits (MF; DTMF)
BF0915 International Peripherals Overload Control
BF0917 NT6X69 Interface for MTS
BF0971 IXPM Warm SWACT
BV1211 CC Line Signaling Support
BV1212 CC Register Signaling Support
TA0163 NTLS24 and NTLS15 Enhancements
TA0165 Immediate Billing
—continued—

NTX470AA
TA0166 Flexible ANI Enhancements
39005646 China BTA OMs

End
BCS history
BCS38i—TA0163, TA0165, and TA0166 added.
BCS44.1i –– 3900546 added.
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX056AA Enhanced Administration

NTX470AA
AC0081
Feature name
International Killer Trunks
Description
This feature monitors all trunks in a DMS switch and identifies the
following trunk types:
• Killer trunks, which are trunks that are repeatedly seized but due to a
malfunction, are not in use for a normal time period. Killer trunks can
be distinguished by a higher than average seizure rate.
• Slow release trunks, which have low seizure rates combined with high
usage rates.
• Always busy trunks, which have no call attempts and are busy for the
duration of a Killer Trunk feature report period.
• Always idle trunks, which have no usage or call attempt indications for
the duration of a Killer Trunk feature report period.
BCS history
Only trunk group types MTR, ANI, and OPR can be monitored.
Trunk groups must be removed from table KTGROUP before additions or
deletions are made in table TRKMEM.
When a trunk is force released, its usage is not updated.
The killer trunk feature has a real time impact on all calls involving trunks.
Datafill
Table Description
KTACTIVE A read only table that displays the trunk groups currently
instrumented.
KTGROUP Contains the CLLI of the trunk groups to be instrumented when

the killer trunk feature is in manual mode.
KTPARMS Contains the data that defines and controls the killer trunk
control and report process.
Logs
Log KT100 reports killer trunk results.

NTX470AA
AC0109
Feature name
PCM30 Robustness
Description
This feature allows static limit templates for carrier alarms to be activated
according to carrier type.
BCS history
This feature is intended for DMS switches in Turkey only.
The specification of maintenance limits in table CARRMTC is now
restricted to authorized personnel.
• AE0081 PCM30 Bit Error Rate Recovery
• AE0085 CC Maintenance for PCM30 Enhancements
Datafill
Table Description
CARRMTC TURKSTD is added as a valid entry in field TMPLTNM.
LTCPSINV TURKSTD is added as a valid entry in field CARRIDX.
SYSDATA The protection level for table CARRMTC is changed from

NILPROT to SYSPROT.

NTX470AA
AC0184
Feature name
International Overload Control Enhancements
Description
This feature improves the efficiency and reliability of the international
overload control system by modications to the existing software.
BCS history
AC0184 requires the following feature:
• BF0915 International Peripherals Overload Controls
BF0915

NTX470AA NTX470AA
AC0304 AC0304
Feature name
International OM Support and Packaging
Description
This feature specifies the operational measurements (OM) groups and
registers that are supported on the DMS-100 switch.
The following OM groups apply:
• ANN recorded announcements
• CF3P three-port conference bridge measurement
• CF6P six-port conference bridge measurement
• CMC central message controller maintenance summary
• CP call processing
• CP2 call processing (2)
• CPU central processing unit maintenance summary
• CSL console device maintenance summary
• DDU disk drive unit file and maintenance work
• DTSR dial tone speed recording
• DTSRPM dial tone speed recording for peripheral modules
• EXT extension blocks
• FTRQ feature queuing software resource
• HUNT hunt group performance
• IADL international abbreviated dialing
• ICDIVF international call diversion fixed
• ICDIVP international call diversion programmable
• ICONF international conference features
• ICT international call transfer
• ICWT international call waiting
• IDND international do not disturb
• IFDL international fixed destination line
• ILR international line restrictions
• INDC international no double connect
• IOC input-output system
• IOSYS input-output system
• IRAG international ring again
• IREC international call recording

NTX470AA
AC0304
• IWUC international wakeup call
• LM line module
• LMD local and remote line module traffic
• LOGS log messages
• MACHACT machine activity group
• MTA metallic test access
• MTERR call metering error counts group
• MTU magnetic tape unit maintenance summary
• NMC network message controller maintenance summary
• NWMTGCNTnetwork management trunk group counts
• OTS office traffic summary
• PCMCARR CCITT DS30 digital carrier maintenance summary
• PM peripheral module maintenance
• PMOVLD peripheral module overload controls
• PMTYP peripheral module maintenance summary subtotals
• RADR receiver attachment delay recorder
• SITE traffic and dial tone speed recording – remote sites
• SOTS supplementary office traffic summary
• SPC semi-permanent connections
• SYSPERF system performance
• TFCANA traffic separation and traffic analysis group
• TONES tones group
• TRK trunk group OM group
• TRMTCM treatments, customer miscellaneous
• TRMTCU treatments, customer unauthorized
• TRMTCU2 treatments, customer unauthorized (2)
• TRMTER treatments, equipment related
• TRMTFR treatments, feature related
• TRMTRS treatments, resource shortage
• TROUBLEQ system referred line diagnostics queue
• TS time switch group
• UTR universal tone receivers, international application
BCS history

NTX470AA NTX470AA
AE0554 AE0554
Feature name
Downloadable Tones Enhancement
Description
This feature reduces the time it takes to generate toneset samples by 35%,
and modifies the TONES debug tool user interface.
BCS history
This feature is only applicable to extended multiprocessor system peripheral
modules (XPM) equipped with downloadable tones capability.
AE0554 requires the following feature:
• AE0200 Tones Optionality

NTX470AA
AE0643
Feature name
Dynamic Configuration Data Update in IXPM
Description
This feature allows dynamic reconfiguration of in-service PCM30 digital
trunk controllers (PDTC), PCM30 line group controllers (PLGC),
international digital trunk controllers (IDTC), and international line group
controllers (ILGC) and their links without having to perform a return to
service (RTS) or peripheral module reset (PMRESET). This feature also
extends static data auditing for tables LCMINV, LTCINV, LTCPSINV,
RMMINV, and XESAINV.
BCS history
AE0643 requires feature:
• AE0652 Dynamic Data Update for International XPMs

NTX470AA NTX470AA
AE0646 AE0646
Feature name
ILCM Capacity Enhancement
Description
This feature increases the call capacity of the expanded memory
international line concentrating module (IXLCM) from 1.2 to 1.8 calls per
second.
BCS history
This feature is only available on the IXLCM.
• AJ0817 ILGC Capacity Improvement

NTX470AA
AE0652
Feature name
Dynamic Data Update for International XPMs
Description
This feature enhances the central control maintenance software to support
the dynamic reconfiguration of in-service PCM30 digital trunk controllers
(PDTC), PCM30 line group controllers (PLGC), international digital trunk
controllers (IDTC), and international line group controllers (ILGC) and their
links without having to perform a return to service (RTS) or peripheral
module reset (PMRESET). This feature also extends static data auditing for
tables LCMINV, LTCINV, LTCPSINV, RMMINV, and XESAINV.
BCS history
This feature does not eliminate the in-service trouble condition of static data
mismatch, as situations remain where table control changes in PM inventory
tables will generate this alarm.
• AE0643 Dynamic Configuration Data Update in IXPM

NTX470AA NTX470AA
AG0719 AG0719
Feature name
IXPM Enhanced Flow Control
Description
This feature prioritizes the tasks performed by trunk call processing on the
international digital trunk controller (IDTC). As a result, the DMS-100
processes work on all calls in progress and all call terminations before
handling any call originations. This process avoids overloading the system
while there is processing to be completed on existing calls.
BCS history
This feature does not apply to dial pulse trunk types that require an
immediate response after going off hook.

NTX470AA
AG1031
Feature name
IXPM Performance Monitoring
Description
This feature provides access to information that details international
extended multiprocessor system peripheral module (IXPM) performance and
activity from a MAP (maintenance and administration position) terminal.
BCS history
The following restrictions apply:
• Only one user can collect performance data from a peripheral module at
one time.
• Only the active unit is queried.
• Measurements are not preserved when the active units drops activity or
when a switch of activity occurs.
• A maximum of ten peripheral modules can use the PERFORM tool at
one time.
Logs
This feature adds the following log:
• Log PRFM210 is generated by the STRTLOG command every 15 min to
display PM activity data for an IXPM. This log is also generated when a
STOP command is entered, the timer expires, or the active unit drops
activity. The data for 1 min is shown and a summary for the last 15 min.
User interface
This feature adds the PERFORM and PMACTX MAP levels when a IXPM
type peripheral module is posted.
At the PERFORM level of the MAP display, the following commands are
added:
• PMACTX, to access the PMACTX level of the MAP display
• PFQUERY, to display information regarding the peripheral modules that
have the PERFORM command invoked

NTX470AA
AG1031
At the PMACTX level of the MAP display, the following commands are
added:
• STRT, to start and specify the duration of the PM activity measurements
• STRTLOG, to generate the results of the PMACTX screen display as a
log report.
• STOPLOG, to stop log reports from being generated
• STOP, stop generating IXPM performance measurement data

NTX470AA
AJ0171
Feature name
IXPM Static Data Audit
Description
This feature ensures the sanity of the static data while the international
extended multiprocessor system peripheral module (IXPM) is in service.
With this feature, the common control (CC) is not required to send static
data following a return to service or common control reload restart if the
static data checksum in the IXPM is valid.
BCS history
The static data audit feature is only supported in the IXPM master processor.
This feature requires:
• BC1228 Audit XPM Data
• AL0608 Decouple CC Reload Restart and XPM Static Data

NTX470AA NTX470AA
AJ0183 AJ0183
Feature name
C1 DID/DOD PBX Trunks
Description
This feature provides the following functions:
• enabling digital trunk interfaces between the DMS-100 switch and
digital private automatic branch exchanges (PABX) to support both
direct inward dialing (DID) and direct outward dialing (DOD)
• processing multifrequency compelled (MFC) signaling on centralized
automatic message accounting (CAMA) and DOD calls
• allowing incoming C1 type trunks to route to outgoing dial pulse trunks
BCS history

NTX470AA
AJ0187
Feature name
Flexible Call Preanswer Supervision
Description
This feature allows flexible preanswer times to be datafilled for line to trunk
calls based on translation class.
BCS history
The recommended time-out period for OPR and IOPR trunks is 0 (zero).
The flexible call preanswer supervision feature is not compatible with the
Free Number Terminating (FNT) feature, because no answer signal is
returned. As a result, a call will timeout even if the call was answered.
When calls are diverted or transferred to another destination, the translation
class associated with the first leg of the call determines the preanswer
time-out value.
Datafill
Table Description
OFCVAR The parameter LINE_TOLL_CALL_NOANS_TMO is removed.
PREANSTO This table is added to associate a translation class with a

time-out value.

NTX470AA NTX470AA
AJ0580 AJ0580
Feature name
Called Party Control via Translations
Description
This feature allows the controlling party of a call (called, calling, or mutual)
to be identified by translations.
BCS history
Changes to table CTRLTMRS are not allowed.
Universal Translation classes OPRA and IOPRA always use 0 (zero) for
reanswer and preanswer times, and this value cannot be changed.
Flash features are denied with called party control except for Malicious Call
Trace and Emergency Services Group.
With calling party control, if the reanswer timeout has a value of 0 (zero),
and the called party goes on-hook, there is no reanswer timing, and the call
is terminated.
With called party control, a call is under calling party control until the called
party answers. This process prevents a call being defined as called party
control if a call is diverted to announcement or treatment.
Line to trunk calls using signaling systems that do not support called control
features revert to calling control.
This feature is not supported for line calls under emergency stand-alone
(ESA) operation, calls from lines to treatment, or incoming trunk calls.
Calls using call diversion (CDIV) are retranslated, and use call treatment
option associated with the new destination.
Calls to lines with call waiting (CWT), three-way calling (3WC), six-way
calling (6WC), and call transfer (ICT) features are under calling party
control.
Calls to lines with emergency services group (ESG) are under called party
control.
Incoming calls to lines with the Free Number Terminating (FNT) feature
will time-out after the preanswer period specified in table CTRLTMRS.

NTX470AA
AJ0580
This feature is not active under Malicious Call Trace (MCT).
When a Toll Break-in (TBI) call is made, and the originating party goes
on-hook, the called party is routed to treatment.
Datafill
Table Description
PREANSTO This table is deleted.
CTRLTMRS This table replaces table PREANSTO and includes preanswer

and reanswer time-outs.
OFCVAR Office parameters LINE_LOCAL_CALL_REANS_TMO,

LINE_TOLL_CALL_REANS_TMO, and
LINE_SPCL_CALL_REANS_TMO have been removed.
ACCHEAD, Field CALLCTRL has been added to the RTE and CONT
ACHEAD, selectors.
AMCODE,
AMHEAD,
CTCODE,
CTHEAD,
FACODE,
FAHEAD,
FTCODE,
FTHEAD,
IBSCODE,
IBSHEAD,
OFCCODE,
OFCHEAD,
PXCODE,
PXHEAD
Logs
This feature adds the following logs:
• Log DFIL127 is generated to indicate that a line-to-trunk call was
datafilled in translations to have CALLED control. The signaling
system used by the call does not support CALLED control and the
system is reverting to CALLING control to prevent call failure.
• Log DFIL128 is generated to indicate that a line-to-ITOPS call was
datafilled in translations to have other than CALLED control. The
system is reverting to CALLING control to prevent call failure.

NTX470AA NTX470AA
AJ0746 AJ0746
Feature name
DMS-100 P-side and C-side Channel Audit
Description
This feature performs the following audits:
• The international line group controller (ILGC) peripheral module side
(P-side) channel audit determines if busy channels are associated with
non-idle terminals.
• The ILGC P-side port and node audit determines the node and port status
from the common control (CC) to the peripheral module.
• The international extended multiprocessor system peripheral module
(IXPM) common control side (C-side) channel audit tests channels
between the networks and the ILGC.
BCS history
Only ILGC channels are audited by this feature.
Register PMERR in OM group PM is incremented each time a discrepancy
is detected by the port and node audit in a specific in-service ILGC.
Register PMTERR in OM group PMTYP is incremented each time a
discrepancy is detected by the port and node audit in any in-service ILGC.
Logs
Log PM181 is generated when an IXPM P-side channel audit detects 2 or
less idle channels on either a P-side link or intra-unit link.
Log AUDT203 is generated when the C-side channel audit finds a busy
channel associated with an idle line.

NTX470AA
AJ0821
Feature name
IDTC MFC Trunk Robustness
Description
This feature provides international digital trunk controller (IDTC)
robustness to protect against overload conditions caused by high calling
rates on multifrequency compelled (MFC) type C1 and R2 trunks.
BCS history

NTX470AA NTX470AA
AJ0837 AJ0837
Feature name
Quiet Termination Test Line
Description
This feature provides a quiet termination test line for R2 signaling.
The test line provides both far-to-near end transmission loss measurement
and noise measurement, and can be used from the trunk test position (TTP)
or the automated trunk test (ATT) level of the MAP display.
The test line also works the 102-mW test line to provide far-to-near end
transmission loss measurement.
BCS history
This feature requires a DMS-100 switch equipped with the following
hardware:
• For offices originating a quiet termination test, an NT1X90BA (test
signal generator) card and an NT2X96BA (PCM level meter) card are
required.
• For offices terminating a quiet termination test, an NT1X00KA (102
test) card is required.
The S100 test cannot be manually invoked with an NT1X00KA card, as this
card produces a milliwatt tone followed by quiet termination. The S100 test
is invoked by the T100 test if the far-end office provides only quiet
termination.
Logs
Results for the quiet termination test line are reported in existing logs
TRK127, TRK128, TRK129, TRK130, and TRK131.
Results for the T102 milliwatt test are reported in existing logs TRK124,
TRK125, and TRK126.

NTX470AA
AJ1027
Feature name
MFC Monitor Tool
Description
This feature allows multifrequency compelled (MFC) signaling registers on
a trunk to be monitored. After calls are made over selected trunks, the
incoming and outgoing register signals can be displayed.
BCS history
This tool can be accessed by only one user at a time.
A maximum of four trunks can be monitored.
A maximum of 170 signals per trunk are stored.
User interface
This feature adds the SIGMON level of the MAP display that is accessed
from the CI level.
At the SIGMON MAP level, the following commands are added:
• The SELECT command selects a trunk to be monitored.
• The RESET command releases one or more selected trunks when data
for a trunk is no longer required.
• The START command initiates monitoring on selected trunks.
• The STOP command stops the monitoring process on the selected trunks.
• The DISPLAY command displays the monitored signaling data
associated with one of the selected trunks after the monitoring process
has stopped.
• The STATUS command displays information associated with all of the
selected trunks.
• The HELP command provides usage information for all SIGMON MAP
level commands.

NTX470AA NTX470AA
AJ1088 AJ1088
Feature name
Market_of_Office Enhancements
Description
This feature allows operating companies to jointly define call recording
formats, toll break-in cadences, feature tones, and comfort tones by
specifying a country-specific table parameter.
BCS history
This feature requires a TONESET option to be specified in table LTCINV.
Datafill
Table Description
OFCENG The office parameter TONE_SET is deleted. The office

parameter MARKET_OF_OFFICE is added to identify country
specific tone sets and call recording formats.
LTCINV The default option of field TONESET is removed.

NTX470AA
AJ1126
Feature name
Universal Translation Verification Tool
Description
This feature provides a tool to verify the consistency of the Universal
Translation tables when activated by a MAP (maintenance and
administration position) command.
Universal Translations routes a call based on dialed digits. This feature
checks for missing or redundant tuples in the route tables of the translation
system.
BCS history
The key in the head or code that generates the missing route tuples cannot be
identified with this tool.
User interface
This feature adds the TRANSVER command directory that is accessed from
the CI level of the MAP display.
The following parameters are valid with the TRANSVER command:
• ALL activates the verification of translation data for all translation
systems.
• ALL BRIEF activates the verification of translation data for all
translation systems but displays only the missing and redundant tuples.
• <system> activates the verification of translation data for the translation
system specified. Valid systems include access code (AC), prefix code
(PX), country code (CT), foreign area code (FA), office code (OFC),
directory number (DN), ambiguous code (AM), feature code (FT), and
number services code (NSC).
• <system> BRIEF activates the verification of translation data for the
translation system specified, but displays only the missing and redundant
tuples.

NTX470AA NTX470AA
AJ1129 AJ1129
Feature name
K&S Service Code Translation Hooks
Description
This feature provides number service code translation tables for Austria.
Number service features include the following:
• special prefix numbers, such as 800, are required
• access to a database to obtain routing information is required
• inward call management features are provided
Number services are provided on a service switching point (SSP) that is a

node in a CCS7 network.
BCS history

NTX470AA
AJ1223
Feature name
Cross-architecture Feature Interactions
Description
This feature provides an enhanced call processing environment that provides
for future direct interaction between different call agents, such as POTS and
Integrated Business Network (IBN) lines, on the same DMS switch.
BCS history
This feature does not provide for interactions between IBN attendant
consoles and international lines or trunks.

NTX470AA NTX470AA
BC0962 BC0962
Feature name
International Trunk Testing
Description
This feature allows testing of trunks using bit signaling.
BCS history
User interface
At the TTP MANUAL level of the MAP display, the following changes are
made:
• The commands ONOFFHK and RNGBF are removed.
• The command SGNL is added, with optional parameters ONOFFHK,
RNGBF, or one of sixteen 4-bit signaling codes.

NTX470AA
BC1060
Feature name
Support for A-law Cards (TTT, TTU, RCVRMF, and DRAM)
Description
This feature provides A-law capability on the international transmission test
trunk (TTT), trunk test unit (TTU), multifrequency receiver (RCVRMF),
and the digital recorded announcement machine (DRAM).
BCS history
This feature requires the following hardware items:
• for the TTT, an NT1X90BA test signal generator (A-law) card and an
NT2X96BA test signal generator card
• for the TTU, an NT2X47BA TTU controller (A-law) card and an
NT2X56BA digital filter (A-law) card
• for the RCVRMF, an NT2X48BA digital 4-channel MF receiver card
• for the DRAM, an NT1X75DD digital recorded announcement A-law
processor card and an NT1X76DD DRA international announcements
D card

NTX470AA NTX470AA
BC1185 BC1185
Feature name
International TRAVER
Description
This feature modifies the translation verification (TRAVER) tool to
recognize international trunks.
BCS history
Only the T parameter of TRAVER is valid with international trunks.

NTX470AA
BC1190
Feature name
Trunk Data Modifications
Description
This feature modifies existing trunk group and subgroup data tables and
adds a network table that allows compatibility for international signaling and
translating systems.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
TRKGRP Field GRPTYP has been changed to allow new trunk group
types MTR and OPR. New fields SAT, ESUPR, XLAVAR,
XLADSEL, MTRIC, METERIC, and MDI are added.
TRKSGRP Fields CARDCODE and SGDATA have been changed to allow

MTR and OPR trunk group types and PCM30 cards. New fields
RXTXSEP, REMBUSY, DIR, LNICSSI, RGICSSI, MTICSSI,
LNOGSSI, RGOGSSI, and MTOGSSI are added.
NETATTR This table has been added to specify translation data and
options associated with a network.

NTX470AA NTX470AA
BC1211 BC1211
Feature name
Message Transport System
Description
This feature permits node to node routing of messages between the
DMS-100 central control (CC) and all peripheral modules (PM), and from
the PMs to any subtending nodes. The CC interface for message control is
also provided by this feature.
BCS history

NTX470AA
BC1301
Feature name
General Interworking System Part I
Description
This feature provides a layered call processing architecture for messages
between the DMS-100 central control (CC), and peripheral modules (PM)
that includes session establishment, network access, and database access.
BCS history

NTX470AA NTX470AA
BC1338 BC1338
Feature name
International Trunk Maintenance Aspects
Description
This feature provides the interface and return-to-service (RTS) procedures
used by call processing in the central control (CC) for communicating with
peripheral modules (PM).
BCS history
• BC0962 International Trunk Testing

NTX470AA
BC1914
Feature name
Convert Ambiguous Head Table to Segstor
Description
This feature changes the method of data store for table AMHEAD from a
flat table to dynamic allocation.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
AMHEAD The maximum number of tuples allowed is increased to 2047.

NTX470AA NTX470AA
BC1920 BC1920
Feature name
Add Fields into Logical Level of MTR and OPR Trunks
Description
This feature allows up to four digits to be prefixed to calls on incoming or
two-way operator trunks or incoming or two-way trunks with a metering
requirement.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
TRKGRP New field DIGREGEN is required to be datafilled when entries

in field GRPTYP are MTR or OPER.

NTX470AA
BC1927
Feature name
International Peripherals Overload Control
Description
This feature allows the DMS-100 central control (CC) to enable the
processor to manage the peripheral module message congestion that is
associated with peak call processing demands.
BCS history

NTX470AA NTX470AA
BC2285 BC2285
Feature name
International OM Conversion
Description
This feature adds two operational measurement (OM) groups. These groups
can be used to track total call originations from incoming calls, subscriber
originations, and any system generated calls within the DMS-100 switch,
and their dispersal as outgoing calls, call terminations, other call
terminations such as announcement, and call failures.
BCS history
This feature cancels OM groups OFZ and OFZ2, and creates OM groups
OTS and SOTS.
The following registers are included in OM group OTS:
• For call originations, the following OMs apply: NORG, NORG2,
ORGTRM, ORGTRM2, ORGOUT, ORGOUT2, ORGTRMT,
ORGABDN, ORGLKT, ORGFSET, and ORGFSET2.
• For incoming call, the following OMs apply: NINC, NINC2, INCTRM,
INCTRM2, INCOUT, INCOUT2, INCTRMT, INCABNM, INCABNC,
INCLKT, and INCFSET.
• For system-generated calls, the following OMs apply: NSYS, NSYS2,
SYSTRM, SYSOUT, SYSTRMT, SYSABDN, SYSLKT, and SYSFSET.
The following registers are included in OM group SOTS:
• For outgoing network performance, the following OMs apply:
SOUTNWT, SOUTNWT2, SOUTMFL, SOUTRMFL, SOUTOSF, and
SOUTROSF.
• For terminating network module performance, the following OMs apply:
STRMNWT, STRMNWT2, STRMMFK, STRMBLK, STRMRBLK,
and STRMGSGL.
• For generalized no-circuit treatment (GNCT), the following OMs apply:
SOTSNCIT, SOTSNCTC, SOTSNCLT, SOTSNCBN, SOTSNCID,
SOTSNOSC, SOTSNCOT, SOTSNCRT, SOTSNCIM, SOTSNCON,
and SOTSNCOF.
• For machine dialed partial-dial, and permanent signal call types, the
following registers apply: SOTSPDLM and SOTSPSGM.

NTX470AA
BF0375
Feature name
A-law Network Crosspoints
Description
This feature provides the firmware required to make DMS-100 network
crosspoints compatible with A-law companding.
BCS history
• an NT3X70BA A-law network crosspoint card
• an NT1V30AA A-law network digital pad

NTX470AA NTX470AA
BF0376 BF0376
Feature name
A-law TTU
Description
This feature provides the firmware required to enable A-law compatibility
on the test trunk unit (TTU).
BCS history
• an NT2X56BA A-law TTU filter card
• an NT1V46AA A-law TTU decompanding PROM
• an NT2X47BA A-law TTU controller card
• an NT1V45AA A-law TTU controller PROM

NTX470AA
BF0379
Feature name
A-law TTT
Description
on the transmission test trunk (TTT).
BCS history
• an NT1X90BA A-law TTT test signal generator card
• an NT1V44AA A-law TTT test signal generator PROM
• an NT2X96BA A-law TTT level meter card
• an NT1V47AA A-law TTT level meter PROM

NTX470AA NTX470AA
BF0393 BF0393
Feature name
LTC Event Recorders and Transmitters
Description
This feature supports processing and monitoring of the ABCD signaling bits
received on the PCM30 signaling interface card and connecting with the
PCM30 signaling processor.
BCS history
This feature requires the following hardware item:
• an NT6X28AA signaling interface card

NTX470AA
BF0394
Feature name
LTC Waveform Processors
Description
This feature supports waveform analyzer and waveform generator
transactors that allow signaling information over a trunk facility to be
scanned or transmitted using waveform sections.
Waveform sections are descriptions of signaling waveforms such as wink
signals and seizure indications.
Waveform analyzer and waveform generator transactors are associated with
a line signaling transactor that performs messaging with other call
processors.
BCS history

NTX470AA NTX470AA
BF0395 BF0395
Feature name
Line Signal Processors
Description
This feature supports all functions performed by a line signaling transactor.
A line signaling transactor is a processor that is responsible for interpreting
all line signals, such as off-hooks or flashes, generating an appropriate line
signal when required, and connecting with other call processors.
BCS history

NTX470AA
BF0398
Feature name
Register Signaling Processors
Description
This feature supports all functions performed by a register signaling
transactor. A register signaling transactor is a processor that is responsible
for digit collection, digit generation, and connecting with other call
processors.
BCS history

NTX470AA NTX470AA
BF0399 BF0399
Feature name
Terminal Application Processors
Description
This feature supports the software for the terminal application processor that
controls call processing functions in international XMS-based peripheral
modules (IXPM). Terminal application processors coordinate the activities
of line signaling processors, register signaling processors, call metering
processors, and provide an interface to call processing functions in the
central control.
BCS history

NTX470AA
BF0436
Feature name
SP and FP Transaction Processing Part I
Description
This feature supports message reception and scheduling services for
international XMS-based peripheral module (IXPM) I/O system level
applications. This feature also adds a facilities processor (FP) to reduce the
processing requirements of the signaling processor (SP) in the IXPM.
BCS history
• BF0437 SP and FP Transaction Processing Part II

NTX470AA NTX470AA
BF0437 BF0437
Feature name
SP and FP Transaction Processing Part II
Description
This feature provides support services and the application level environment
such as data blocks for the international XMS-based peripheral module
(IXPM), signaling processor (SP), facilities processor (FP), and master
processor(MP).
BCS history
• BF0436 SP and FP Transaction Processing Part I

NTX470AA
BF0474
Feature name
XPM 3 Processor IPC
Description
This feature allows the XMS-based peripheral module (XPM) message
transport layer to provide messaging capability between all call process
applications, regardless of the number of processors.
BCS history

NTX470AA NTX470AA
BF0560 BF0560
Feature name
Trunk Maintenance
Description
This feature allows an international digital trunk controller (IDTC) to
perform trunk maintenance.
BCS history
• BC1186 Turkish Audible Tones
• BC1187 CC Delay Dial-1 Line Signaling System
• BC1188 CC Wink-1 Line Signaling System
• BC1189 CC MF-3 Register Signaling System
• BF0389 LGC MP RT Improvements - Phase 2
• BF0394 LTC Waveform Processors
• BF0396 LTC - UTR Utility
• BF0398 Register Signaling Processors
• BF0399 Terminal Application Processors
• BF0430 LTC PCM30 I/F Card Maintenance
• BF0564 XPM Delay Dial-1 Line Signaling System
• BF0565 XPM wink-1 line signaling system
• BF0567 XPM MF-3 Register Signaling System
• BV1211 CC Line Signaling Support
• BV1212 CC Register Signaling Support

NTX470AA
BF0805
Feature name
International Trunk to Announcement (Speedup)
Description
This feature allows an international trunk call to terminate to a digital
recorded announcement machine (DRAM) and to reduce the associated
connection time.
BCS history
• BC1301 General Interworking System Part I
• BF0782 TAT/SST (PM) for International Lines

NTX470AA NTX470AA
BF0874 BF0874
Feature name
Outpulse 18 Digits (MF; DTMF)
Description
This feature increases to 18 digits the maximum number of digits that can be
transmitted from a international digital trunk controller (IDTC) using
multifrequency (MF) or dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) tones.
BCS history
This feature requires the following feature:
• BF0227 DTC MF Outpulsing Primitives

NTX470AA
BF0915
Feature name
Description
This feature provides the software for overload control in international
XMS-based peripheral modules (IXPM). The overload control system
detects congestion in the resident processor, broadcasts or receives
congestion information from other processors, and provides process flow
control in the congested processor using a credit pool system.
BCS history
• BC1927 International Peripherals Overload Control
• BC2254 International Trunks Overload Controls
• BF0970 International Trunks Overload Controls
• BF0977 International Lines Overload Control
For international service, register ORIGDENY in group CP is revised to
state that a call origination is lost.

NTX470AA NTX470AA
BF0917 BF0917
Feature name
6X69 Interface for MTS
Description
This feature allows the integration of the message transport system (MTS)
on the NT6X69 message card. The MTS provides the capability of binding
different message formats, assigning the message formats to various
internodal links, and routing messages between nodes, changing formats
when required.
BCS history
This feature requires an NT6X69AB CPP message protocol and tone circuit
pack card.
• BF0563 XPM Message Redesign

NTX470AA
BF0971
Feature name
IXPM Warm SWACT
Description
This feature allows stable calls to be saved during a controlled international
line group controller (ILGC) or international digital trunk controller (IDTC)
warm switch of activity (SWACT).
BCS history
• BF0919 DSA SWACT - PM
• BF0979 International Line TAT

NTX470AA NTX470AA
BV1211 BV1211
Feature name
CC Line Signaling Support
Description
This feature supports trunk signaling systems on the international digital
trunk controller (IDTC).
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
LNSIGSYS This table is added to allow operating companies to modify

signaling parameters by trunk subgroup instead of by office.

NTX470AA
BV1212
Feature name
CC Register Signaling Support
Description
This feature supports register signaling systems on the international digital
BCS history
• BC1190 Trunk Data Modifications
Datafill
Table Description
RGSIGSYS This table is added to allow operating companies to change

register signaling variables for a trunk subgroup or line attribute.

NTX470AA NTX470AA
TA0163 TA0163
Feature name
NTLS24 and NTLS15 Enhancements
Description
This feature enhances:
• the existing one-way NTLS24 Digital A-bit Pulsed Line Signaling and
one-way NTLS15 A-bit Continuous Line Signaling protocols, by
introducing A-bit and B-bit line signaling optionality
• The release guard signal of NTLS15 to support CCITT recommendation
Q.412
BCS history
One-way NTLS24 and NTLS15 signaling do not support fault (FLT) signal
This feature supports only the wink signal type of Ring Forward and
Ringback.
Ring Forward is not supported to a local switch.
COIN signaling is not supported.

Datafill
Table Description
LNSIGSYS SIGBIT is added to the NTLS24 tuple for A-bit andB-bit line
signaling options.
BIDLPOL and SIGBIT are added to the NTLS15 tuple for A-bit
and B-bit line signaling options.
CIDLPOL and DIDLPOL are added to the NTLS15 tuple to

make the idle polarities of the C-bit and D-bit flexible.
RLGPOL is added to the incoming and outgoing refinements

and RMAXRLG is added to the outgoing refinement of the
NTLS15 tuple to modify the RLG signal.
SMINRLG parameter of the outgoing refinement of the NTLS15

tuple is renamed as SRLGTM to modify the RLG signal.

NTX470AA
TA0165
Feature name
Immediate Billing
Description
This feature provides the capability to generate time and charge information
for incoming trunk calls to a DMS-200 toll office on international
centralized automatic message accounting (ICAMA) trunks and works along
with programmable R2 trunk signaling. The time and charge information is
provided as soon as the call is completed.
BCS history
Since there are 21 Attendant Pay Station (APS) logs in the log system, time
and charge information reports can be routed to a maximum of 21 output
devices.
Unanswered calls and calls for which no charges are incurred are logged
only if the office parameter APS_REPORT_ALL_CALLS is set to Y.
Office parameter CALL_REPORT_FORMAT in table OFCVAR must be set

to LOG for the generation of the log reports.
This feature can be applied only to incoming trunks providing ICAMA

billing.
The field ANI_SNPA in table TRKGRP must be set to Y in order to include

the Serving Number Plan Area (SNPA) in the automatic number
identification (ANI) digits. If SNPA is not prefixed to the ANI digits, then
the office is not able to identify from which line this call is originated and
cannot provide a log report through the expected route.
The SNPA for the ANI digits should be prefixed to the ANI digits in order to
route the logs correctly. This is achieved by using the feature TA0166
(Flexible ANI Enhancements).
All interactions that are present for feature AG1108 (APS-I) also apply for
this feature.
Logs
The number of APS logs is increased from 13 to 21 and APS became a log
report in the range APS113 to APS120.

NTX470AA NTX470AA
TA0166 TA0166
Feature name
Flexible ANI Enhancements
Description
This feature enables DMS-200 switch to prefix automatic number
identification (ANI) digits with area code on international centralized
automatic message accounting (ICAMA) trunks using international
programmable R2 protocol when the collected ANI digits do not contain a
national number (NN), but are required to contain the full directory number.
BCS history
ICAMA logs and ICAMA records can print a maximum of ten digits. If the
number of ANI digits is greater than ten, only the least significant ten digits
are processed as ANI digits in the ICAMA log and ICAMA record.
A maximum of 13 ANI digits can be transmitted to R2 trunks.
This feature can operate properly for the direct connection in the first toll
office after the local office and is operational if the toll office is operating in
a link-by-link mode.
This feature supports trunks using international programmable R2 protocol

whose group type is MTR, direction is incoming or two-way, and traffic
class is CAMA or TNCA.
This feature interacts with the feature TA0165 (Immediate Billing).
Datafill
Table Description
TRKGRP ANI_SNPA field is added

Customer billing process (downloading process) must handle the new ANI
structure, which contains the full directory number.

NTX470AA
39005646
Feature name
China BTA OMs
Description
This feature creates a new OM group OWMISC with 16 registers, and adds
registers to OM groups LMD and TRK.
This feature is available for the China market on the following office types:
• DMS100i
• DMS200i
• DMS100i/200i combined
BCS history
Introduced feature 39005646 for BCS44.1i.
Not applicable
• This feature does not support interworkings with ISDN primary rate
interface (PRI) and ISDN basic rate interface (BRI).
• Registers OWLABBAFD and OWLDCTF in OM group OWMISC do
not increase for options three-way call (3WC) and six-way call (6WC).
The XPM does not send digit messages to the command module (CM) to
allow the registers to increase.
• For calls over C1 trunks, OM register ANSWER CALL does not
increase for option FNT. The C1 trunks do not send the answer message
to allow registers to increase.
Not applicable
Datafill
Not applicable
Service orders
Not applicable

NTX470AA
39005646
This feature adds registers USGTLCPB and USGOLCPB to OM group
LMD.
This feature adds registers TKMOTAN and TKMTTAN to OM group TRK.
The feature creates OM group OWMISC with the following registers:
• OWLABBFD
• OWLDCTF
• OWLDCTF2
• OWLITE
• OWLLABRG
• OWLLAN
• OWLLAN2
• OWLTABRG
• OWLTAN
• OWLTAN2
• OWOLCPB
• OWTLAN
• OWTLAN2
• OWTLCPB
• OWTTAN
• OWTTAN2
Logs
Not applicable
User interface
Not applicable
Not applicable

NTX471AA
A-law Companding
BC1060 Support for A-law Cards (TTT, TTU, RCVRMF, & DRAM)
BF0375 A-law Network Crosspoints (See H0147)
BF0376 A-law TTU (See H0138 & H0139)
BF0379 A-law TTT (See H0134 & H0135)
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX470AA International–Common Basic

NTX471AA
BC1060
Feature name
Support for A-law Cards (TTT, TTU, RCVRMF, & DRAM)
Description
This feature provides A-law capability on the international transmission test
trunk (TTT), transmission test unit (TTU), multifrequency receiver
(RCVRMF), and the digital recorded announcement machine (DRAM).
BCS history
• For the TTT, an NT1X90BA test signal generator (A-law TTT) card and
an NT2X96BA test signal generator (A-law TTT) card
• For the TTU, an NT2X47BA transmission test unit controller card and
an NT2X56BA digital filter (A-law TTU) card
• For the RCVRMF, an NT2X48BA digital four-channel multifrequency
receiver card
• For the DRAM, an NT1X75DD digital recorded announcement A-law
processor card and an NT1X76DD DRA international announcements
D card

NTX471AA
BF0375
Feature name
A-law Network Crosspoints (see H0147)
Description
This feature provides the firmware required to make DMS-100 network
crosspoints compatible with A-law companding.
BCS history
• an NT3X70BA A-law network crosspoint card
• an NT1V30AA A-law network digital pad

NTX471AA
BF0376
Feature name
A-law TTU (see H0138 & H0139)
Description
on the transmission test unit (TTU).
BCS history
• an NT2X56BA digital filter (A-law TTU)
• an NT1V46AA A-law TTU decompanding PROM
• an NT2X47BA transmission test unit controller
• an NT1V45AA A-law TTU controller PROM

NTX471AA
BF0379
Feature name
A-law TTT (see H0134 and H0135)
Description
on the transmission test trunk (TTT).
BCS history
• an NT1X90BA test signal generator (A-law TTT) card
• an NT1V44AA A-law TTT test signal generator PROM
• an NT2X96BA test signal generator (A-law TTT) card
• an NT1V47AA A-law TTT level meter PROM

NTX472AB
International–Local Basic
AC0085 Convert SPM to a Line Option

AC0130 Guaranteed Dial Tone for DMS-100 International
AC0137 OMs for International Subscriber Features
AC0252 Dial Tone Speed Recording for International
AC0305 Additional International Service Orders
AE0246 Bridged Night Number
AE0459 DGTTST for International Lines
AE0538 IRLCM RTS Enhancement
AG0085 TTT Enhancement for Turkish Tones
AG0718 CC Real Time Reduction for Features
AJ0817 ILGC Capacity Improvement
AJ0818 ILGC/LGC Coexistence I
AJ1541 VDN Interactions with Callup & XLA
AL0054 Hunt Group Enhancement
BC0829 Auto Retest of ALT Failures
BC0963 International Line Testing
BC1449 Local Translations for International
BC1450 Ambiguous Code Translation for International
BC1499 Digit Translations for Turkey Local
BC1500 Turkish Feature Data Requirements
BC1504 Variable-length Directory Numbers
BC1730 Table Operations for ILGC and ILTC
BC1732 International Service Orders
BC1784 Line Thread for Turkey Local II
BC1793 Digit Analysis and RSS Table
—continued—

NTX472AB
BC1796 International Line to Announcement

BC2079 Originating Line Restrictions
BC2324 LTP Robustness
BF0675 Non-metered Coin Line Transactor and CP
BF0801 Denied Origination and Free Number Term (International)
BR0043 Line Cutover State
BR0750 Hunt Group Size Expansion
BV0061 LTP–Monitor, Talk, Balance Offhook Tests
BV0062 LTP–Digitone Testing
BV0063 LTP–Send Functions (Coin and Ringing Functions)
TA0128 Flexible ANI Format
TA0382 MCT Enhancements

End
BCS history
BCS42i—TA0382 added.
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX478AA CCITT PCM (30 + 2) Digital Signaling and Maintenance

NTX472AB NTX472AB
AC0085 AC0085
Feature name
Convert SPM to a Line Option
Description
This feature allows a subscriber premise meter (SPM) to be datafilled as a
line option instead of using metering tables datafill.
BCS history
Line option SPM is not compatible with line options CDA, CDO, CDS,
CWT, and TWC.
Datafill
Table Description
LENLINES SPM is added as a valid option to field OPTLIST.
MNETATTR Fields RECEPTN and ACCESS are removed.
MNACESS This table is deleted.
MSRCDATA Field HWMETER is added. Fields LAMA, CAMA, SMDR,

LCDR, METER, and TRANSMIT are removed.
OFCOPT The parameter name LNETWORK_ACCESS is deleted from

field PARMNAME.
Service orders
Line option SPM is added.

NTX472AB
AC0130
Feature name
Guaranteed Dial Tone for DMS-100 Intl
Description
This feature provides enhancements to the international line group controller
(ILGC) that prevent the discarding of dial tone origination requests under
overload conditions. This feature ensures that subscribers who remain off
hook eventually receive dial tone.
BCS history
Dial tone cannot be guaranteed if one of the following conditions occur:
• Messages between the line card and the ILGC are lost.
• An ILGC warm SWACT is performed prior to an originating line
receiving dial tone.
• The ILGC processor flow control queue is full.
• AC0184 International Overload Control Enhancements
• BF0915 International Peripherals Overload Control
• BF0977 International Lines Overload Control
Logs
Log PM106 is generated when the condition that caused the PM128 log is
removed.
Log PM128 is generated when more than 2% of the last 1000 call
originations are queued more than 3 s.

NTX472AB NTX472AB
AC0137 AC0137
Feature name
OMs for Intl Subscriber Features
Description
This feature supports operational measurements (OM) for international
subscriber features.
BCS history
This feature adds the following OM groups and registers:
• OM group IADL provides information about the international
abbreviated dialing feature under registers AL10PROG, AL10INTG,
AL10USGE, AL10CERR, AL30PROG, AL30INTG, AL30USGE,
AL30CERR, AL60PROG, AL60INTG, AL60USGE, AL60CERR,
ALHNPROG, ALHNINTG, ALHNUSGE, ALHNCERR, and
ADLCERR.
• OM group ICWT provides information about the international call
waiting and cancel call waiting features under registers CWTUSGE,
CWTABNDN, CWTDENY, CWTOVFL, CWTCERR, CCWACT,
CCWUSGE, and CCWCERR.
• OM group ICDIVF provides information about the international call
diversion fixed feature under registers CDOACT, CDODACT,
CDOINTG, CDOUSGE, CDODENY, CDOOVFL, CDOCERR,
CDODERR, CDFACT, CDFDACT, CDFINTG, CDFUSGE,
CDFDENY, CDFOVFL, CDFCERR, and CDFDERR.
• OM group ICDIVP provides information about the international call
diversion programmable feature under registers CDAACT, CDAPROG,
CDADACT, CDAINTG, CDAUSGE, CDADENY, CDAOVFL,
CDACERR, CDADERR, CDSACT, CDSPROG, CDSDACT,
CDSINTG, CDSUSGE, CDSDENY, CDSOVFL, CDSCERR, CDBACT,
CDBPROG, CDBDACT, CDBINTG, CDBUSGE, CDBDENY,
CDBOVFL, CDBCERR, and CDBDERR.
• OM group ICONF provides information about the international
three-way call and six-way call features under registers TWCUSGE,
TWCDENY, TWCOVRFL, TWCCERR, SWCUSGE, SWCDENY,
SWCOVFL, SWCCERR, ADDNUSGE, ADDNDENY, ADDNOVFL,
and ADDNCERR.
• OM group IFDL provides information about the international fixed
destination line features Hot Line and Warm Line under registers
HTLUSGE, HTLOVFL, WLNACT, WLNPROG, WLNDACT,
WLNINTG, WLNUSGE, WLNOVFL, and WLNCERR.

NTX472AB
AC0137
• OM group ILR provides information about the international line
restrictions feature under registers DNIACT, DNIDEACT, DNIUSGE,
DAIACT, DAIDACT, DAIUSGE, DABEACT, DABEDACT,
DABEUSGE, DIDDACT, DIDDDACT, DNIDACT, DNIDDACT,
DNIDUSGE, ILRINTG, and ILRCERR.
• OM group INDC provides information about the international no double
connect feature under registers NDCACT, NDCDACT, NDCINTG,
NDCUSGE, and NDCCERR.
• OM group IDND provides information about the international do not
disturb feature under registers DNDACT, DNDDACT, DNDINTG,
DNDUSGE, DNDDENY, DNDOVFL, DNDCERR, and DNDDERR.

NTX472AB NTX472AB
AC0252 AC0252
Feature name
Dial Tone Speed Recording for Intl
Description
This feature provides dial tone speed recording (DTSR) for DMS-100
switches. DTSR for DMS-100 requires timing in the line concentrating
module (LCM) of actual calls from off-hook detection until dial tone is
returned.
BCS history
Dial tone speed for lines is affected by feature AC0130 (Guaranteed Dial
Tone for DMS-100 Intl).
This feature adds the following OM groups and registers:
• OM group DTSR provides information about the international dial tone
speed recording feature under registers DELAY, DTSDLLYPC,
DTSTESTC, and TOTAL.
• OM group SITE provides information about the international traffic and
dial tone speed recording for remote site feature under registers
INTRASIT, INTERSIT, RORIGOUT, INRTERM, DPTESTC,
DPDELAY, DTTESTC, and DTDELAY for remote line modules, and
registers INTRASIT, INTERSIT, RORIGOUT, INRTERM, LMDP_T,
LMDP_D, LMDT_T, LMDT_D, LCMDP_T, LCMDP_T2, LCMDP_D,
LCMDP_D2, LCMDT_T, LCMDT_T2, LCMDT_D, LCMDT_D2,
LCMKS_T, LCMKS_T2, LCMKS_D, LCMKS_D2, RCTDP_T,
RCTDP_T2, RCTDP_D, RCTDP_D2, RCTDT_T, RCTDT_T2,
RCTDT_D, RCTDT_D2, DLMKS_T, DLMKS_T2, DLMKS_D, and
DLMKS_D2 for remote peripheral modules.
Logs
Log DTSR102 is generated when DTSR counts sent by the international
XMS-based peripheral modules (IXPM) are not received by the central
control (CC) processors.

NTX472AB
AC0305
Feature name
Additional International Service Order
Description
This feature provides new service order commands for DMS-100 switches.
BCS history
Service orders
This feature provides the following commands:
• Command QDNSU is added to list directory numbers that are
unassigned. Additional options can be used to specify a range of
directory numbers, and the treatment callers receive when dialing the
unassigned number.
• Command QDNWRK is added to list working directory numbers.
Additional options can be used to specify a range of directory numbers, a
specific line class, or a specific line option.
• Command QLOAD is modified to list all working lines by line class
code. Additional options can be used to specify a range of line
concentrating modules (LCM) and line drawers.

NTX472AB NTX472AB
AE0246 AE0246
Feature name
Bridged Night Number
Description
This feature provides the Bridged Night Number (BNN) line option on
DMS-100 switches. BNN permits a subscriber to use one or several
different directory numbers for night service.
BCS history
Each line in a hunt group can belong to only one BNN hunt group.
A single BNN hunt group cannot span multiple host hunt groups.
The number of Call Diversion (CDIV) features assigned to directory number
hunt (DNH) groups is 70, to multiline hunt (MLH) groups is 140, and to
distributed line hunt (DLH) is 170.
Line options cannot be added to a BNN hunt group.
Datafill
Table Description
HUNTGRP Option BNN is added as a valid option in field HUNTMEM.
Service orders
The BNN option is added.

NTX472AB
AE0459
Feature name
DGTTST for International Lines
Description
This feature provides a digit test option used to check the frequency and
level of digits produced by the keypad of a touchtone telephone set or the
make-break ratio and pulse rate produced by a dial pulse telephone set.
BCS history
This feature is supported by the following line cards:
• international type A NT6X17 and NT6X93
• international type B NT6X18 and NT6X94
User interface
The DGTTST command on the LTPLTA sublevel menu of the LTP level of
the MAP display is activated for DMS-100 switches.

NTX472AB NTX472AB
AE0538 AE0538
Feature name
IRLCM RTS Enhancement
Description
This feature provides the following enhancements to the international
remote line concentrating module (IRLCM):
• reduces the return-to-service (RTS) time by two-thirds
• provides a more robust method of executing an RTS request
• downloads the emergency stand-alone (ESA) tone cadence as part of the
IRLCM static data
BCS history

NTX472AB
AG0085
Feature name
TTT Enhancement for Turkish Tones
Description
This feature modifies the transmission test trunk (TTT) for use with the
ARTER test line used in Turkey, and all associated error reporting messages.
BCS history
Logs
Log TRK198 is modified to include recommended actions for each failure
condition. Maintenance recommendations have been added to each error
message, and new messages added for failure conditions associated with the
ARTER transmission test line used in Turkey.

NTX472AB NTX472AB
AG0718 AG0718
Feature name
CC Real Time Reduction for Features
Description
This feature transfers line feature data in software to a dedicated area. This
modification reduces the call processing real time requirements associated
with a call.
BCS history

NTX472AB
AJ0817
Feature name
ILGC Capacity Improvement
Description
This feature raises the call processing capacity of the International line
group controller (ILGC) from 5.25 to 6 calls per second. The increase is
achieved by improving the efficiency of the call processing software,
improving the flow of information during call setup by using single
messages.
BCS history

NTX472AB NTX472AB
AJ0818 AJ0818
Feature name
ILGC/LGC Coexistence I
Description
This feature provides the capability for North American and international
lines to coexist on the same XMS-based peripheral module (XPM). This
capability allows an International line group controller (ILGC) to support
international POTS lines, Datapath lines, Northern Telecom proprietary
phone (P-phone) lines, Centrex lines, Integrated Business Network (IBN)
lines, and North American POTS lines.
BCS history
This feature does not support a mix of DS-1 and PCM30 peripheral side
(P-side) links.
Metering, International Overload Controls, International SWACT, and
International ESA features are not supported by this feature.

NTX472AB
AJ1541
Feature name
VDN Interactions with Callp and XLA
Description
This feature modifies the software in the call processing and translation
subsystems for use with variable-length directory numbers (VDN).
Modifications include the preparation of software utilities that can access a
directory number in universal format, and changes that permit the display of
new data locations.
BCS history
Call originations are not allowed for subscribers with directory numbers of
more than 12 digits.

NTX472AB NTX472AB
AL0054 AL0054
Feature name
Hunt Group Enhancements
Description
This feature provides all hunt group types (directory number, distributed
line, multiline, and bridged night number) with operational measurements
for terminating calls.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
HUNTGRP The range of values for field SIZE is changed to 0 to 1024.
HUNTMEM The range of values for field SEQNO is changed to 0 to 1023.
Service orders
When the Directory Number Hunt (DNH) feature is added, an additional
prompt is provided to request the size of the hunt group.
This feature adds OM group HUNT, which provides information about hunt
group performance under registers HUNTATT, HUNTOVFL, and
HUNTRHNT.

NTX472AB
BC0829
Feature name
Auto Retest of ALT Failures
Description
This feature provides for the automatic retesting of lines that fail a scheduled
or non-scheduled automatic line test (ALT).
With a scheduled ALT, testing restarts from the first line of a set of posted
lines when
• all lines pass, or
• failing lines have been retested twice
With a non-scheduled ALT, testing terminates when

• all lines in the posted set of lines pass, or
• failing lines have been retested twice
BCS history

NTX472AB NTX472AB
BC0963 BC0963
Feature name
International Line Testing
Description
This feature provides for the conversion of North American line testing
features to support international lines.
BCS history

NTX472AB
BC1449
Feature name
Local Translations for International
Description
This feature modifies the software translation tables to permit the logical
network name and metering zone of a call to be placed in a translation block.
This modification allows the call tariff to be determined by the metering
system.
BCS history
• BC1450 Ambiguous Code Translation for International
• BV1207 CC - Metering Rate Determination
Datafill
Table Description
AMCODE, LNET and MZONE are added as valid options with the RTE or
AMHEAD, CONT selector.
CTCODE,
CTHEAD,
PXCODE,
FACODE,
FAHEAD,
OFCCODE,
OFCHEAD,
and PXHEAD

NTX472AB
BC1450
Feature name
Ambiguous Code Translation for International
Description
Since international calls can have a different number of digits based on the
country and area called, but contain the same prefix digits. This feature
provides ambiguous code tables to route a call based on the number of digits
dialed.
The translation verification (TRAVER) feature has also been modified to
include these new tables.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
AMHEAD and These new tables are used to translate calls based on the
AMCODE number of digits dialed.

NTX472AB
BC1499
Feature name
Digit Translations for Turkey Local
Description
This feature provides the interface between line call processing and
international translations in the Turkish local DMS-100 software load.
BCS history
• BC1504 Variable-length Directory Numbers
Datafill
Table Description
SNPANAME This table is added to allow the defintion of up to 16

variable-length serving areas.

NTX472AB
BC1500
Feature name
Turkish Feature Data Requirements
Description
This feature adds line options and features for Turkey.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
LINEATTR Field LCC is modified to accept values STD and COIN.
Service orders
The following line options are made available for Turkey: COIN, DGT,
DIN, DOR, FNT, MLH, SPM, and STD.

NTX472AB
BC1504
Feature name
Variable-length Directory Numbers
Description
This feature supports assigning variable-length directory numbers (from two
to seven digits).
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
DNCODE This read-only table is added to assist in translating directory

numbers.
DNHEAD This table is added to define instances of code and route tables
and their characteristics.
DNRTE This table is added to specify translation routes.
LINEATTR Field IXNAME is added to specify the entry point to translations

in international software loads.
OFCENG Parameter VAR_DN is added to specify if directory numbers

are seven digits (Y) or are in the range of two to seven digits
(N).
WRDNCODE This table is added to specify the directory numbers that

terminate to a treatment, feature, or route.

NTX472AB
BC1730
Feature name
Table Operations for ILGC and ILTC
Description
This feature allows international line group controllers (ILGC) and
international line trunk controllers (ILTC) to be datafilled.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
LTCINV ILGC and ILTC are added as valid options to field PM_TYPE.
LTCPSINV ILGC and ILTC are added as valid options to field PM_TYPE.

NTX472AB
BC1732
Feature name
International Service Orders
Description
This feature modifies the service order software to permit variable-length
directory numbers.
BCS history
Service orders
When a line is removed from service, intercept is automatically set as blank
directory number (BLDN) and no other intercept treatment can be specified.
Commands QDNWRK and QDNSU are not valid for DMS-100 switches
outside North America.

NTX472AB
BC1784
Feature name
Line Thread for Turkey Local II
Description
This feature provides the central control (CC) part of the international call
processing software for Turkey.
BCS history
The following OM groups and their associated registers are supported by
this feature:
• ANN Recorded Announcements
• CF6P Six-port Conference Bridge Measurements
• LMD Line Module Traffic
• OFZ Office Traffic Summary
• OFZ2 Office Traffic Extension Summary
• TFCANA Traffic Separation/Traffic Analysis Table
• TONES Tones Group Tables
• TRK Trunk Group Table
• UTR Universal Tone Receiver
Logs
The following logs are supported by this feature:
• CP100
• CP101
• CP102
• CP103
• LINE102
• LINE103
• LINE104
• LINE105
• LINE106
• LINE204

NTX472AB
BC1793
Feature name
Digit Analysis and RSS Table
Description
This feature provides the table control software for digit analysis on
international lines using a register signaling system (RSS) selector table.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
LINEATTR Field RSSINDX has been added.
RGSIGSYS Fields INITDGTM, INTNATDG, INTRADGTM, MAXDIGTS,

MINDIGTS, NDGTTMO, NUMDIGTS, SERVICE, and
SPECDGT have been added.

NTX472AB
BC1796
Feature name
International Line to Announcement
Description
This feature allows an international line to terminate to a digital recorded
announcement machine (DRAM).
BCS history
OM ORIGANN in group OFZ is supported by this feature.

NTX472AB
BC2079
Feature name
Originating Line Restrictions
Description
This feature provides the capability of restricting outgoing calls for
individual subscribers based on the class of restriction assigned.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
LENFEAT Field ILRCLASS has been added.
FAHEAD, Fields PI and CLASS that are datafilled for options CONT and
OFCHEAD, RTE now accept the value IOPRA.
and PACHEAD
Service orders
This feature adds line class code ILR (International Line Restrictions).

NTX472AB
BC2324
Feature name
LTP Robustness
Description
This feature reorganizes the line test postion (LTP) and line maintenance
software data structures to allow the introduction of ISDN and integrated
voice and data (IVD) on the DMS-100 switch.
BCS history

NTX472AB
BF0675
Feature name
Non-metered Coin Line Transactor and CP
Description
This feature provides the call processing (CP) software required to provide
non-metered coin lines for Turkey.
BCS history
Non-metered coin lines collect coins after receiving a line reversal on
answer, and are for local calls only. Attempts to access national or
international lines generate a coin return and are routed to an operator.
• BF0677 Transactor and Call Processing for Metered Coin Lines

NTX472AB
BF0801
Feature name
Denied Orig and Free Number Termination (Intl)
Description
This feature supports line features Denied Origination (DOR) and Free
Number Termination (FNT) on DMS-100 switches.
BCS history
Service orders
Line class codes DOR and FNT are supported for DMS-100 switches
outside North America.

NTX472AB
BR0043
Feature name
Line Cutover State
Description
This feature allows the line cutoff (LCO) relay of any posted line to be
controlled by commands from the MAP (maintenance and administration
position).
BCS history
User interface
This feature adds the LCO option to the line test postion (LTP) menu of the
MAP display.

NTX472AB
BR0750
Feature name
Hunt Group Size Expansion
Description
This feature allows the size of distributed line hunt (DLH), multiline hunt
(MLH), and directory number hunt (DNH) groups to be increased to 1024
members each.
BCS history
Hunt groups that have more than 640 lines, and are monitored for subscriber
line usage will overflow.
Datafill
Table Description
HUNTGRP The range of values for field SIZE is changed to 0 to 1024.

NTX472AB
BV0061
Feature name
LTP – Monitor, Talk, Balance Offhook Tests
Description
This feature provides modifications to the line test position line test access
(LTPLTA) level of the MAP (maintenance and administration position). The
changes allow a subscriber’s line to be monitored, allow conversation with a
subscriber, and allow onhook or offhook balance tests to be performed when
required.
BCS history
User interface
Talk, Monitor, and BalNet options are added to the LTPLTA level of the
MAP display.

NTX472AB
BV0062
Feature name
LTP – Digitone Testing
Description
(LTPLTA) level of the MAP (maintenance and administration position)
display that allow a subscriber’s digitone set to be tested.
BCS history
User interface
The DgtTst option is added to the LTPLTA level of the MAP display.

NTX472AB
BV0063
Feature name
LTP – Send Functions (Coin and Ringing Functions)
Description
(LTPLTA) level of the MAP (maintenance and administration position)
display that allow the ringing of a subscriber’s set, and the sending of coin
collect and coin return signals to a coin set.
BCS history
User interface
The DgtTst option is added to the LTPLTA level of the MAP display.

NTX472AB
TA0128
Feature name
Flexible ANI Format
Description
This feature allows the serving number plan area (SNPA) digits, as well as
datafillable prefix digits, to be included in the automatic number
identification (ANI) record.
BCS history
International centralized automatic message accounting (ICAMA) log and
ICAMA record restrict the number of ANI digits to 10. If the number of
ANI digits is more than 10, then only the last 10 digits are processed as ANI
digits in the ICAMA record and log.
The number of ANI digits sent to R2 trunks is restricted to 13. If the
number of ANI digits is more than 13, then only the last 13 digits are sent to
R2 trunks as ANI digits.
On tandem calls, the number of ANI digits is unchanged.
Datafill
This feature adds the following office parameters to table OFCVAR:
• EXTENDED_ANI_SNPA
— This parameter indicates if SNPA digits are to be added before the
ANI record.
• EXTENDED_ANI_PREFIX
— This parameter indicates if SNPA digits are to be added before the
ANI record, and stores up to five prefix digits.
This feature increases the number of digits that can be sent to the billing
process.

NTX472AB
TA0382
Feature name
MCT Enhancements
Description
This activity enhances the Malicious Call Trace (MCT) feature to permit
activation after the calling party has gone onhook.
Both MCT and MCT2 versions of the feature are supported:
• MCT subscribers use flash or flash+7, within 30 s of the calling party
going onhook, to activate the feature.
• MCT2 subscribers use flash within 30 s of the originator onhook. This
resets the lockout timer, and permits an additional 30 s for the subscriber
to enter the appropriate service code to activate the feature.
For feature activation, office parameter MCT_AFTER_ORIG_ONHOOK is
introduced in table OFCVAR.
BCS history
Not applicable
• If the CWT, 3WC, 6WC, or ICT feature is active on the subscriber’s line,
this enhancement is not supported.
• If the CWT, 3WC, 6WC, or ICT feature is active on the calling party’s
line, and the call is local, this enhancement is not supported.
• If TBI is applied to either the calling or called party’s line before MCT is
activated, this enhancement is not supported.
• If the incoming trunk to the terminating office is C1 dial pulse, this
enhancement is not supported.
• MCT2 subscribers can activate, deactivate, interrogate, and program
CDS, CDF, CDB, CDBF, CDNA, CDNAF, CDA, and CDO options
during the lockout time.
• When office parameter MCT_AFTER_ORIG_ONHOOK is set to Y, and
the call is terminated on a line with the MCT or MCT2 option, the
lockout timer is increased from 10 s to 30 s.
• This enhancement applies to the China market only. Other markets
should set parameter MCT_AFTER_ORIG_ONHOOK to N.

NTX472AB
TA0382
Not applicable
Datafill
Table Description
OFCVAR Office parameter MCT_AFTER_ORIG_ONHOOK is added.

The range of values is Y or N. The default is N.
Service orders
Not applicable
Not applicaable
Logs
Not applicable
User interface
Not applicable
Not applicable

NTX474AA
International Base Metering
AC0053 Utilities for Intl CC Feature Metering

AC0054 CC Metering for Features
AE0056 Meter Count Printout
AE0292 Metering Line Capacity Enhancements
AG1466 Remove TPS from TOD
AG1476 Aperiodic Metering (PM)
AG1477 Aperiodic Metering
AG1478 Software Meters for Trunks (XPM)
AG1479 Software Meters for Trunks (CC)
AJ0570 Hardware Pulse Generation for Trunks
AJ0571 Software Meters for Trunk CC II
AJ0573 Hardware Metering for Trunks Table Control
AJ0866 OMs for Metering
AJ2931 Metering Robustness
AL0218 XPM Support for CC Metering
BC1058 CC–Metering Charge Recording
BC1758 CC–Metering Tariff Application
BC1760 CC–Metering Changeover Control
BC1905 Maintain Data in Tariff Table and Tariff Number Table in XPM
BF0677 Transactor and Call Processing for Metered Coin Lines
BF0711 XPM–Maintenance for Metering Data Tables
BF0780 XPM–Changeover Control for Metering
BV1207 CC–Metering Rate Determination
BV1208 CC–Metering System Maintenance and Monitor
BV1277 CC–Internal Changeover for Metering
39005675 Pri super group billing

NTX474AA
BCS history
BCS44.1i –– Feature 39005675 added.
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX472AB International–Local Basic (upgrades NTX472AA)

NTX474AA NTX474AA
AC0053 AC0053
Feature name
Utilities for Intl CC Feature Metering
Description
This feature provides for calculation of charges for subscriber features and
checks for all calls longer than 2 h. Subscriber meters associated with long
calls are updated with the accrued charge, and are then monitored for
metering by the DMS-100 common control (CC). Checking for long calls is
performed every 24 h.
BCS history
When there are no table history queue (THQ) blocks available, changes to
tables MTARFNUM and MTARIFF are not allowed.
Datafill
Table Description
INTCCMTR This table is added to initially datafill a software load.
Logs
• MTR107 is generated to indicate that a THQ audit, a charge updating
process, or THQCLEAN process has been inititated.
• MTR109 is generated to indicate that a THQ audit, a charge updating
process, or THQCLEAN process has been completed.
• MTR127 is generated when there are abnormalities on a THQ.
• MTR128 is generated when less than 10% of the THQ blocks are free.
• MTR129 is generated when there are no THQ resources.
User interface
The THQAUD command is added to maintain the integrity of the THQs and
make THQ resources available.
The THQCLEAN command is added to make THQ resources available.
The NTHQBLKS minor alarm is added to the EXT level of the MAP
display to indicate that less than 10% of the THQ blocks are available.

NTX474AA
AC0054
Feature name
CC Metering for Features
Description
This feature provides the capability of metering conference calls (three party
and six party) using a common control (CC) metering process, periodically
check for calls longer than 2 h, and provide metering information when call
data is lost in an international XMS-based peripheral module (IXPM).
BCS history
The following call types cannot be pegged on a subscriber premise meter
(SPM): three-way calling (3WC), six-way calling (6WC), call diversion to
announcement (CDA), call diversion to operator (CDO), call diversion to
subscriber (CDS), and call waiting (CWT).
Datafill
Table Description
OFCENG Office parameter MAX_PM_CHARGE_COUNT is deleted.
Office parameter NUM_CCMTR_EXT_BLOCKS is added to

specify the number of CC metering extension blocks required
for CC metering.
Office parameter CCMTR_FAILURE_FREE_CALL is added to

specify if new calls are to be processed when no CC metering
resources are available.
Registers EXTSEIZ, EXTOVFL, and EXTUSAGE in group EXT are
modified to include monitoring of extension block
INTL_CCMTR_EXT_BLOCK which holds CC metering data.
Logs
Log MTR125 is generated when there are no metering extension blocks
available.
When metering tariffs are changed, existing calls will reflect the new
metering data.

NTX474AA NTX474AA
AE0056 AE0056
Feature name
Meter Count Printout
Description
This feature enables the software meter counts for a subscriber to be printed.
BCS history
User interface
The command PRINT is added to the line test position metering (LTPMTR)
level of the MAP (maintenance and administration position) to print all the
meter counts for a directory number.

NTX474AA
AE0292
Feature name
Metering Line Capacity Enhancements
Description
This feature increases the number of lines available for software metering in
a DMS-100 switch to 64 534.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
OFCENG Office parameter SIZE_OF_METER_TABLE is deleted. Office

parameter MAX_LINES is added to specify the maximum
number of lines on the switch.
OFCVAR Office parameter ALLOCATE_METERS_ON_NIL_CHANGE is

deleted.
Logs
Logs MTR121 and MTR124 are deleted.
Log MTR116 is revised to reference meter blocks instead of meters.
Logs MTR118 and MTR123 are revised to specify the associated meter
block instead of the meter name and count.
User interface
The command QMETER at the MTRSYS level of the MAP display is
cancelled and replaced by the command QMTRBLK which displays the
number of used and unused meter blocks containing recycled meters.
The command interpreter (CI) command DELFM is added to delete feature
meters assigned to a line or all lines in an office. The contents of each meter
are written to the meter’s out-of-service file.
This feature allows operating companies to charge for the International Do
Not Disturb (IDND) feature.

NTX474AA NTX474AA
AG1466 AG1466
Feature name
Remove TPS from TOD
Description
This feature removes the international time of day (TOD) changeover option
from the transaction processing system to a standard software utility that
provides messaging between the common control (CC) and the international
XMS-based peripheral module (IXPM).
BCS history
Changes to tables MTARIFF and MTARFNUM are rejected when a
scheduled metering rate changeover is occurring.

NTX474AA
AG1476
Feature name
Aperiodic Metering (XPM)
Description
This feature provides the software changes in the international XMS-based
peripheral modules (IXPM) for aperiodic metering. Aperiodic metering or
multipulse prepaid billing is a billing strategy that increments subscribers’
meters at the beginning of specified time periods instead of distributing the
charges at uniform intervals for the duration of a call.
BCS history
When subscriber premise meters (SPM) are supported on a line with
aperiodic metering, line pulsing is terminated by an on-hook condition.
When this condition occurs, the final phase of a call may be undercharged.

NTX474AA NTX474AA
AG1477 AG1477
Feature name
Aperiodic Metering
Description
This feature provides the software changes in the common control (CC) for
aperiodic metering. Aperiodic metering or multipulse prepaid billing is a
billing strategy that increments subscribers’ meters at the beginning of
specified time periods instead of distributing the charges at uniform intervals
for the duration of a call.
BCS history
When subscriber premise meters (SPM) are supported on a line with
aperiodic metering, line pulsing is terminated by an on-hook condition.
When this condition occurs, the final phase of a call may be undercharged.
Datafill
Table Description
MNETATTR Field PULSING is added to specify the pulsing associated with

each LNETNAME.
User interface
The command interpreter (CI) command CALLTARF is revised to display if
periodic or aperiodic metering is used.
The command TARIFF at the meter system (MTRSYS) level of the MAP
(maintenance and administration position) is revised to display whether a
tariff is calculated using periodic or aperiodic pulsing.

NTX474AA
AG1478
Feature name
Software Meters for Trunks (XPM)
Description
This feature provides the software changes in the international XMS-based
modules (IXPM) to provide software metering for trunks.
BCS history
A warm switch of activity (SWACT) on an international digital trunk
controller (IDTC) may cause the loss of one meter pulse on calls that survive
the SWACT.

NTX474AA NTX474AA
AG1479 AG1479
Feature name
Software Meters for Trunks (CC)
Description
This feature provides the common control (CC) software required to provide
software metering for trunks.
BCS history
A maximum of four software meters are assigned to each trunk group.
Trunk metering is supported for one-way incoming trunks only.
CC metering is not supported for trunks.
Datafill
Table Description
LNMTRNAM This table is added to specify line meter names.
METERNAM This table is deleted.
OFCENG Office parameter MAX_TRUNK_METER_BLOCKS is added to

specify the maximum number of trunk meter blocks for the
office.
Office parameters LINE_METER_BACKUP_FREQUENCY and

TRUNK_METER_BACKUP_FREQUENCY are added to specify
the frequency of the line and trunk meter backup processes.
Office parameter STORE_RATE is removed.
TKMTRNAM This table is added to specify trunk meter names.
Logs
Log MTR114 is modified to have its count field increased from 8 to 12
digits.
Log MTR132 is added to record meter counts associated with deallocated or
deassigned trunk meters.

NTX474AA
AG1479
User interface
Sublevel TTPSUB has been added to the TTP level of the MAP
(maintenance and administration position).
The output format of command METERS at the LTPMTR level of the MAP
display has been modified.
The parameter list of command METERS at the MTRSYS AUDIT level of
the MAP display has been changed.
The output format of command QMTRBLK at the MTRSYS level of the
MAP display has been modified.
The parameter lists of commands MSTORE, RESTORE, and BILLING at
the MTRSYS level of the MAP display have been changed.

NTX474AA NTX474AA
AJ0570 AJ0570
Feature name
Hardware Pulse Generation for Trunks
Description
This feature provides the software in the international XMS-based peripheral
module (IXPM) to generate hardware meter pulses over digital trunks.
BCS history
A warm switch of activity (SWACT) on an international digital trunk
controller (IDTC) may cause the loss of one meter pulse on calls that survive
the SWACT.

NTX474AA
AJ0571
Feature name
Software Meters for Trunk CC II
Description
This feature adds common control (CC) metering, long call updating, and
BCS software application process capabilities to the software trunk metering
feature. The BCS software application process (SWAP) is enhanced to
preserve software trunk meters during the application of a new BCS load.
BCS history
Metering stops when Malicious Call Trace (MCT) is activated on a call.
Charges are calculated up to the time MCT was activated.
When a call is accessed by the Toll Break-in (TBI) feature, CC metering is
activated.
Operational measurements (OM) EXTSEIZ, EXTOVFL, and EXTUSAGE
in group EXT are modified to include extension block usage for both line
and trunk software meters.
Logs
Log MTR125 is modified to specify the common language location
identifier (CLLI) for a trunk or the line equipment number (LEN) for a line
that is affected when there is a lack of CC metering resources.
Log MTR134 is added to generate a report when a software trunk meter
cannot be updated by the BCS application transfer process.
User interface
Commands RESETMETERS and UPDMETERCOUNTS in the directory
INTLSWCT are modified to cause reallocation and transfer of both line and
trunk software meters.

NTX474AA NTX474AA
AJ0573 AJ0573
Feature name
Hardware Metering for Trunks Table Control
Description
This feature provides the table control features that generate meter pulses on
digital trunks.
BCS history
This feature only applies to incoming trunks.
Generating a clear back signal or receiving a clear forward signal takes
precedence over the generation of meter pulses and may cause them to be
truncated.
Some trunk signals, such as operator ringback, may not be able to be
distinguished from a meter pulse when they are both transmitted on the same
bit.
Datafill
Table Description
MTSIGSYS This table is added to specify metering actions associated with

call control and line or trunk status.
Logs
Log MTR135 is added to indicate that a peripheral module (PM) software
error occurred while attempting to perform metering on a line or trunk.
Log MTR136 is added to indicate that an invalid logical network was
encountered while attempting to perform metering on a line or trunk.
Log MTR137 is added to indicate that an invalid tariff number tuple was
Log MTR138 is added to indicate that an invalid tariff index was
Log MTR139 is added to indicate that an invalid tariff number was
Log MTR140 is added to indicate that an invalid meter signaling system
index was encountered while attempting to perform metering on a trunk.

NTX474AA
AJ0573
Log MTR141 is added to indicate that a metering rate mismatch was
encountered while attempting to perform metering on a trunk.
Log MTR142 is added to indicate that a metering function mismatch was
encountered while attempting to perform metering on a trunk.

NTX474AA NTX474AA
AJ0866 AJ0866
Feature name
OMs for Metering
Description
This feature provides operational measurements (OM) for the metering
system.
BCS history
OM group MTRERR and associated registers LATECHG, BADMDI, and
METOVFL have been deleted.
Meter group MTRUSG and associated registers CCATCUPS,
CCMATADD, CCMATCDV, CCMATCUP, CCMATCPM, CCMATERR,
CCMATINI, CCMATTBI, CCMATXPM, LNCCM1, LNCCM2,
LNXPMM1, LNXPMM2, TKCCM1, TKCCM2, TKXPMM1, and
TKXPMM2 and has been added to provide information on metering system
usage.
Meter group MTRPERF and associated registers COUNTERR, DTCALLP,
DTFEAT, DTXPM, DURERR, MTRAUDER, MTRBKERR, RECYCCLR,
RECYCFND, THQERR, THQOVFL, TINEST0, and TODXPMFL has been
added to provide information on metering system performance.
User interface
Commands ERRSCAN and ERRSTOP at the MTRSYS level of the MAP
(maintenance and administration position) display have been deleted.

NTX474AA
AJ2931
Feature name
Metering Robustness
Description
This feature provides metering table control enhancements and a metering
table datafill verification tool.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
MNETATTR Field TODNAME is added to be used as a key to table

TODHEAD.
MTARFIDX Fields SRCKEY and DESTKEY are modified to accept a vector

of up to eight characters.
MTARFNUM Fields TABLEKEY and TRFIDX are modified to accept a vector

of up to eight characters.
MTARIFF Field TARIFNUM is modified to accept a vector of eight

characters.
OFCENG Parameter ENHANCED_METERING_HARDWARE is deleted.
User interface
Command METVER is added to directory PROGDIR to verify the
consistency of datafill in metering tables.

NTX474AA NTX474AA
AL0218 AL0218
Feature name
XPM Support for CC Metering
Description
This feature provides support in the international XMS-based peripheral
modules (IXPM) for common control (CC) metering for features and the
Subscriber Premise Meter (SPM) line option.
BCS history
• AC0054 CC Metering for Features
• AC0085 Convert SPM to a Line Option

NTX474AA
BC1058
Feature name
CC - Metering Charge Recording
Description
This feature provides the common control (CC) software necessary for
subscriber software meter call recording.
BCS history
The contents of software meters cannot be modified.
Subscribers premise meters (SPM) and software meters may not have the
same count, as the switch may still be receiving far-end meter pulses after a
subscriber has gone on-hook.
SPMs and software meters are not incremented after a subscriber goes on
hook.
• BC1059 (New) CC – Internal Metering Tariff Application
• BV1207 CC – Metering Rate Determination
• BV1208 CC – Metering System Maintenance and Monitor
Datafill
Table Description
OFCENG Parameters STORE_RATE, METER_AUDIT,

MAX_SHORT_METER_COUNT,
MAX_LONG_METER_COUNT, and SIZE_OF_METER_TABLE
are added.
Logs
Log MTR100 is added to generate a report when a subscriber meter or a
trunk meter passes the maximum meter count.
Log MTR101 is added to generate a report when a metering data index has
been changed.
Log MTR102 is added to generate a report when a line or trunk meter is
made redundant.

NTX474AA
BC1058
Log MTR103 is added to generate a report when a meter is deleted from the
system.
Log MTR106 is added to generate a report when a backup volume is
required.
Log MTR110 is added to generate a report when a negative meter count has
been created.
User interface
A major alarm is generated under the EXT header of the MAP (maintenance
and administration postion) display when a billing backup tape is not
mounted.
A minor alarm is shown under the EXT header of the MAP display when an
out-of-service (OOS) meter billing tape is not mounted.
A minor alarm is generated under the EXT header of the MAP display when
the software meter table is 95% full.

NTX474AA
BC1758
Feature name
CC - Metering Tariff Application
Description
This feature provides interfaces to the international XMS-based peripheral
module (IXPM) that permits the transfer of metering information.
BCS history
Subscribers premise meters are not compatible with the following features:
Three-way Calling (3WC), Conference Calling (CNF), Call Waiting (CWT),
Hold (HLD), Call Transfer (CXR), Call Forwarding (CFW), Registered
Meter Pulsing (RMP), and Data Service (DS).
• BC1058 CC - Metering Charge Recording
• BC1759 CC - Maintenance and Monitor (Part II)
• BC1764 SOS Transaction Processing System
• BF0800 XPM - Metering Tariff Determination
• BV1208 CC - Metering System Maintenance and Monitor
• BV1277 CC - Internal Changeover for Metering
Datafill
Table Description
OFCENG Parameter MAX_PM_CHARGE_COUNT is added to specify the

maximum number of charge units in a IXPM meter buffer.

NTX474AA NTX474AA
BC1760 BC1760
Feature name
CC - Metering Changeover Control
Description
This feature verifies peripheral module tariff table data.
BCS history
Changes to metering tables are prohibited for 10 min prior to a metering rate
changeover.
Consecutive changeovers to a network cannot occur more than once every
15 min.
• BC1905 Maintain Data in Tariff Table and Tariff Number Table in
XPM
• BV1136 Time-of-Day Routing
Logs
Log MTR114 is added to generate a report when the changeover system
sends a negative acknowledgement.

NTX474AA
BC1905
Feature name
Maintain Data in Tariff Table and Tariff Number Table in XPM
Description
This feature provides the capability for updating tariff table and tariff
number table data in international XMS-based peripheral modules (IXPM).
BCS history
Changes to metering tables are prohibited for 10 min prior to a metering rate
changeover.
Consecutive changeovers to a network cannot occur more than once every
15 min.
• BF0711 XPM - Maintenance for Metering Data Tables
Datafill
Table Description
MTARFNUM A new error message is added when an attempt is made to

change table data during a scheduled metering tariff rate
change.
MTARIFF A new error message is added when an attempt is made to

change table data during a scheduled metering tariff rate
change.

NTX474AA NTX474AA
BF0677 BF0677
Feature name
Transactor and Call Processing for Metered Coin Lines
Description
This feature provides call processing software for the following coin lines:
• metered coin lines that handle local, national, and international calls and
accept metering pulses to collect coins
• non-metered coin lines that handle only local calls, and collect coins
using a battery reversal signal generated when the called party answers
BCS history

NTX474AA
BF0711
Feature name
XPM - Maintenance for Metering Data Tables
Description
This feature verifies and corrects errors detected in the international
XMS-based peripheral modules (IXPM) using audits.
BCS history
• BC1905 Maintain Data in Tariff Table and Tariff Number Table in
XPM

NTX474AA NTX474AA
BF0780 BF0780
Feature name
XPM - Changeover Control for Metering
Description
This feature provides for control of new tariff changeovers in international
XMS-based peripheral modules (IXPM).
BCS history
• BC1760 CC - Metering Changeover Control
• BF0711 XPM - Maintenance for Metering Data Tables
• BF0800 XPM - Metering Tariff Determination

NTX474AA
BV1207
Feature name
CC - Metering Rate Determination
Description
This feature provides the ability to determine the metering rate based on call
type, destination, and source attributes.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
LNETWORK This table specifies the logical metering network names.
MDESTIDX This table is added to specify each metering destination index.
METERNAM This table is added to specify the meter names available for the
metering system.
MNACCESS This table is added to specify the metering network access tariff
indexes.
MNETATTR This table is added to define the attributes for each metering
network.
MSRCDATA This table is added to specify metering source data.
MTARFIDX This table is added to specify each metering tariff index.
MTARFNUM This table is added to specify the metering tariff numbers.
MTARIFF This table is added to specify the metering tariffs.
OFCOPT Parameter LNETWORK_ACCESS is added to specify if a

charge is required for network access.
Logs
Log MTR113 is added to generate a report when information is received
from translations indicating that the logical network selected for a call is
invalid.

NTX474AA NTX474AA
BV1208 BV1208
Feature name
CC - Metering System Maintenance and Monitor
Description
This feature provides audit and monitoring capabilities for the metering
system from the MAP (maintenance and administration postion) display.
BCS history
This feature adds operational measurements (OM) group MTRERR and
associated registers LATECHG, BADMDI, and METOVFL to monitor the
metering system’s performance.
Logs
• Log MTR104 identifies any missing meters associated with an agent.
• Log MTR105 identifies any superfluous meters that are associated with
an agent.
• Log MTR106 indicates that a metering data index is not being used.
• Log MTR107 is generated when a meter scheduler process is invoked
from the MAP display.
• Log MTR108 is generated when a metering process is not running
properly.
• Log MTR109 is generated when a metering process is complete.
• Log MTR111 is generated to specify the meters used in a linked list.
User interface
New sublevel INTLTRK is added to the TTP level of the MAP display with
commands COUNTS and METERS, to display the contents of trunk group
meters.
New sublevel LTPMTR is added to the LTP level of the MAP display with
commands COUNTS and METERS, to display the contents of line meters.
New sublevel MTRSYS is added to the MTC level of the MAP display with
commands QMETER, TARIFF, ERRSCAN, ERRSTOP, MSTORE,
RESTORE, BILLING, AUDIT, and RESOURCE to monitor the metering
system.
Sublevel AUDIT with commands METERS and AGENTS is accessed from
the MTRSYS level of the MAP display to monitor unused meters and agent
data.

NTX474AA
BV1208
Sublevel RESOURCE with command TNT is accessed from the MTRSYS
level of the MAP display to obtain information on the current tariff number
table for a specified network or for all networks.

NTX474AA
BV1277
Feature name
CC - Internal Changeover for Metering
Description
This feature provides the capability of changing metering tariffs based on
the time of day and the type of day.
BCS history
Tariff changeovers cannot occur more than once every 30 min.
A maximum of eight tariff changeovers are allowed in a 24-h period.
• BC1058 CC - Metering Charge Recording
• BC1059 (New) CC - Internal Metering Tariff Application
• BV1136 Time-of-Day Routing
Datafill
Table Description
TIMEODAY This table is added to specify the time of day result for each
time of day system and day type.
TODHEAD This table is added to specify how tables DAYOWEEK,

DAYOYEAR, and TIMEODAY are used for call metering.

NTX474AA
39005675
Feature name
PRI trunk group billing with DN
Description
This feature allows operating company personnel to receive the billing
information of a primary rate interface (PRI) trunk. The system writes all
the billing information for a PRI port as a single directory number (DN).
Operating company personnel can identify this DN as a pilot number.
BCS history
Introduced feature 39005675 in BCS44.1i.
Not applicable
• The system uses common language location identifier (CLLI) DN for
PRI trunk metering.
• If field BILLDN in table TRKGRP does not have DN as datafill, the
system does not change the field with another DN. Operating company
personnel must delete the related trunk group from table TRKGRP
before making the change.
Not applicable
Datafill
This feature uses field BILLDN in table TRKGRP to provide billing
information.
This feature creates new office parameter
USE_BILLDN_FOR_TK_BILLING.
Service orders
Not applicable
Not applicable
Logs
Not applicable

NTX474AA
39005675
User interface
This feature adds command SGMTR at the CLLI level. Operating company
personnel use this command to observe the assigned meter counts of a
selected pilot DN.
This feature allows operating company personnel to enter a DN or common
language location identifier (CLLI) in field CLLI of the trunk billing record.
When a CLLI is in field CLLI, the system displays the related ADNUM and
ID fields. When a DN is in field CLLI, the system displays ‘0000’ for both
fields.

NTX475AA
Turkish Trunk Transmission Testing
BC1192 Terminating ARTER Trunk Testing

BC1193 Originating ARTER Trunk Testing
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX470AA International-Common Basic

NTX475AA
BC1192
Feature name
Terminating ARTER Trunk Testing
Description
BC1192 provides automatic transmission (ARTER) testing of outgoing
trunks in the Turkish network. This feature allows both local and toll
exchanges to test trunks to either a DMS-100 or a DMS-200 office.
BCS history
This feature is supported for trunks in the Turkish network only.
Datafill
Table Description
OFCVAR TERM_ARTER_FREQUENCY indicates the frequency at which

the terminating test equipment is to generate the test tone.
TERM_ARTER_LEVEL indicates the level at which the

terminating test equipment is to generate the test tone.
Existing register INOUT in group OFZ increments whenever the incoming
trunk call terminates on an outgoing trunk.
Logs
Log TRK195 is generated when the test is forced to terminate before it is
completed. The log report gives the reason for the failure to complete.

NTX475AA
BC1193
Feature name
Originating ARTER Trunk Testing
Description
BC1193 provides automatic transmission (ARTER) testing of outgoing
trunks in the Turkish network. This feature allows tests to be originated on
two- and four-wire test units in a DMS-100 or DMS-200 office.
BCS history
This feature is supported for trunks in the Turkish network only.
Datafill
Table Description
ATTSCHED TART is added to the range of values in field ATTKEY to allow

selection of the ARTER test.
OFCVAR ORIG_ARTER_FREQUENCY indicates the frequency at which

the originating test equipment is to generate the test tone.
ORIG_ARTER_LEVEL indicates the level at which the

originating test equipment is to generate the test tone.
Logs
This feature adds the following logs: TRK196, TRK197, TRK198, TRK199,
TRK206, and ATT115.
TRK196 is generated when a two-wire originating ARTER test completes
successfully and all measurements are within acceptable limits.
TRK197 is generated when a four-wire originating ARTER test completes
successfully and all measurements are within set limits.
TRK198 is generated if an originating ARTER test fails for reasons other
than unacceptable measurements.
TRK199 is generated if an originating ARTER test fails during the two-wire
test sequence.
TRK206 is generated when a failure occurs during the measurement portion
of the two- or four-wire test in the four-wire originating ARTER test
sequence.

NTX475AA
BC1193
ATT115 is generated by the automatic trunk testing facility (ATT) to indicate
the result of a scheduled or manual test.
User interface
This feature adds the parameter TART to the TST command at the TTP level
of the MAP (maintenance and administration position) display. TART
indicates that an ARTER test is to be performed.

NTX476AA
Wink-1 Line Signaling
BC1188 CC Wink-1 Line Signaling System

BF0565 XPM Wink-1 Line Signaling System
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX478AA CCITT PCM (30+2) Digital Signaling and Maintenance

NTX476AA
BC1188
Feature name
CC Wink-1 Line Signaling System
Description
BC1188 implements the table control required to allow administration
personnel to input variable parameters for the wink-start signaling system
(WINKSIG).
BCS history
Default values for the parameters selected in table LNSIGSYS are defined in
table DEFDATA. Administration personnel can change the defaults by
modifying the appropriate tuples.
The parameters in table LNSIGSYS replace existing office parameters
relating to signaling characteristics for call processing trunks for Turkey.
• BF0395 Line Signal Processors
Datafill
Table Description
LNSIGSYS Table modified is to allow send or receive timing and feature

options to be selected.

NTX476AA
BF0565
Feature name
XPM Wink-1 Line Signaling System
Description
BF0565 implements the state machine in the international digital trunk
controller (IDTC) for the wink signaling system (WINKSIG). The wink-1
signaling system supports single A-bit signaling on PCM30 trunks on an
IDTC.
BCS history
• BF0395 Link Signal Processors

NTX477AA
Delay Dial-1 Signaling
BC1187 CC Delay Dial-1 Line Signaling System

BF0564 XPM-Delay Dial-1 Line Signaling System
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX477AA
BC1187
Feature name
CC Delay Dial-1 Line Signaling System
Description
BC1187 allows the administration to modify the waveform timing or feature
options for the delay dial (DELDIAL) signaling system.
BCS history

NTX477AA
BF0564
Feature name
XPM–Delay Dial-1 Line Signaling System
Description
BF0564 implements the state machine in the international digital trunk
controller (IDTC) for the delay dial (DELDIAL) signaling system. The
DELDIAL system supports single A-bit signaling on PCM30 trunks on an
IDTC. The trunks can carry one-way incoming or outgoing traffic and
two-way traffic.
BCS history

NTX478AA
CCITT PCM (30+2) Digital Signaling and Maintenance
AE0480 Carrier Maintenance Enhancement

AE0777 6X27 Interface Control
BC1076 DTC 30 Carrier Maintenance
BC1340 IDTC Maintenance Enhancements
BF0392 LTC–Bit Signaling
BF0430 LTC PCM 30 I/F Card Maintenance
BF0432 LTC–ABCD Bit Card Diagnostic
BF0433 PCM 30 I/F Card Diagnostic
BF0978 PCM-30 Remote Network Sync
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTXG60AA DMS-250 International CP Core (IDC)
or

NTX478AA
AE0480
Feature name
Carrier Maintenance Enhancement
Description
AE0480 enhances central control (CC) carrier maintenance by providing the
capability for an XMS-based peripheral module (XPM) to support more than
one type of pulse code modulation (PCM).
BCS history
This feature supports the following international XPMs:
• international digital trunk controller (IDTC)
• international line group controller (ILGC)
• international line trunk controller (ILTC)
• PCM30 digital trunk controller (PDTC)
• PCM30 line group controller (PLGC)
Datafill
Table Description
CARRMTC CARD field is added to the DCM and DCA tuples.
SELECTOR field type is changed from CARR_CSPMTYPE to

PCM_TYPE to allow datafilling of different types of PCM on the
same PM type. Valid PCM types are DS1, D30, and M20.
User interface
This feature adds parameter PCM_TYPE to the POST command at the
CARRIER level of the MAP display to allow posting of carriers by PCM
type.

NTX478AA
AE0777
Feature name
6X27 Interface Control
Description
AE0777 enhances the PCM30 central control (CC) and XMS-based
peripheral module (XPM) maintenance software to support the NT6X27BA
PCM30 interface card.
The NT6X27BA card can operate as either an NT6X27AB or an
NT6X27BA card. The NT6X27BA card provides additional alarm
monitoring and diagnostic capabilities to that provided by the NT6X27AB
card.
BCS history
• NT6X27BA (PCM30 interface card)

When operating as an NT6X27AB card, the NT6X27BA card continues to
monitor the RFAI, RMAI, LLFA, LLMA, AIS, BER, and SLIP alarms.
When operating as an NT6X27BA card, the NT6X27BA card monitors the
CRC4, CRE, LLCMA, LOS, and AIS16 alarms in addition to the alarms
monitored by the NT6X27AB card.
Datafill
Table Description
CARRMTC Field CARD SELECT is added to allow selection of NT6X27AB

or NT6X27BA.
Field CRC4 ENABLE is added to allow CRC4 capability to be

turned ON or OFF.
Field CRE ENABLE is added to allow switch remote error

reporting to be turned ON or OFF.

NTX478AA
AE0777
Operational measurement (OM) group PCMCARR reflects the new alarms
introduced by this feature and the fault and error pegs associated with each
alarm.
User interface
This feature adds new alarm fields to the display for the POST and DETAIL
commands at the CARRIER level of the MAP display.

NTX478AA
BC1076
Feature name
DTC 30 Carrier Maintenance
Description
BC1076 provides the maintenance, diagnostic, and monitor software for
carrier links for the international digital trunk controller (IDTC).
BCS history
This feature does not support the downloading of maintenance control data.
All 30-channel carriers must use the maintenance control data predefined in
the associated peripheral software.
This feature does not provide facilities for 30-channel carriers to select the
maintenance templates datafilled in table CARRMTC.
All 30-channel carriers are assumed to operate in non-synchronized regions.
Therefore, slips are accumulated in 1-min intervals (SLIPML) and 5-min
intervals (SLIPOL).
This feature interacts with the following feature:
• BC1075 Carrier Enhancements
Datafill
Table Description
CARRMTC IDTC is added to the range of values in field ATTR.
This feature adds the following parameters for the IDTC:

• LLFAOST LLFARST LLFAML LLFAOL
• LLMAOST LLMARST LLMAML LLMAOL
• RFAIOST RFAIRST RFAIML RFAIOL
• RMAIOST RMAIRST RMAIML RMAIOL
• AISOST AISRST AISML AISOL
• BERML BEROL
• SLIPOL SLIPSYNC
• SIGLML SIGLOL

NTX478AA
BC1076
This feature adds operational measurements (OM) group PCMCARR. The
following registers are included:
• For alarm indication, the following registers apply: AISERR and
AISFLT.
• For frame alignment, the following registers apply: BERERR, BERFLT,
LLFAERR, LLFAFLT, LLMAERR, LLMAFLT, RFAIERR, RFAIFLT,
RMAIERR, and RMAIFLT.
• For out-of-service time, the following registers apply: CARRCBSY,
CARRMANB, CARRPBSY, and CARRSYSB.
• For transient change detected by a supervisory signaling channel, the
following registers apply: SIGLERR and SIGLFLT.
• For repeated or slipped frames of data, the following registers apply:
SLIPERR and SLIPFLT.
Logs
This feature adds log PM187 and modifies log PM186.
Log PM186 is generated by the PM subsystem when a carrier link is in
service or when no change in link state is required.
Log PM187 is generated by the PM subsystem when a carrier link is made
system busy.
User interface
This feature enhances the commands at the CARRIER level of the MAP
display to cover the carriers for the IDTC.

NTX478AA
BC1340
Feature name
IDTC Maintenance Enhancements
Description
BC1340 provides channel support to enable call processing development in
the international digital trunk controller (IDTC). This feature also adds
channel mapping for the IDTC.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
LTCINV Field PSLNKTAB is added to identify optional cards.
Field XPM_PSLINK_ENTRY is deleted to remove peripheral

side (P-side) link information from table LTCINV.
LTCPSINV This table is created to contain P-side link information.

NTX478AA
BF0392
Feature name
ILTC–Bit Signaling
Description
BF0392 describes the PCM30 hardware and software interface for the
international line trunk controller (ILTC).
BCS history
This feature requires an ILTC equipped with the following hardware:
• three-processor peripheral
• NT6X27AA (PCM30 interface circuit)
• NT6X28AA (signaling interface card)

This feature applies only to the ILTC.

NTX478AA
BF0430
Feature name
LTC PCM30 Interface Card Maintenance
Description
BF0430 provides PCM30 maintenance for the interface card in a line trunk
controller (LTC). The software monitors and reports PCM30 trunk alarms to
the central control (CC), and maintains and reports operational
measurements (OM).
BCS history
• BC1076 DTC30 Carrier Maintenance
• BF0433 PCM30 Interface Card Diagnostic

NTX478AA
BF0432
Feature name
LTC–ABCD Bit Card Diagnostics
Description
BF0432 provides the software required to detect faults in the NT6X28AA
signaling interface card. The NT6X28AA card provides the multiframe
level signal interface between the line trunk controller (LTC) and the
PCM30 line card.
BCS history

NTX478AA
BF0433
Feature name
PCM30 Interface Card Diagnostics
Description
BF0433 provides the diagnostic software required to ensure proper
functioning of the NT6X27 PCM30 interface card in the international digital
BCS history
• NT6X43 (message interface card)
• NT6X44 (time switch card)
• NT6X28 (signaling interface card)
• NT6X41 (speech bus formatter card)

NTX478AA
BF0978
Feature name
PCM30 Remote Network Sync
Description
BF0978 provides the capability to synchronize the DMS network with the
network of another office by way of a PCM30 carrier. Framing information
taken from the carrier will be reported to the central control (CC) which will
adjust its network synchronization value accordingly.
This feature reduces the possibility of framing losses on trunks between
synchronized offices.
BCS history
• BC0516 Sync Clock Extraction on New PMs
Datafill
Table Description
SYNCLK D30_IDTC_TYPE is added to range of values in field LK0PTYP.
D30_IDTC_TYPE is added to range of values in field LK1PTYP.

NTX479AA
International Universal Tone Receiver Support
BC1766 Enhanced Maintenance for Universal Tone Receivers

BF0396 LTC–UTR Utility
BF0434 LTC–UTR Card Diagnostic
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTXG60AA DMS-250 International CP Core (IDC)
or

NTX479AA
BC1766
Feature name
Enhanced Maintenance for Universal Tone Receivers
Description
BC1766 enhances the following maintenance functions for the universal
tone receiver (UTR) on North American XMS-based peripheral modules
(XPM):
• reporting to the central control (CC) operational measurements pegged
against the UTR
• including UTR measurements in dial tone speed recording (DTSR) for
digitone and multifrequency receivers
• checking the sanity of signaling processor-to-UTR communication
• expanding the in-service diagnostic done by the UTR
BCS history

NTX479AA
BF0396
Feature name
LTC–UTR Utility
Description
BF0396 provides the software for the universal tone receiver (UTR) card.
This feature implements the channel allocation utility and the interface to the
UTR card.
BCS history

NTX479AA
BF0434
Feature name
LTC–UTR Card Diagnostic
Description
BF0434 provides diagnostics for the NT6X92AA (universal tone receiver)
(UTR) card. The diagnostics test one or two UTR cards, depending on the
hardware configuration.
BCS history
• NT6X92AA (universal tone receiver card)

NTX480AA
Turkish Tone Plan
BC1186 Turkish Audible Tones
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX480AA
BC1186
Feature name
Turkish Audible Tones
Description
BC1186 provides new audible tones and cadences for periodic signals for
the Turkish network. The new tones are based on two 350-Hz and 450-Hz
tones that are assigned individually or in pairs. This feature provides
audible tones for international digital trunk controllers (IDTC) and
maintenance trunk modules (MTM).
BCS history
This feature uses the following feature:
• BC1064 Modify TM Tone Diagnostics for NT2X59BA

NTX481AA
Turkish Operator Switchboard Signaling
BC1339 BA-1 Signaling System

BF0679 Local Toll Trunks with TBI (1 SYS)
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX481AA
BC1339
Feature name
BA-1 Signaling System
Description
BC1339 implements the following line signaling systems (LSS) for Turkish
networks:
• NTLS30 LSS for one-way outgoing applications, such as terminating
trunks from a DMS-200 office to an operator switchboard
• NTLS04 LSS for one-way incoming applications, such as junctor trunks
from an operator switchboard to a DMS-200 office
• NTLS05 LSS for one-way incoming applications, such as specialized
junctor trunks from an operator switchboard to a DMS-200 office
• NTLS06 LSS for one-way outgoing applications from a DMS-200 office
to an end office
• NTLS07 LSS for one-way outgoing applications from a DMS-200 office
to an end office, and from a toll exchange to a DMS-100 office
BCS history
• BF0566 XPM–BA-1 Line Signaling System
Datafill
Table Description
LNSIGSYS Tuples are added for NTLS03, NTLS04, NTLS05, NTLS06, and
NTLS07 to specify the new line signaling systems.

NTX481AA
BF0679
Feature name
Local Toll Trunks with TBI (1 SYS)
Description
BF0679 provides the NTLS06 line signaling system (LSS) for the Turkish
network. This feature implements the incoming side of trunks between local
and toll offices for use with Toll Break-in (TBI).
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
LNSIGSYS IC is added to the range of values in field SIGDIR to specify the

direction of the trunk.

NTX482AB
Turkish Line Card Diagnostics
AG0095 International Type B Line Card Diagnostic

BC1337 NT6X93 Line Card Diagnostic
BF0684 International Type B Line Diagnostic (Metering)
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX474AA International Base Metering
NTX901AA Local Features 1
NTX980AA International Trunk Test Position (ITTP)
NTX472AA International–Local Basic (upgraded by NTX472AB)

or
or
NTX981AA International Line Test Position (ILTP) (replaced by
NTX472AB)

NTX482AB
AG0095
Feature name
International Type B Line Card Diagnostic
Description
AG0095 provides diagnostic software for the NT6X94AB (international
type B card). This feature allows a complete metering test to be run on both
coin lines and lines that have subscriber premise meters (SPM).
BCS history
• NT6X94AB (international type B line card)
• metallic test access (MTA) unit
• transmission test unit (TTU)

It is not necessary to disconnect the subscriber’s loop from the main
distribution frame before running a metering pulse test.
Datafill
Table Description
LNINV 6X94AB is added to the range of values in field CARDCODE to

specify the product engineering code (PEC) of the card.
Logs
Log LINE101 is generated when failures are detected in the diagnostic or
metering test for the NT6X94AB card.

NTX482AB
BC1337
Feature name
NT6X93 Line Card Diagnostic
Description
BC1337 provides diagnostic software for the NT6X93AA (international type
A card). The following types of tests are included: short and extended line
card diagnostics, and the No LTU line card diagnostic.
BCS history
• NT6X93AA (international type A card)
• line test unit (LTU)

A No LTU line card diagnostic cannot be requested manually. It is run by
the system when the line under test terminates at a peripheral module (PM)
with no serving LTU.
• BC1730 Table Operations for ILGC and ILTC

NTX482AB
BF0684
Feature name
International Type B Line Card Diagnostic
Description
BF0684 provides diagnostic software for NT6X94AA (international type B
card) and NT6X95AA (international metering tone card). A complete
metering pulse test will be run on coin lines, and a partial metering test will
be run on lines with subscriber premise meters (SPM).
This feature also provides support and diagnostics for the metallic test unit
(MTU).
BCS history
• NT6X94AA (international type B card)
• NT6X95AA (international metering tone card)
• NT4X97AA (metallic test unit digital controller card)
• NT4X98BA (metallic test unit international analog card)

One metering tone card is required for each physical international line
concentrating module (ILCM) drawer.
All NT6X94AA cards supporting a subscriber premise meter or coin phone
require a metering tone card in slot 0 of the odd-numbered line subgroup of
the physical ILCM drawer.
All international cards must be served by MTUs to avoid tapping of the bell
on the subscriber’s phone during card diagnostics.
Before the LTPLTA metering pulse test is run on a line with an SPM, the
subscriber’s loop must be disconnected from the main distribution frame
(MDF).
The firmware load for the MTU can be downloaded from the central control
(CC).
Each MTU, one on the odd-numbered terminal and the other on the
even-numbered terminal, must have a metallic connection between the
backplane and the metallic test access (MTA) unit.

NTX482AB
BF0684
This feature modifies the LOADFW CC command so that both MTUs must
be manual busy for the command to work.
• BC1259 MTU Downloading
Datafill
Table Description
LNINV 6X94AA and 6X95AA are added to the range of values in field
CARDCODE to specify the product engineering code (PEC) for
the line card.
MTATRK MTU is added to range of values in field LSELECTOR.
Logs
Log LINE101 is generated when failures are detected by the metering test.
Log TRK106 is generated when failures are detected by the MTU tests.
User interface
This feature adds the TSTMTR command at the LTPLTA level of the MAP
display. The command is used to test the ability of the line to generate
metering pulses.

NTX482BA
CEP Line Card Diagnostics
Feature package NTX482BA contents
AE0278 NT6X94BB Maintenance
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX980AA International Trunk Test Position (ITTP)
or
Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i NTX482BA–1

NTX482BA
AE0278
Feature name
NT6X94BB Maintenance
Description
AE0278 implements diagnostics for the NT6X94BB (revised international
type B card). The NT6X94BB card provides a voice and signaling interface
to DMS-100 switches in the Caribbean expansion project (CEP). It can be
used in either an international line concentrating module (ILCM) or an
international remote line concentrating module (IRLCM).
This feature adds the capability to run a complete metering test on both coin
lines and lines with subscriber premise meters (SPM).
BCS history
• NT6X94BB (revised international type B card)
• metallic test access (MTA) unit

It is not necessary to disconnect the subscriber’s loop from the main
distribution frame before running a metering pulse test.
The metering test should only be run on lines that support metering. If a line
is changed to support metering, then the diagnostic should be run on the line
before the line is put into service.
Datafill
Table Description
LNINV 6X94BB is added to the range of values in field CARDCODE to

datafill the NT6X94BB card.
Logs
Log LINE101 is generated when failures are detected in the NT6X94BB
diagnostic test.
NTX482BA–2 297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

NTX482CA
China Line Card Diagnostics
Feature package NTX482CA contents
AG0287 China Line Card Diagnostics

AJ1496 Extended Range Line Card Diagnostics
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
or
Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i NTX482CA–1

NTX482CA
AG0827
Feature name
China Line Card Diagnostic
Description
AG0827 provides short and extended line card diagnostic tests for the
NT6X93CA (line card type A [China]) and the NT6X94CA card. These
cards are required to provide a DMS-100 subscriber line interface to POTS.
BCS history
• NT6X93CA (line card type A [China])
• NT6X94CA card
• NT6X95AB (metering tone 12 kHz and 16 kHz)
• metallic test unit (MTU)

Extended card diagnostics can be run from the automatic line testing (ALT)
or the line test position (LTP) level of the MAP (maintenance and
administration position) display. Short card diagnostics can be run only
from the ALT level of the MAP display.
The Noise test and the Ringing and Supervision test are performed only if
office parameter NRTEST of table OFCOPT is set to YES.
The NT6X95AB card can be datafilled only in slot 0 of the odd-numbered
drawer of an international line concentrating module (ILCM).
Datafill
Table Description
LNINV 6X93CA and 6X94CA are added to the range of values in field
CARDCODE to specify the product engineering code (PEC) for
the line card.
OFCOPT Office parameter NRTEST must be datafilled YES or NO to run

or ignore Noise, and Ringing and Supervision tests.
Logs
The existing log LINE101 displays test results.
NTX482CA–2 297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

NTX482CA
AJ1496
Feature name
Extended Range Line Card Diagnostics
Description
AJ1496 provides short and extended line card diagnostic tests for the
NT6X93FA (extended range line card) (ERLC) for China. This card is
required to provide a DMS-100 subscriber line interface to POTS in areas of
low subscriber concentration.
BCS history
• NT6X93FA (extended range line card)
• NT6X95AB (metering tone 12 kHz and 16 kHz)
• metallic test unit (MTU)

Extended card diagnostics can be run from the automatic line testing (ALT)
or the line test position (LTP) level of the MAP (maintenance and
administration position) display. Short line card diagnostics can be run only
from the ALT level of the MAP display.
The Noise test and the Ringing and Supervision test are performed only if
office parameter NRTEST of table OFCOPT is set to YES.
The NT6X93FA card is intended for subscriber loops with a minimum
length of 1200 Ω and a maximum length of 2700 Ω., excluding the
telephone set.
The gain at the amplifiers should not be set higher than 7 dB.
Meter pulse generation is not supported in a physical line concentrating
module (LCM) drawer that has an extended range line card (ERLC)
assigned to slot 0 or slot 16. Meter pulse generation is supported only if
slot 0 of the odd LCM drawer is occupied by an NT6X93FA card.
The NT6X93FA card occupies three vertical slots in an ILCM drawer. The
primary slot – the first of the three slots from the top – must be placed in the
odd-numbered ILCM drawer, and the two physical slots directly below the
primary slot must be empty. If the number of the primary slot is between 0
and 15, an NT6X93FA card must not be placed in the slot directly above.
Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i NTX482CA–3

NTX482CA
AJ1496
Datafill
Table Description
LNINV 6X93FA is added to range of values in field CARDCODE to

specify the product engineering code (PEC) for the line card.
OFCOPT Office parameter NRTEST must be datafilled YES to run Noise,

and Ringing and supervision tests, or NO to ignore them.
NTX482CA–4 297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

NTX483AB
International 101 Communication Test Line
AE0005 New Tones and Test Line Circuits for CEP

AE0250 102 Test Line
AJ1031 T101 Test Lines for DMS-100/200I R2 Trunks
BC1191 International Communication Test Line
BC2076 Terminating Quiet Termination and Loop
BC2078 Originating Quiet Termination and Loop
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX483AB
AE0005
Feature name
New Tones and Test Line Circuits for CEP
Description
AE0005 provides maintenance support for the following:
• A-law looparound test lines in the DMS-100 trunk maintenance
subsystem
• maintenance trunk modules (MTM) in the Caribbean expansion program
(CEP)
• international line group controllers (ILGC) in the CEP and international
digital trunk controller (IDTC) in the CEP
BCS history
In table LTCINV, 6X02GA applies to ILGCs and 6X02HA applies to
IDTCs.
Existing DMS-100 peripheral maintenance specifications for the IDTC and
the ILGC apply also to IDTCs and ILGCs in the CEP.
Diagnostic tests for the IDTC and ILGC in the CEP are implemented in the
IDTC peripheral software.
Datafill
Table Description
LTCINV 6X02GA and 6X02HA are added to range of values in field

EQPEC.
TMINV 2X58CC is added to range of values in field EQPEC.
TRKGRP Field CARDCODE for trunk type LOOPA is to be datafilled as

2X75BA.
TRKSGRP Field CARDCODE for trunk type LOOPA is to be datafilled as

2X75BA.

NTX483AB
AE0250
Feature name
102 Test Line
Description
AE0250 implements the 102 test line (also known as the milliwatt test line)
for international trunks on the DMS-100 switch. This feature allows
operating company personnel to measure the far-to-near end transmission
loss on a trunk.
The test is performed by establishing a speech connection over the trunk
under test, applying a tone of known frequency and level at one end, and
measuring the frequency and level of the tone received at the end. Testing is
initiated at either the Trunk Test Position (TTP) or the Automatic Trunk Test
Position (ATT) of the MAP (maintenance and administration position)
display.
BCS history
• NT1X00AB (102 test trunk circuit pack)
• NT1X90 (test signal generator card)
• NT2X96 (PCM level meter)

NTX483AB
AJ1031
Feature name
T101 Test Lines for DMS-100 and DMS-200 R2 Trunks
Description
AJ1031 implements the 101 test line for DMS-100 and DMS-200 R2 trunks.
The 101 test line provides a two-way voice connection between a test
position and any incoming or outgoing trunk associated with the DMS-100
system.
BCS history
This feature requires the following hardware at each switch:
• 1A2 keyset
• terminal equipment
• NT2X58AT (international maintenance trunk module shelf)
• NT5X30AA (101 communication test line circuit)

NTX483AB
BC1191
Feature name
International Communication Test Line
Description
BC1191 implements the 101 test line on international DMS-100 and
DMS-200 trunks. The 101 test line provides a two-way voice connection
between a test position and any incoming or outgoing trunk associated with
the DMS-100 system.
This feature also allows maintenance functions to be performed on the
outgoing trunk on a 101 call.
BCS history
The value 2W cannot be datafilled in the DIR field in table TRKGRP or
table TRKSGRP as two-way trunk groups are not supported with the
TPS101 trunk group type.
Only DP and DT can be datafilled in the PULSETYPE field in table
TRKSGRP as only DP and DT test lines are supported with the TPS101
trunk group type. This refers to incoming trunks only.
The TPS101 trunk type is supported on a maintenance trunk module
(MTM). It is not supported on an international digital trunk controller
(IDTC).
• BC1341 International MTM Exec Line-up
• BC1190 International Trunk Data Modifications
Datafill
Table Description
TRKGRP TPS101 is added to the range of values in field GRPTYPE to

specify the 101 trunk group.

NTX483AB
BC1191
User interface
This feature adds the CALLTRF command at the TTP level of the MAP
(maintenance and administration position) display. The command transfers
control of an outgoing 101 trunk from call processing to TTP so that
maintenance functions can be performed on the trunk.

NTX483AB
BC2076
Feature name
Terminating Quiet Termination and Looparound Test Lines
Description
BC2076 implements the call processing and maintenance software required
to provide terminating test lines for DMS-100 offices in the Caribbean
expansion project (CEP). The test lines allow both one-way and looparound
measurement of far-to-near end loss and noise.
BCS history
• NT1X00AB (102 test trunk circuit pack)
• NT2X75BA (looparound test line card)

This feature is supported only for offices in the CEP.
This feature applies only to the termination of the test line, that is, the
far-end office.
CCITT signaling system No. 5 recommends only one dial-up sequence for
the looparound test, but the test requires two dial-up sequences, one for each
port. The alternative is to assign a spare NNX code from the numbering
plan area (NPA) to each test line.
The tone period for the milliwatt test line is set at 5.6 s.

NTX483AB
BC2078
Feature name
Originating Quiet Termination and Looparound Test Lines
Description
BC2078 implements the origination of both quiet termination tests and
terminating looparound test line tests on international trunks for the
Caribbean expansion project (CEP). The tests provide measurements of loss
and noise on the trunk under test, and compare the results with expected
values.
The tests can be performed manually by using the TST command at the TTP
level of the MAP (maintenance and administration position) display.
BCS history
This feature requires the following transmission test trunk cards:
• NT1X90 (test signal generator)
• NT2X96 (PCM level meter)

NTX484AA
Malicious Call Trace–International Toll/Transit
BC1496 Trunks with Malicious Call Trace (1 System)

TA0279 MCT Activation Enhancements
BCS history
BCS40i—Feature TA0279 added
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX660AA International Feature Processing Environment (FPE)

NTX484AA
BC1496
Feature name
Trunks with Malicious Call Trace (1 System)
Description
BC1496 implements the NTLS09 line signaling system for use in the
Turkish network. NTLS09 is a one-way direct current loop signaling trunk
that supports Malicious Call Trace (MCT).
NTLS09 is used between DMS-100 local offices, and between a DMS-100
office and non–DMS-100 local offices.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
LNSIGSYS The SIGTYP NTLS09 tuple is modified to specify values for

NTLS09 signals.
Logs
This feature adds log MCT101, which is generated when an MCT signal is
received on an outgoing NTLS09 trunk.
User interface
This feature adds command interpreter (CI) command MCTOFF, which
cancels the MCT audible alarm.

NTX484AA NTX484AA
TA0279 TA0279
Feature name
MCT Activation Enhancements
Description
This feature creates Malicious Call Trace 2 (MCT2) line option which
enhances malicious call trace (MCT) functionality by allowing the other
flash features to be used on the same line:
• International Call Transfer (ICT)
• Three-Way Calling (3WC)
• Six-Way Calling (6WC)
• Call Waiting (CWT)
MCT2 only works with dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) lines and requires
a special service code to be datafilled in table ACCODE. The MCT2 feature
is activated using the action R*SC# where SC is the service code
(datafillable, using 33 for China). A special dial tone is generated.
BCS history
The following restrictions apply to this feature:
• For dial pulse (DP) lines, only the MCT option is available with the
existing restrictions still in effect.
• MCT and MCT2 cannot both be assigned to the same line.
• Activation of MCT2 is not possible after the controller has set up the
enquiry call for ICT, 3WC and 6WC.
Datafill
Table Description
ACCODE The range of field XLADATA is extended to define the service

code for MCT2. The range of values for field FTR is extended
to include MCT2.
FEATCHG The range of values for field FEAT is extended to include

MCT2.
OFCVAR Parameter MCT_ACTIVATION_WITH_SERVICE_CODE is not

used and will be removed after the next three software
releases.
Service orders
This feature introduces line option MCT2.

NTX485AA
International–Call Processing System
BC1301 General Interworking System Part I

BC1927 International Peripherals Overload Control
BF0399 Terminal Application Processors
BF0805 International Trunk to Announcement (Speedup)
BF0915 International Peripherals Overload Control
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX485AA
BC1301
Feature name
General Interworking System Part I
Description
BC1301 implements the general interworking system that allows telephony
terminals to communicate with one another across a telephone exchange.
This feature provides the following:
• call-processing functions
• trunk audits to detect and correct discrepancies in trunk states between
the central control and the peripheral module
• operational measurements to record and report on the use and
availability of universal tone receivers (UTR)
BCS history
Logs CP100, CP101, CP102, and UTR100 apply to the international digital
trunk controller (IDTC) only.
Logs TRK110 and TRK112 are not supported with trunk types MTR and
OPR.
• BC0962 International Trunk Testing
• BC1076 DTC 30 Carrier Maintenance
• BC1186 Turkish Audible Tones
• BC1187 CC Delay Dial-1 Line Signaling System
• BC1189 CC MF-3 Register Signaling System
• BC1338 International Trunk Maintenance Aspects
• BC1340 IDTC Maintenance Enhancements
• BC1341 International MTM Exec Lineups
• BF0392 LTC–Bit Signaling
• BF0393 LTC Event Recorders and Transmitters
• BF0396 LTC–UTR Utility

NTX485AA
BC1301
• BF0399 Terminal Application Processors
• BF0430 LTC PCM30 I/F Card Maintenance
• BF0560 Trunk Maintenance
• BF0564 XPM–Delay Dial-1 Line Signaling System
• BF0565 XPM–Wink-1 Line Signaling System
• BF0567 XPM MF-3 Register Signaling System
This feature adds operational measurements (OM) group UTR, which
includes the following registers: UTROVFL, UTRQABAN, UTRQOCC,
UTRQOVFL, UTRSZRS, and UTRTRU.
Logs
• CP100 is generated when a call fails because of an error not associated
with the digits dialed.
• CP101 is generated when a communication problem occurs between the
central control (CC) and the peripheral processor.
• CP102 is generated when a call failure is associated with the digits
dialed.
• UTR100 is generated when the OM values for the IDTC listed in the log
are inaccurate.

NTX485AA
BC1301
Logs CP100 and CP102 replace the following logs for trunk groups MTR
and OPR:
• TRK114
• TRK115
• TRK116
• TRK117
• TRK121
• TRK122
• TRK162
• TRK182
• TRK183
• TRK213
Log CP101 replaces the following log for trunk groups MTR and OPR:
• TRK123

NTX485AA
BC1927
Feature name
Description
BC1927 provides system-wide overload control for international call
processing. The overload control manages congestion in the central control
(CC) processor resulting from heavy call processing demands.
BCS history

NTX485AA
BF0399
Feature name
Terminal Application Processors
Description
BF0399 provides the software for the terminal application processors that
control call processing functions in international XMS-based peripheral
modules (IXPM). Terminal application processors coordinate the activities
of processors such as line signaling processors, register signaling processors,
and call metering processors. They also provide a logical interface to call
processing in the central control.
BCS history

NTX485AA
BF0805
Feature name
International Trunk to Announcement (Speedup)
Description
BF0805 allows an international trunk call to terminate at a digital recording
announcement machine (DRAM). This occurs when incorrect digits are
dialed or when no circuits are available to complete the call as dialed.
BCS history
Hardware Requirements
This feature requires a DRAM.

NTX485AA
BF0915
Feature name
Description
BF0915 provides system-wide overload control for international call
processing. The overload control manages congestion in the central control
(CC) processor resulting from heavy call processing demands.
BCS history
In international call processing, register ORIGDENY in operational
measurements (OM) group CP indicates that a call is lost.
Logs
This features adds log OCS100, which is generated when the overload
control system fails to get a guaranteed timer.

NTX486AA
MF-3 Register Signaling
BC1189 CC MF-3 Register Signaling System

BF0567 XPM MF-3 Register Signaling System
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX486AA
BC1189
Feature name
CC MF-3 Register Signaling System
Description
BC1189 implements the extra parameters required to organize variable data
for the three-phase multifrequency (MF-3) register signaling system. This
feature allows the administration to vary data on a trunk-subgroup basis.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
RGSIGSYS This table is added to datafill variable parameters for the MF-3
register signaling system.

NTX486AA
BF0567
Feature name
XPM MF-3 Register Signaling System
Description
BF0567 provides the register signaling transactor (RST) and the table
control required to implement three-phase multifrequency (MF-3) register
signaling in the international digital trunk controller (IDTC).
BCS history

NTX487AA
Malicious Call Trace–International Local
AG0709 Malicious Call Identification

BF0674 Malicious Call Trace for Subscriber Lines
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX484AA Malicious Call Trace–International Toll/Transit
NTX660AA International Feature Process Environment (FPE)
NTX661AA International Feature Processing Environment
or

NTX487AA
AG0709
Feature name
Malicious Call Identification
Description
AG0709 provides the following options:
• the capability to determine the directory number of a malicious caller
when the call is on trunks that use a multifrequency compelled (MFC)
register signaling system, such as CCITT R2
• the CALLCRTL option for trunk-to-trunk and trunk-to-line calls.
CALLCTRL is used to specify which party has control of the call:
CALLED, CALLING, or MUTUAL.
• a new traffic class (Tandem CAMA [TNCA]) for MTR trunk groups
• a new office parameter in table OFCVAR, to specify whether automatic
number identification (ANI) information will be sent on R2 trunks with a
traffic class other than CAMA or TNCA
BCS history
This feature applies only to international software.
The calling party is held in line-to-line calls.
Log MCT102 does not identify the directory number of the caller on
interoffice calls over non-MFC trunks. It shows only the common language
location identifier (CLLI) of the incoming trunk.
If a call to a line with Malicious Call Trace (MCT) is under CALLED party
control and the caller hangs up before MCT is activated, metering continues
until the trunk is force-released.
Metering of the MCT call at the originating office will not be terminated
when MCT is activated on an in-office call.
For calls terminating on an International Traffic Operator Position System
(ITOPS), option CALLCTRL must be set to CALLED in the Universal
Translations tables.
Calls to lines with the emergency service group (ESG) option must have
CALLCTRL set to CALLED to have called party control. The re-ring
capability is only available under CALLED party control
Calls terminating on CH02 trunks must have CALLCTRL set to CALLED
to have called party control.

NTX487AA
AG0709
A request for called party control from the R2 signaling system overrides the
CALLCTRL option datafilled in the Universal Translations table.
On an interoffice call under CALLED control, all flash features other than
MCT and ESG are unavailable to both the calling and the called parties.
With CALLED control in effect, a call will be under CALLING control until
the called party answers.
MCT interacts with the following features:
• Call Diversion (CDIV)
• Cancel Call Waiting (CCW)
• Coin Lines (COIN)
• Denied Origination (DOR)
• Denied Termination (DTM)
• Do Not Disturb (DND)
• Dial Pulse lines (DP) and DTMF Digitone lines (DGT)
• Feature Denied (FDN)
• Free Number Termination (FNT)
• International Call Recording (ICR)
• Operator Number Identification (DNI)
• Semi-permanent Connection (SPC)
• Six-way Calling (6WC) and Three-way Calling (3WC)
• Subscriber Activation
• Toll Break-in (TBI)
• Wakeup Call (WUC)
• Warm Line (WLN)
Call Control interacts with the following features:

• Call Transfer (ICT)
• Six-way Calling (6WC) and Three-way Calling (3WC)

NTX487AA
AG0709
Datafill
Table Description
CTRLTMRS Field CLDCTLT0 is added to specify the number of seconds an

incoming trunk is held under called party control.
TRKGRP TNCA is added to the list of traffic classes that can be datafilled
against an MTR trunk.
OFCVAR Parameter R2_ANI_DEV is added.
Logs
This feature adds logs ITOPS111 and MCT102.
Log ITOPS111 is generated on the incoming trunk if the caller hangs up and
the call control timer expires before the call is assigned to a queue for an
operator.
Log MCT102 is generated when MCT is invoked on an interoffice call and
the calling number has been collected.

NTX487AA
BF0674
Feature name
Malicious Call Trace for Subscriber Lines
Description
BF0674 allows the administration to trace and identify the originators of
malicious calls. The trace is initiated by the subscriber who receives the
malicious call.
BCS history
Malicious Call Trace (MCT) and Free Number Termination (FNT) cannot
both be assigned to the same subscriber line.
For MCT to operate, all trunks involved in the malicious call must be
capable of transmitting destination control request (DCR) and MCT signals.
NTLS09 trunks support DCR and MCT signals. If a call goes through
NTLS09 trunks, then through non-NTLS09 trunks before terminating on the
subscriber line, no office will act on a request to trace the call. If the call
first goes through non-NTLS09 trunks then through NTLS09 trunks, only
the NTLS09 trunks are held.
If a restart is applied while MCT is active, the messages are lost and the
trace is unsuccessful. If the restart is applied after MCT is activated, the
held party can be released before the call is traced.
If Toll Break-in (TBI) is applied after MCT is activated but while the parties
are still connected, the caller can hang up but does not receive any calls until
the trunk is released.
Lines or trunks held because of MCT activation are released if a switch of
activity (SWACT) is applied to either XMS-based peripheral module (XPM)
involved in the hold, with the following exceptions:
• in a line-to-line call (in different international line group controllers
(ILGC))
• in a trunk-to-line call
Datafill
Table Description
LENLINES MCH is added to specify MCT as a line option.

NTX487AA
BF0674
Service orders
In service orders, the MCT feature is referenced as MCH. The service order
commands NEW and ADO are used to apply the MCH option to a line;
DEO and OUT are used to remove the MCH option from a line.

NTX487AB
Malicious Call Trace–International Local
NTX487AB modifies the DMS-100 switch central control (CC) and the
XMS-based peripheral module (XPM) to provide malicious call trace
(MCT) capability over R2 trunks. The feature also provides an R2 register
signal for called party control and a line signal for trace request.
TA0138 Guatemala MCT (XPM) – Phase I

TA0139 R2 Malicious Call Trace (CC) – Phase I
TA0168 R2 Malicious Call Trace–Phase II
BCS history
BCS38i—TA0168 added.
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX484AA Malicious Call Trace–International Toll/Transit
NTX660AA International Feature Process Environment (FPE)
NTX661AA International Feature Processing Environment
or
NTXH04AA CCITT 2-bit Line Signaling

NTX487AB
TA0138
Feature name
R2 Malicious Call Trace (XPM) – Phase I
Description
This feature modifies the DMS-100 XMS-based peripheral module (XPM)
to provide Malicious Call Trace (MCT) capability over R2 trunks. The
feature also provides an R2 register signal for called party control and a line
signal for trace request.
BCS history
This feature does not support MCT and meter pulse generation or reception
over R2 trunks at the same time.
Two-way NTLS16 trunks do not support the MCT line signal.
The called party cannot activate called party control if it has both MCT and
Free Number Termination (FNT) options.
When MCT is activated, any subsequent service codes dialed will be
ignored.
MCT only functions properly if all the trunks involved in the call are
capable of propagating the MCT line signal.
Calling party software message registration is stopped on receipt of the
MCT line signal.
While MCT is assigned to a line, other features requiring switchhook flash
will be unavailable.
Lines and trunks held as a result of MCT activation must be manually
released by operating company personnel.
The originating office MCT log will not print the called party directory
number, nor the digits dialed. If the call terminates in a DMS switch on a
line that is assigned the MCT option, the terminator control signal is
transmitted regardless of whether automatic number identification (ANI)
digits are received.

NTX487AB
TA0138
transmitted regardless of whether the call connections involve a step-by-step
office.
If a switch of activity (SWACT) takes place in any of the peripheral modules
involved in the MCT hold process, the held lines or trunks will be released.

NTX487AB
TA0139
Feature name
R2 Malicious Call Trace (CC) – Phase I
Description
This feature modifies the DMS-100 switch central control (CC) to provide
Malicious Call Trace (MCT) capability over R2 trunks. The feature also
provides an R2 register signal for called party control and a line signal for
trace request.
BCS history
This feature does not support MCT and meter pulse generation or reception
over R2 trunks at the same time.
Two-way NTLS16 trunks do not support the MCT line signal.
The called party cannot activate called party control if it has both MCT and
Free Number Termination (FNT) options.
When MCT is activated, any subsequent service codes dialed will be
ignored.
MCT only functions properly if all the trunks involved in the call are
capable of propagating the MCT line signal.
Calling party software message registration is stopped on receipt of the
MCT line signal.
While MCT is assigned to a line, other features requiring switchhook flash
will be unavailable.
Lines and trunks held as a result of MCT activation must be manually
released by operating company personnel.
transmitted regardless of whether automatic number identification (ANI)
digits are received.
transmitted regardless of whether the call connections involve a step-by-step
office.

NTX487AB
TA0139
If a switch of activity (SWACT) takes place in any of the peripheral modules
involved in the MCT hold process, the held lines or trunks will be released.
Datafill
Table Description
LNSIGSYS MCT line signal is added to tuple NTLS16.
Office parameter CHANGE_CALL_CTRL_FOR_MCT is added to table

OFCVAR. This parameter is set to YES to provide the MCT option.

NTX487AB
TA0168
Feature name
R2 Malicious Call Trace-Phase II
Description
This feature enhances the existing Malicious Call Trace (MCT) capabilities
on R2 register and NTLS16 line signaling. This feature adds the MCT line
signal to the NTLS16 line signaling system for two-way trunks.
This feature provides following optional functions:
• Activating the MCT by flash and a special service code.
• Setting the timer for MCT activation. MCT activation is ignored when
the timer expires.
This feature also enhances the functionality of office parameter
CHANGE_CALL_CTRL_FOR_MCT by introducing the following options:
• providing a timer in the originating office to return call control to the
calling party control if the call control was previously changed to called
party control
• supporting reanswer timeout in called party control
BCS history
When MCT coexists with other flash features on a line, MCT cannot be
activated while the originating subscriber flashes and dials digits.
All the trunks involved in the call must be capable of propagating an MCT
line signal.
The call control is changed to called party control if office parameter
TERM_CTRL_CHARGE is available in R2 register signaling.
MCT cannot be added to a COIN line.
This feature does not support the following functions:
• MCT and meter pulse generation or reception over R2 trunks at the same
time
• flexibility in MCT line signal definition. The MCT line signal is always
a pulsed line signaling B-bit in NTLS16.
A subscriber can activate MCT along with other flash features.
The Call Waiting feature has the priority for flash.

NTX487AB
TA0168
This feature is compatible with the following:
• DP and DTMF lines
• Free number terminate feature
• Huntgroups
Datafill
Table Description
TRKSGRP Fields MCTOGRLS and MCTICRLS are added.
Office parameter MCT_LOG_AT_TANDEM_OFFICE is introduced with

this feature. This parameter provides the option of whether to generate an
MCT log in the tandem office upon receipt of an MCT line signal.

NTX488AA
International Time of Day Routing
BC1498 Repair Service

BC1825 Translation Verification for Time of Day Route
BV1136 Time of Day Routing
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTXB57AA Open Number Translations
or
NTXG6OAA DMS-250 International CP Core (IDC)
or

NTX488AA
BC1498
Feature name
Repair Service
Description
BC1498 expands the translation facility to provide retranslations and
time-of-day conditional routing in the Turkish network. During business
hours, a subscriber’s request for service terminates in the same office as the
subscriber’s line. At all other times, the request is routed to a tandem office.
BCS history
• BV1136 Time-of-day Routing
Datafill
Table Description
CTRTE and CND and RT are added to field RTELIST to allow conditional
PXRTE routing and retranslation.

NTX488AA
BC1825
Feature name
Translation Verification for Time-of-Day Routes
Description
BC1825 enhances TRAVER (translation verification) so that it continues to
verify new routes referenced in the translation tables. This feature also
allows TRAVER to process the time-of-day (TOD) conditional routing
implemented by feature BC1498 (Repair Service).
BCS history
This feature applies to international translations only.
User interface
This feature modifies the output of the TRAVER command to display
information on the new routes.

NTX488AA
BV1136
Feature name
Time-of-Day Routing
Description
BV1136 implements time-of-day (TOD) routing which allows or denies
route choices based on the time of day. Times can be set according to rate
schedules, or they can be varied based on the day of the week or year.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
DAYOWEEK This table defines the TOD system to be used for each day of
the week.
DAYOYEAR This table defines the TOD system to be used for special days.
DAYTYPES This table defines the valid entries for the DAYTYPE fields in
the tables used for TOD routing.
IBNRTE The new subselector TOD is added to field CND to allow TOD
routing.
SFWALARM Fields TODSYS and TODFEAT are added to define the actions
to be taken for problems with the TOD system.
TIMEODAY This table defines the routing that will result from a given TOD
system and DAYTYPE entry.
TODHEAD This table defines how the other time and day tables will be
used.
Logs
The following logs have been modified: AUDT166, AUDT167, AUDT168,
and AUDT169.
User interface
Command interpreter (CI) command TDQ is added to query and modify the
TOD system.

NTX489AA
Visa Switchboard Interface (Turkey)
BC1520 Visa Systems Table Operations

BF0680 Visa Interface Systems
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX481AA Turkish Operator Switchboard Signaling

NTX489AA
BC1520
Feature name
VISA Systems Table Operations
Description
BC1520 implements the NTLS08 line signaling system required to provide
VISA operator service. The NTLS08 is used for one-way incoming calls
from a DMS-200 switch to a VISA operator, and one-way outgoing calls
from the VISA operator to the DMS-200 switch.
BCS history
This feature requires BF0566 (XPM–BA-1 Line Signaling System).
This feature uses BV1211 (CC Line Signaling Support).
Datafill
Table Description
LNSIGSYS NTLS08 is added to datafill the NTLS08 line signaling system.

NTX489AA
BF0680
Feature name
VISA Interface Systems
Description
BF0680 implements both sides of the NTLS08 signaling trunk for VISA
operator service. The NTLS08 line signaling system (LSS) is used for
one-way outgoing applications from a DMS-200 office to VISA operator
boards and for one-way incoming applications from VISA operator boards
to a DMS-200 office.
BCS history
The NTLS08 LSS protocol uses A-bit signaling only.
Datafill
Table Description
LNSIGSYS Tuple is added for NTLS08 to specify the new line signaling
system.

NTX492AA
Operator Toll Break-In
AE0244 Toll Break-in–Background Tone

AE0245 Toll Break-in MAP Signaling Command
TA0178 T1 to T2 Interworking
TA0179 Toll Break-in for Local DMS
TA0180 Toll Break-in from OPR Lines
BCS history
BCS38i—TA0178, TA0179, and TA 0180 added.
number
NTX000AA Bilge
or

NTX492AA
AE0244
Feature name
Toll Break-in – Background Tone
Description
AE0244 allows the DMS system to apply the appropriate tone sequence
when an operator breaks in on a busy subscriber line to inform the
subscriber of an incoming toll call.
This feature also expands the capability of the NT3X67BB (three-port
conference card) to provide the continuous toll break-in (TBI) background
tone, and enhances the diagnostics for the card by adding a self-test of the
TBI tone.
This feature is a requirement for international offices.
BCS history
• NT3X67BB (three-port conference card)

To perform the self-test, all six ports on the NT3X67BB card must be
available.
TBI applies only to trunk signaling types NTLS06 and NTLS07. All trunks,
up to the near-end office, must be datafilled as operator (OPR) trunks.
The TBI call must be line-to-line, line-to-trunk, trunk-to-line, or
single-ended. TBI is denied if any features are currently active on the
near-end call.
The conference card must be datafilled as NT3X67BB in table CONF3PR.
If it is datafilled as NT3XBA, the background tone will not be available.
• BC2265 International Tone Break-in, which provides the software
for the TBI feature
• Call Diversion features (CDA, CDB, CDF, CDIV, CDO, and CDS)
• Coin lines (Coin)

NTX492AA
AE0244
• Denied features (DTM, PLP, and SUS)
• DP Lines Dial Pulse (DP)
• DTMF Lines Digitone (DGT)
• Essential Line (ELN)
• Free Number Terminating (FNT)
• Hunt Groups (CIR, DLH, DNH, MLH, and SHU)
• DTMF Lines DIGITONE (DGT)
• International Line Restrictions (ILR)
• Malicious Call Trace (MCT)
• Six-way Calling (6WC)
• Subscriber Activation
• Subscriber Premise Meter (SPM)
• Three-way Calling (3WC)
• Wakeup Call (WUC)
Datafill
Table Description
CONF3PR Code 3X67BB is added to field CARDCODE to allow the

background tone to be applied.

NTX492AA
AE0245
Feature name
Toll Break-in MAP Signaling Command
Description
AE0245 allows maintenance personnel to simulate a Toll Break-in (TBI)
request from the trunk test position (TTP) level of the MAP (maintenance
and administrative position) display and perform tests on the TBI signals.
BCS history
This features applies to international offices only.
TBI applies only to trunks that support the TBI signal.
Trunks supporting the TBI signal must be datafilled as operator trunks
(OPR) at the far-end office.
• BC2265 International Toll Break-in
• Call Diversion (CDIV) features
• Coin lines (Coin)
• denied features (DTM, PLP, and SUS)
• Hunt Groups (CIR, DLH, DNH, MLH, and SHU)

NTX492AA
AE0245
User interface
This feature adds the TBI command at the Manual level of the MAP display.
The TBI command simulates the signals used for the TBI feature.

NTX492AA
TA0178
Feature name
T1 to T2 Interworking
Description
This feature provides MFS interworking, in a CIS-market network, for
DMS-100 Family toll exchanges from the following T1 systems to T2–DP:
• ANIG/DP
• MFPP-1
• MFPP-2
Clear down of the call depends on the call control type used on the routes.
The call control type can be either both-side disconnection or one side
disconnection. The called party control feature gives control on the
both-side disconnection to the called subscriber.
BCS history
The NET6X2AA UTR card is required.
This feature does not support the called party control.
• TA0175 CIS Tones and Cadences
• TA0176 CIS Universal Tone Receiver (UTR) Interface,
Maintenance and Diagnostic
• TA0177 CIS UTR Integration Phase 1

NTX492AA
TA0179
Feature name
Toll Break-in for local DMS
Description
This feature provides the automatic Toll Break-in (TBI) facility for incoming
T2 dial pulse (DP) or multifrequency signaling (MFS) operator trunks.
BCS history
This feature requires the NT3X67BB card (conference circuit board) that
provides the TBI intrusion tone for the duration of the TBI conference call.
If the NT3X67BA conference circuit board is used, no background tone can

be provided. Tone is applied for 3s at the beginning of break-in.
in the following cases :
• he subscriber that the operator is trying to reach (subscriber A) or the
original party connected to A before the TBI call (subscriber B) is an
operator
• A is already involved in a TBI call
• A is in the dialing or outpulsing state
• A has activated a feature
• A is the originator of the call and has the subscriber premises meter
(SPM) option
• A is the originator of the call and is a COIN line
• A has at least one of the following options:
— Deny Toll Break-in (DTBI)
— International No Double Connect (INDC)
— International Do Not Disturb (IDND)
• A is a data line
Up to this feature, none of the international line features and the
international line options are supported for DMS as a local CIS exchange.
Existing T1–line feature interactions outlined in the feature AG0710 (Toll
Break-in DMS100i) are kept in use in case of an attempt to use a line feature
on the user’s own responsibility.

NTX492AA
TA0180
Feature name
Toll Break-in from OPR Lines
Description
This feature allows the DMS exchange to activate Toll Break-in (TBI) from
operator lines to a DMS line or a T2 operator trunk in the CIS-market
network.
BCS history
This feature requires the NT3X67BA or NT3X67BB card (conference
circuit) for TBI tone generation.
Line class OPRL acts as a standard line. This feature gives only the TBI
capability to this line; no other specifications are supported for this line.
TBI is not allowed under the following conditions:
• The subscriber that the operator is trying to reach (subscriber A) is
dialing or ringing.
• Either A, or the original party connected to A before the TBI call
(subscriber B), has features in effect.
• Subscriber A has activated Malicious Call Trace (MCT).
• The call is originated by an operator.
• Subscriber A is already involved in a TBI call.
• Subscriber A is a data terminal.
TBI cannot be activated if MCT is active.
If A and B are involved in a TBI call, MCT can be activated. The operator
can stay in the conference within the TBI_OPR_TIMEOUT duration.
If a subscriber who has the call waiting (CW) feature is handling a call with
the operator and another party calls this subscriber, CW is not applied and
busy tone is sent back to the calling party.

NTX492AA
TA0180
Datafill
Table Description
CONF3PR In order to apply the background tone for line terminating, the
CARDCODE field must be datafilled as 3X67BB.
OFCVAR Office parameters TBI_OFFER, TBI_OPR_TIMEOUT, and

TBI_OPR_CONNECT_A are datafilled.
LINEATTR Field LINE CLASS CODE is datafilled as OPRL to identify the

operator line.

NTX493AA
Administrative Call Diversion Features
BC2049 Absent Subscriber Intercept
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX053AA Maintenance Assistance Package
or

NTX493AA
BC2049
Feature name
Absent Subscriber Intercept
Description
BC2049 implements the Call Diversion to Operator (CDO) feature. This
feature allows a subscriber to request that incoming calls be diverted to an
absent subscriber intercept (ASI) operator while the subscriber is away.
Calls are diverted for a period of time specified by the subscriber, or until
the subscriber dials the access code and requests that CDO be deactivated.
BCS history
CDO is not available on coin lines or multiparty lines.
A Hunt group can have only one call diverted at a time.
To keep the load on ASI lines to an acceptable level, the operating company
should limit the number of lines in an office that can have ASI active at a
time.
CDO is not compatible with Free Number Termination (FNT).
The number of calls with call diversion active in an office is limited by the
number of call-diversion extension blocks specified in table OFCENG. If no
blocks are available, diverted calls are routed to a treatment.
• Denied Termination (DOR)
• Hunt Groups
• Plug Up (PLP)

NTX493AA
BC2049
Datafill
Table Description
LENFEAT CDO is added as a line option.
OFCENG Parameter CDIV_EXT_BLOCKS is added to specify the number

of CDO extension blocks to be allocated on a restart.
OFCVAR Parameter CDIV_FWDN_XLA is added to specify translation

information for a call diversion using the DN selector.
Parameter CDIV_SDN_XLA is added to specify translation

information for a call diversion using the SDN selector.
Parameter CDO_ROUTE is added to specify translation

information for a call diversion using the RTE selector.
Service orders
Service order commands NEW and ADO are used to assign CDO to a
subscriber’s line, DEO and OUT to remove CDO from the line, and QDN or
QLEN to query the status of CDO on the line.
This feature increments the following registers in operational measurements
(OM) group EXT: EXTSEIZ, EXTOVFL, and EXTUSAGE.
Logs
This feature adds log AUDT617, which is generated when call diversion is
applied to a call on which it was not requested or when a call is diverted on a
line that does not have CDO.

NTX494AA
Automatic Call Recording
BC2050 Toll Call Recording

BC2074 ICR Support Implementation
BF0976 PM Metering Robustness
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
or

NTX494AA
BC2050
Feature name
Toll Call Recording
Description
BC2050 provides the DMS-100 switch with the capability to record detailed
information about direct-dialed toll calls made on selected lines.
This feature performs the following functions:
• monitors selected lines for direct-dialed long distance calls
• collects specific information about the call by way of the automatic
message accounting (AMA) system
• records the information on permanent storage using the device
independent recording package (DIRP)
BCS history
This feature records information on toll calls only.
TCR applies to international local switches only.
• Abbreviated Dialing (ADL)
• Absent Subscriber Intercept (ASI)
• Hunt Groups

NTX494AA
BC2050
Datafill
Table Description
CRSFMT INTLFMT is added to the range of values in the FORMAT field

to specify the international format.
CRSMAP ITCR is added to the range of values in the KEY field to specify
the international call record type.
LENLINES ICR is added to specify TCR as a line option.
MNETATTR Values are added to the RECORD field to specify whether or
not international call recording applies.
OFCENG Parameter NUM_INTL_RECORDING_UNITS is added to
specify the number of extension blocks to be allocated for TCR.
OFCVAR Parameter GENERATE_CALL_RECORDING_LOGS is added
to control the generation of log messages whenever an AMA
record is created.
Parameter INTL_TCR_REQUESTED is added to specify

whether TCR is to be applied to every line in the office or to
selected lines.
This feature increments the following registers in operational measurements
(OM) group EXT: EXTSEIZ, EXTOVFL, and EXTUSAGE.

NTX494AA
BC2074
Feature name
ICR Support Implementation
Description
BC2074 provides additional formatting capability for international call
recording (ICR). This feature does the following:
• constructs a new ICREXT call entry record
• modifies the AMADUMP system to allow the administration to print the
record or view it at a computer terminal
• generates a standard C2C2 trunk identification record for each trunk that
is datafilled in the office. These records can be viewed using the
existing AMADUMP system.
BCS history
This feature applies to DMS-100 international offices only.
• AC0014 International TCR and CDR Hooks
• BC2050 Toll Call Recording
Logs
This feature adds log AMAB, which provides a detailed description of the
call data used to produce an ICREXT record.

NTX494AA
BF0976
Feature name
PM Metering Robustness
Description
BF0976 provides the call duration, metering pulse count, and call status for
calls that are recorded on a DMS-100 switch.
BCS history
This feature applies to international local switches only.
• BC2050 Toll Call Recording
• BF0674 Malicious Call Trace for Subscriber Lines
• BF0800 XPM – Metering Tariff Determination

NTX495AA
TS16 Signaling for Loop Disconnect
BF0867 XPM-Outgoing Loop Disconnect Signaling

BF0881 XPM-Incoming Loop Disconnect Signaling
BV1987 XPM-Support for Outgoing and Incoming Loop Disconnect
BV1988 CC-Support for Outgoing and Incoming Loop Disconnect
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX495AA
BF0867
Feature name
XPM Outgoing LD Signaling
Description
BF0867 implements outgoing loop disconnect (LD) signaling on the
international digital trunk controller (IDTC) for the LM1 channel bank. The
line signaling system is referred to as NTLS09 and the register signaling
system as NTRS03.
BCS history
This feature requires a three-processor IDTC with expanded memory.
This feature applies to the LM1 channel bank only.
The NTLS10 and NTRS03 systems are normally used together for LD
signaling. However, they can be combined with other signaling systems on
a trunk.

NTX495AA
BF0881
Feature name
XPM Incoming Loop Disconnect Signaling
Description
BF0881 implements incoming loop disconnect (LD) signaling on the
international digital trunk controller (IDTC). This feature interacts with a
step-by-step (SXS) exchange through an LM1 channel bank.
BCS history
This feature requires a three-processor IDTC with expanded memory.
The line signaling system is referred to as NTLS10 and the register signaling
system as NTRS03.
The NTLS10 and NTRS03 systems are normally used together for LD
signaling. However, they can be combined with other signaling systems on
a trunk.

NTX495AA
BV1987
Feature name
XPM–Support for Outgoing and Incoming LD Signaling
Description
BV1987 provides table control and data maintenance for the line and
register signaling systems required for loop disconnect (LD) signaling in the
international digital trunk controller (IDTC). This feature receives data from
the central control (CC) when the IDTC is returned to service and stores it
for use by the line and register signaling systems.
BCS history
This feature implements the data structures, not the signaling systems.

NTX495AA
BV1988
Feature name
CC Support for Outgoing and Incoming LD Signaling
Description
BV1988 implements the table control necessary to input variable parameters
for outgoing and incoming trunks that use loop disconnect (LD) signaling.
This allows the administration to adapt the signaling system to their
requirements.
The signaling system is required for the Caribbean expansion program
(CEP).
BCS history
The line signaling system is referred to as NTLS10 and the register signaling
system as NTRS03.
The following features are not supported:
• coin and fee checking
• flash
• loop hold
• metering
• operator signals (except manual hold)
• trunk offering
This feature requires BV1987 (XPM – Support for Outgoing and Incoming
LD Signaling).
Datafill
Table Description
LNSIGSYS The selector NTLS10 is added to specify the NTLS10 line

signaling system.
RGSIGSYS The selector NTRS03 is added to specify the NTRS03 register

signaling system.

NTX496AA
Gateway Access
AE0043 Gateway Features

AE0059 Language Digit Insertion
BC2059 Translations for CEP
BF0870 XPM Two-Stage Outpulsing
BV1989 Translations for Two-Stage Outpulsing
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX496AA
AE0059
Feature name
Language Digit Insertion
Description
AE0059 allows a language digit or information digit to be inserted in the
digit stream for the Caribbean expansion project (CEP). The digit is
required for international direct distance dialing (IDDD) calls outside North
America, and is inserted immediately following the country code.
BCS history
This feature applies to international offices only.
The digit to be inserted is specified through datafill.
On operator-assisted calls, the language digit is inserted by the operator.
Routes requiring digit insertion must be datafilled twice: once with field
PFXAFTER in table CTRTE datafilled as 2 or 3 for IDDD calls, then with
field PFXAFTER datafilled as 0 for operator-assisted calls.
This feature requires BC1450 (Ambiguous Code Translation for
International).
Datafill
Table Description
ACRTE, Field PFXAFTER is added to specify the position in the digit

CTRTE, stream where digits are to be inserted.
DNRTE,
FARTE,
FTRTE,
OFCRTE, and
PXRTE

NTX496AA NTX496AA
BC2059 BC2059
Feature name
Translations for CEP
Description
BC2059 supports the following functions for exchanges in the Caribbean
expansion project (CEP):
• translation of codes 11 and 12 which define the type of operator the call
should terminate on
• translation of language and discrimination digits that indicate the service
language to be used in the international service
• insertion of KP1 and KP2 signals to indicate that the address signals are
about to be transmitted
These functions are required to comply with characteristics specific to a
Gateway office.
BCS history
Only offices with Gateway characteristics can insert KP2 signals.
Datafill
Table Description
OFCENG The parameter INTL_GATEWAY_OFFICE is added to define an

office as having Gateway characteristics.

NTX496AA
BF0870
Feature name
XPM Two-stage Outpulsing
Description
BF0870 implements the call processing aspects of two-stage outpulsing
(TSO) for the Caribbean expansion project (CEP). TSO is used to provide
indirect access to an international switching center (ISC) by way of one or
more intermediate toll centers.
BCS history
This feature requires BV1989 (Translations for Two-stage Outpulsing).
Datafill
Table Description
OFCVAR Parameter TSO_FIRST_STAGE_TIMEOUT is added to define

the timeout value.

NTX496AA NTX496AA
BV1989 BV1989
Feature name
Translations for Two-stage Outpulsing
Description
BV1989 implements the table control required for two-stage outpulsing
(TSO) for the Caribbean expansion program (CEP). TSO is used to provide
indirect access to an international switching center (ISC) by way of one or
more intermediate toll centers.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
AMCODE, PCC is added to the range of values in the OSEL field to allow
CTCODE, entry of pseudo country codes (PCC).
FACODE,
OFCODE, and Range of values (000 to 999) is added in the PCCDR field to
PXCODE specify the digits for the PCCs.
CTRTE, TSO is added to the range of values in the RTESEL field to

FARTE, indicate that two-stage outpulsing is required on a given trunk.
OFCRTE, and
PXRTE CLLI is added to specify the outgoing trunk.
FSTSTAGE is added to specify the size of the first TSO stage.
FSTNUM is added to specify the TSO digits.

NTX499AA
CEPT Subscriber Services–I
AC0058 CEPT Call Waiting

AC0059 CEPT Three-way Calling
AC0082 CEPT Call Waiting
AC0083 CEPT Three-way Calling
AC0086 Conversion of International ADL
AC0133 International No Double Connect
AC0134 Subscriber Activated Outgoing Restrictions
AC0135 International Subscriber Features Denied
AC0136 International Call Diversion Enhancement
AE0101 Hot Line (Administration Controlled)
AE0239 Completion of Calls to a Bush Subscriber
AE0240 Wake-Up Call
AE0242 Call Transfer Capability
AE0248 Faultsman Ringback Enhancement
AE0249 Silence Switchman
AG0962 Ring Again Foldback
AG1540 DP Activation for Subscriber Services
AJ0563 Casual Features Optionality
AJ1432 ESG Enhancements
BC2053 Abbreviated Dialing
BC2077 Faultsman’s Ringback
BC2260 CEPT Call Diversion
BC2261 CEPT Hot/Warm Line
TA0229 Call Diversion No Answer (CDNA)
TA0325 ILR National/International Immediate Treatment
TA0326 ILR Flash Enhancement
TA0327 ILR Option Enhancements

NTX499AA
BCS history
BSC39i—TA0229 added.
BSC41i—TA0325, TA0326, and TA0327 added.
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX494AA Automatic Call Recording
or

NTX499AA
AC0082
Feature name
CEPT Call Waiting
Description
AC0082 provides call waiting capability for the DMS-100 switch. This
feature allows a subscriber who is on a call to receive a tone indicating
another incoming call. The subscriber has the choice of accepting or
disregarding the incoming call.
BCS history
Call Waiting is not available on coin lines or on lines with Subscriber
Premise Metering (SPM).
• Hunt Groups
• International Feature Metering (IFM)
• Operator Calls
• Plug Up (PLP)
• Suspended Service (SUS)

NTX499AA
AC0082
Datafill
Table Description
FEATCHG A tuple is added to specify feature charges for 3WC and 6WC.
LENLINES CWT is added as a line option.
OFCVAR Office parameter CWT_TIMEOUT is added for international

loads.
Service orders
Service order commands NEW and ADO are used to assign CWT to a
subscriber’s line, DEO and OUT to remove CWT from the line, and QDN or
QLEN to query the status of CWT on the line.
This feature adds the metering option for CWT.

NTX499AA
AC0083
Feature name
CEPT Three-way Calling
Description
AC0083 provides a subscriber with the ability to place an existing two-party
call on hold and set up an enquiry call to another subscriber. This feature
offers two options: Three-way Calling (3WC) and Six-way Calling (6WC).
With the 3WC option, the subscriber placing the call can:
• switch speech paths between the party on hold and the talking party
• connect all parties into a three-port conference
• terminate the conference and reconnect to a single party
With the 6WC option, the subscriber placing the call can:
• switch speech paths between the enquiry call and the parties on the
conference call
• connect the enquiry call into a six-port conference and add up to five
parties to the conference call
• terminate the enquiry call and remain connected to the other parties
BCS history
The 3WC and 6WC options require three-port and six-port conference
circuits, respectively.
3WC or 6WC cannot be initiated from coin lines or lines with Subscriber
Premise Metering (SPM).
All originating restrictions apply to the line initiating the call. All
terminating restrictions apply to the second leg of the three-way or six-way
call.
The original leg of a three-way or six-way call must have been placed
without operator assistance.

NTX499AA
AC0083
• Hot Line (HL)
• Subscriber Activation (SA)
• Warm Line (WL)
Datafill
Table Description
FEATCHG A tuple is added to specify feature charges for 3WC and 6WC.
LENLINES 3WC and 6WC are added as line options.
Service orders
Service order commands NEW and ADO can be used to assign the 3WC and
6WC options to a subscriber’s line, DEO and OUT to remove them from a
line, and QDN or QLEN to query their status on the line.
This feature adds the software metering option for 3WC and 6WC.

NTX499AA
AC0086
Feature name
Conversion of International ADL
Description
AC0086 allows the international feature Abbreviated Dialing (ADL) to use
the same software modules for table control and basic utilities as the North
America feature Speed Calling (SC).
This feature also provides the following capabilities:
• to use ADL control procedures after a flash by a subscriber involved in a
stable call
• to use ADL to dial the target number (TN) for another feature on the
subscriber’s line
BCS history
Service orders
Service order commands NEW and ADO are used to assign the ADL option
to a line, DEO and OUT to remove ADL from a line, and QDN or QLEN to
query the status of ADL on the line. The command CHF is used to change
the size of the ADL list.
Logs
For this feature, log FTR138 replaces log LINE138. Log FTR138 is
generated when a treatment is applied after a subscriber uses ADL.

NTX499AA
AC0133
Feature name
International No Double Connect
Description
AC0133 provides two options for subscribers who wish to avoid
interruptions to a current call by disallowing incoming calls:
• Cancel Call Waiting (CCW) allows a subscriber who has Call Waiting
(CWT) to deactivate CWT for the duration of a call.
• International No Double Connect (INDC) prevents interruptions on all
calls.
BCS history
INDC and CCW are not available on coin lines.
CWT and INDC interact with the following features:
• Hot Line (HL)
• Hunt Groups
• Subscriber Activation (SA)
• Warm Line (WL)

NTX499AA
AC0133
Datafill
Table Description
ACCODE A tuple is added to define subscriber access codes for CWT

and INDC.
FEATCHG A tuple is added to specify feature charges for CWT and INDC.
LENFEAT INDC is added as a new data feature.
Service orders
Service order commands NEW and ADO are used to assign the INDC
option to a subscriber’s line, and DEO and OUT to remove it from a line.
QDN and QLEN are used to query the status of CCW and INDC on the line.
Register ORGFSET in group OTS increments when a subscriber activates
CWT or INDC, or deactivates INDC.
This feature adds the metering option for CWT and INDC.

NTX499AA
AC0134
Feature name
Subscriber-activated Outgoing Restrictions
Description
AC0135 enhances International Line Restrictions (ILR) by providing two
additional classes of restrictions on outgoing calls for a particular subscriber:
• Deny National and all International Direct Dial (DNID) allows only
local calls and calls to an international operator.
• Deny all But Emergency (DABE) allows only emergency calls.
This feature also adds the capability for subscribers to activate any of the
restrictions provided by the ILR feature.
BCS history
Only one class of restriction can be activated on a line at any given time.
A subscriber can activate ILR while a call is in progress.
ILR is not available on coin lines.
• Features Denied (FDN
• Hunt Groups

NTX499AA
AC0134
Datafill
Table Description
ACCODE A tuple is added to define subscriber access codes for ILR.
FEATCHG A tuple is added to specify feature charges for ILR.
LENFEAT Field ILR is modified to include a password for feature activation

and deactivation.
Service orders
Three classes of restrictions are added for ILR: DNID, DABE, and NIL.
NIL indicates that either ILR is not assigned to the line or no restrictions are
currently activated.
Service order commands NEW and ADO are used to assign the additional
ILR restrictions to a subscriber’s line, DEO and OUT to remove them from
the line, and QDN or QLEN to query the status of ILR on the line.
Register OTS-FSET in group OTS increments when a subscriber activates,
deactivates, or queries outgoing restrictions on a line.
Logs
Existing log ISF100 is generated when a subscriber activates or deactivates
one of the ILR restrictions and the journal file is inactive.
This feature adds the metering option for ILR.

NTX499AA
AC0135
Feature name
International Subscriber Features Denied
Description
AC0135 allows the administration to temporarily deny a subscriber the use
of current features without deleting the features from the line. When
Features Denied (FDN) is assigned to a line, all other features on the line
become unavailable to the subscriber. When FDN is removed, all line
options return to the state they were in before FDN was assigned.
BCS history
While FDN is active on a line, only the Malicious Call Trace (MCT) option
can be added to the line.
FDN cannot be added to or deleted from a line to which MCT is currently
assigned.
FDN is available only on lines that have standard features.
Datafill
Table Description
LENLINES FDN is added as a line option.
Service orders
Service order commands NEW and ADO are used to assign FDN to a
subscriber’s line, commands DEO and OUT to remove FDN from the line,
and QDN or QLEN to query the status of the line.

NTX499AA
AC0136
Feature name
International Call Diversion Enhancements
Description
AC0136 enhances current call-diversion capabilities as follows:
• Calls to subscribers with international Call Diversion on Busy (CDB) are
diverted only if the subscriber is busy on another call.
• Subscribers who have international Call Diversion Fixed (CDF) are no
longer responsible for programming the target number (TN). TNs will
be specified by the subscriber but programmed by the administration.
This will prevent the accidental reprogramming of the TN by the
subscriber.
• While international Do Not Disturb (IDND) is active, all calls to the
subscriber’s line are diverted to treatment. This feature is available on
all standard lines and can be activated or deactivated by a subscriber.
BCS history
CDB, CDF, or IDND cannot be activated if another call-diversion feature is
already active on the line.
Only one call will be diverted at a time. Other incoming calls will receive
busy treatment.
CDB, CDF, and IDND are not available on coin lines or dial pulse (DP)
lines.
CDB and CDF are not available on standard lines.
CDB and CDF are incompatible with Free Number Termination (FNT).
CDB and CDF are incompatible with Subscriber Premise Meter (SPM). If a
caller has the SPM option, the called party will be unable to flash and will
therefore be unable to activate CDB or CDF during the call.
When the diversion number is programmed, it is checked for restrictions but
is not validated. The operating company personnel is responsible for
ensuring that valid routing information is entered.
IDND is available on all lines and is not a charge feature.
If the RTE selector is used in call diversion for CDB or CDF, no leg of the
call is charged.

NTX499AA
AC0136
A maximum of five call-diversion legs are allowed within one office. If
there are more than five legs to a diverted call, the call will receive busy
treatment.
Calls originating from operator trunks will not be diverted.
All IDND activation information is lost during office reloads and cold
restarts. Consequently, IDND will become inactive on all lines until
reactivated by subscribers.
• Hot Line (HTL)
• Hunt Groups
• International Feature Metering
• Plug Up (PLP)
• Warm Line (WNL)

NTX499AA
AC0136
Datafill
Table Description
ACCODE A tuple is added to define subscriber access codes for CDB,

CDF, and IDND.
FEATCHG A tuple is added to specify feature charges for CDB and CDF.
LENFEAT CDB and CDF are added as line options.
OFCVAR Parameter DND_ROUTE is added to allow diversion route

(usually an announcement or treatment) for IDND to be
specified.
Service orders
This feature creates a new service order command, DELCF. DELCF (Delete
Casual Feature) is used to remove IDND from a line.
The service order commands NEW and ADO are used to assign CDB and
CDF to a subscriber’s line, commands DEO and OUT to remove them from
the line, and QDN or QLEN to query their status on the line.
Register FSET in group OTS increments when a subscriber activates,
deactivates, or queries CDB, CDF, or IDND.
Logs
This feature creates log CDIV100, which is generated when a call diversion
is denied because no EXTs are available.
Existing log ISF100 is generated when CDB or CDF is activated or
deactivated while the journal file is inactive.
This feature adds the metering option for CDB and CDF.

NTX499AA
AE0239
Feature name
Completion of Calls to a Busy Subscriber
Description
AE0239 allows a caller, after encountering a busy line on an intra-office call,
to be notified when the called line becomes idle and have the call re-initiated
without dialing the number again.
BCS history
The international Ring Again (IRAG) feature is available on intra-office
calls only.
IRAG cannot be assigned to the following lines, but IRAG requests can be
activated against calls to them: coin, dial pulse (DP), Semi-permanent
Connection (SPC), and Subscriber Premise Meter (SPM).
A subscriber may make only one IRAG request on each call. If an IRAG
request is queued and the subscriber activates a second IRAG request, the
first request is cancelled and the second request becomes the active request.
A busy line may have more than one IRAG request activated against it. In
this case, the requests will be placed in a queue and served in the order in
which they were activated. A maximum of eight IRAG requests can be
queued.
A subscriber cannot activate an IRAG request against an operator.
A subscriber cannot activate an IRAG request against a line that has already
activated an IRAG request.
• Cancel Call Waiting (CCW)
• Do Not Disturb (IDND)
• Emergency Standby Access (ESA)

NTX499AA
AE0239
• Force Release (FRLS)
• Hot Line (HTL)
• Hotel Line (HOTEL)
• Hunt Groups
• International Feature Metering
• No Double Connect (INDC)
• Plug Up (PLP)
• Wake Up Call (WUC)
• Warm Line (WNL)
Datafill
Table Description
ACCODE A tuple is added to define subscriber access codes for IRAG.
FEATCHG A tuple is added to specify feature charges for IRAG.
Service orders
The service order commands NEW and ADO are used to assign IRAG to a
subscriber’s line, DEO to remove it from the line, and QDN or QLEN to
query its status on the line.
This feature uses the following registers in operational measurements (OM)
group IRAG:
• RAGACT increments when a subscriber successfully activates IRAG.
• RAGDACT increments when a subscriber successfully deactivates
IRAG.

NTX499AA
AE0239
• RAGINTG increments when a subscriber who has IRAG queries the
status of the feature on the line.
• RAGUSGE increments when the IRAG feature is successful, that is,
when the subscriber is connected to the line that was previously busy.
• RAGABDN increments when the IRAG feature is unsuccessful because
the re-call time elapsed or because of restrictions on the originating or
terminating lines.
• RAGOVFL increments when there are not enough IRAG resources
available.
• RAGCERR increments when an attempt is made to activate IRAG on a
line over a trunk or when IRAG is denied because of feature interactions.
This feature adds the metering option for IRAG.

NTX499AA
AE0240
Feature name
Wake-up Call
Description
AE0240 allows a wake-up call announcement to be given to a subscriber, at
a time pre-determined by the subscriber. If the call is not answered, a
second call is made later, at a time specified by the operating company. If
the second call is not answered, no further call attempts are made.
This feature is available to all subscribers.
BCS history
This feature is not compatible with Coin lines or dial pulse (DP) lines.
The number of lines with outstanding wake-up call (WUC) requests cannot
exceed 10% of the capacity of the switch.
The number of lines with outstanding WUC requests for a 5-min interval
cannot exceed 2% of the capacity of a line concentrating module (LCM).
A maximum of three outstanding WUC requests are permitted on a line.
A wake-up call cannot be requested more than 23 h and 55 min before the
call is to be placed.
The operating company can delete or query WUC requests, but only the
subscriber is allowed to activate a wake-up call request.
WUC requests may be lost because of clock changes or reload-from-tape
restarts.
• Call Diversion on Busy (CDB)
• Hot Line (HTL)
• Hunt Groups

NTX499AA
AE0240
• Plug Up (PLP)
• Warm Line (WNL)
Datafill
Table Description
ACCODE WUC is added to specify the feature activation and deactivation

code.
FEATCHG WUC is added to specify charges for WUC.
OFCENG Parameter WAKEUP_REREQUEST_DELAY is added to specify

the time delay before a second WUC attempt is made if the first
attempt was not answered.
Parameter WAKEUP_RINGING_TMO is added to specify the

length of time ringing will be applied to the subscriber’s line for
a wake-up call.
Service orders
Service order commands can be used to include, update, and query the WUC
feature on a subscriber’s line.
This feature creates operational measurements (OM) group IWUC, which
contains the following registers: WUCABDN, WUCACT, WUCCERR,
WUCDACT, WUCDENY, WUCINTG, WUCNRSR, WUCOVFL,
WUCRSET, and WUCUSGE.
Logs
This features creates logs ISF102, ISF103, and ISF104.
Log ISF102 is generated when a wake-up call fails to complete. The report
gives the reason for the failure.
Log ISF103 is generated when a wake-up call is not answered or terminates
on a busy line.
Log ISF104 is generated when a WUC request cannot be transferred to the
inactive unit.

NTX499AA
AE0240
User interface
The command interpreter (CI) command QWAKEUP is added to allow the
operating company to query outstanding WUC requests.

NTX499AA
AE0242
Feature name
Call Transfer Capability
Description
AE0242 allows a subscriber to transfer a call to a third party. When the
second and third parties are connected, the subscriber initiating the transfer
is released from the call.
BCS history
International Call Transfer (ICT) cannot be assigned to coin lines. ICT is
denied if a call extension block cannot be allocated. ICT is denied if there
are more than six call legs within one office.
ICT is denied if both legs of a transferred or a three-way call are initiated by
the same subscriber, are interoffice calls, and terminate on lines with Free
Number Termination (FNT).
Only one of the parties involved in a transferred call may have been
previously diverted to the call.
ICT cannot be initiated by a subscriber involved in a six-way conference call
(6WC).
• Hot Line (HTL)
• Hunt Groups

NTX499AA
AE0242
• Operator Calls
• Plug Up (PLP)
• Warm Line (WNL)
Datafill
Table Description
FEATCHG A tuple is added to specify feature charges for ICT.
OFCENG Parameter NUM_ICT_EXT_BLKS is added to specify the

number of call extension blocks available for ICT.
OFCVAR Parameter ICT_DN_CHECK is added to specify restrictions on

ICT destinations.
Service orders
Service order commands NEW and ADO are used to assign ICT to a
subscriber’s line, DEO and OUT to remove it from the line, and QDN or
QLEN to query the status of ICT on the line.
This feature creates group ICT to provide information about the
performance of the ICT feature. Group EXT contains the following
registers.
• ICTUSGE increments when a call is transferred successfully.
• ICTDENY increments when ICT is denied because of restrictions.
• ICTOVFL increments when ICT is denied because of insufficient
extension blocks.
• ICTCERR increments when the call cannot be transferred because of
subscriber error.
This feature adds the following registers to group EXT: EXTOVFL,
EXTUSAGE, and EXTHI.
This feature adds the metering option for ICT.

NTX499AA
AE0248
Feature name
Faultsman Ringback Enhancement
Description
AE0248 enhances the existing support for direct maintenance (maintenance
requiring no operator intervention) implemented by the Faultsman’s
Ringback feature (BC2077). AE0248 provides the Faultsman Digit Test
(FDT) which allows operating company personnel to test a telephone from
the subscriber’s premises. FDT verifies both the operation of the telephone
and the datafill for the line.
BCS history
FDT applies to residential and coin lines. The feature provides test
sequences for both dial pulse (DP) and dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF)
telephones.
FDT cannot be accessed from a telephone with a line class code of SPC
(Semi-permanent Connection).
FDT is incompatible with Malicious Call Trace (MCT), Three-way Calling
(3WC), and Six-way Calling (6WC).
• Hot Line (HTL)
• Hunt Groups
• Operator Calls
• Plug Up (PLP)

NTX499AA
AE0248
• Warm Line (WLN)
Datafill
Table Description
CTCODE FDT is added to the range of values in field FTR to translate the
code in table PXCODE into access to FDT.
FACODE FDT is added to the range of values in field FTR to translate the
OFCCODE FDT is added to the range of values in field FTR to translate the
PXCODE FDT is added to the range of values in field FTR to give

operating company personnel access to FDT in the field.
Logs
This features creates logs DNC100 and DRT100.
Log DNC100 is generated when a directory number check fails (indicating a
datafill error).
Log DRT100 is generated when a digit reception check fails (indicating a
malfunction in the telephone set).

NTX499AA
AE0249
Feature name
Silent Switchman
Description
AE0249 allows operating company personnel to test a telephone set without
assistance from administration personnel at the central office.
This feature disconnects a subscriber’s line from the central office, leaving
an open circuit for a predetermined period of time. During this time,
operating company personnel can test the loop to ensure that there is an open
circuit at the office.
BCS history
This feature is compatible with the following line cards:
• NT6X93AA (standard line circuit type A)
• NT6X93BA (line card international CEP POTS type A)
• NT6X94AA (line circuit type B 600 Ω with metering)
• NT6X94BA (line circuit type B)
• NT6X94BB (line card international CEP type B)
Once datafilled, this feature is available on coin and standard lines.

However, it cannot be accessed from a line that has a line class code of SPC
(Semi-permanent Connection).
• Emergency Line (ELN)
• Hot Line (HTL)
• Hunt Groups
• No Double Connect (NDC)
• Plug Up (PLP)

NTX499AA
AE0249
Datafill
Table Description
OFCVAR Parameter INTL_SILENT_SWITCHMAN_TMO is added to

specify the length of time the line is disconnected.
PXCODE SSM is added to field FTR to allow operating company

personnel access to this feature in the field.

NTX499AA
AG0962
Feature name
RAG Foldback
Description
AG0962 changes the name of the International Ring Again (IRAG) feature
to conform to the name of North American Ring Again feature—RAG. The
change has no effect on the functionality of the features or on subscribers.
BCS history
In a DMS switch with both domestic and international capabilities, a
domestic line can only activate RAG against another domestic line. RAG on
an international line, referred to as CEPT RAG, can only be activated
against another international line.
Datafill
Table Description
ACCODE IRAG is changed to RAG in field FTR to specify access codes

for the Ring Again feature.
FEATCHG IRAG is changed to RAG to specify feature charges for the

Ring Again feature.
Service orders
Service order commands NEW and ADO are used to assign RAG to a
subscriber’s line, DEO and OUT to remove it from the line, and QDN or
QLEN to query its status on the line.

NTX499AA
AG1540
Feature name
DP Activation for Subscriber Services
Description
AG1540 allows subscribers with dial pulse (DP) lines to activate the features
listed below, in the column on the left. The column on the right contains the
name used in China for each feature.
• Call Diversion to Announcement (CDA)
• Call Diversion Fixed (CDF)
• Call Diversion to Operator (CDO) Absent Subscriber Service
• Call Diversion to Subscriber (CDS) Call Transfer
• Cancel Call Waiting (CCW) Deactivate Call Waiting
• Call Waiting (CWT) Activate Call Waiting
• International Do Not Disturb (IDND) Do Not Disturb Service
• International Line Restrictions (ILR) Outgoing Call Barring
• Ring Again (RAG) Call Back
• Subscriber Call Recording (SCR)
• Warm Line (WLN) Hot Line
• Wakeup Call (WUC) Alarmcall Service
BCS history
DP lines include push button DP telephones and rotary dial telephones.
If digit analysis is used, then directory numbers (DN) beginning with the
same digits as the service codes are not allowed. For China, DNs beginning
with 15 or 16 are prohibited.

NTX499AA
AJ0563
Feature name
Casual Feature Optionality
Description
AJ0563 allows the administration to control whether the Do Not Disturb
(IDND) and Wake-up Call (WUC) features are offered as line options or as
casual features (available on all lines).
BCS history
WUC and IDND appear as an assignable options in table FEATCHG.
However, they can only be assigned when configured as line options.
IDND and WUC can be activated by a flash if a flash feature is assigned to
the same line.
To have accurate line data, service orders (SO) must be used to assign IDND
and WUC to the line.
This feature adds a state field to allow IDND to be offered as a line option.
When the QDN command is issued, the state field is printed whether IDND
is offered as a casual feature or a line option.
IDND is incompatible with the following features:
• Attendant Pay Station (APS)
• Emergency Service Groups (ESG)
• Hotel and Motel (HOT)
• Subscriber Premise Service (SPM)
WUC is incompatible with the following features:

• Hunt Groups (BNN, CIR, DLH, DNH, MLH, OF, and OFS)
• Plug Up (PLP)
IDND and WUC interact with the following features:

NTX499AA
AJ0563
Datafill
Table Description
FEATCHG Field ADMACT is modified to add an administration activation

tariff for IDND.
Field ASSIGN is modified to add an assignment tariff for WUC

and IDND.
LENLINES WUC is added to the range of values in field OPTLIST to allow

WUC to be assigned to a line using service orders.
LENFEAT IDND is added to the range of values in field DF to allow IDND

to be assigned to a line using service orders.
OFCOPT Parameter CASUAL_FEATURES_OFF is added.
When the parameter CASUAL_FEATURES_OFF is set to YES, IDND and

WUC are offered as line options; when it is set to NO, IDND and WUC are
handled as casual features which are available on all lines. This parameter
takes effect only after a restart is performed.
Service orders
IDND and WUC can be added, changed, or deleted as line options using
service orders if the CASUAL_FEATURES_OFF parameter is set to YES.

NTX499AA
AJ1432
Feature name
ESG Enhancements
Description
AJ1432 enhances the Emergency Service Group (ESG) feature by adding an
audible alarm and causing log ESG100 to be generated for each call that
comes in to an ESG station.
BCS history
It is not necessary for the attendant to flash to create a log of the call.
The ESG alarm will be turned off on all restarts.
If the severity of the ESG alarm is changed while the alarm is on, and the
alarm is then turned off, the counts displayed at the EXT level of the MAP
(maintenance and administration position) display are not updated until they
are recalculated by the alarm audit.
For intraoffice calls, log ESG100 contains the subscriber’s number. For
interoffice calls, the log contains the common language identifier (CLLI) of
the incoming trunk used by the call.
Datafill
Table Description
OFCVAR Parameter ESG_ALARM is added to enable or disable the ESG

alarm.
SFWALARM Tuple is added to datafill severity level for ESG_ALARM.
Office parameter ESG_ALARM in table OFCVAR must be set to YES for

each incoming call to trigger the audible alarm. YES is the default value.
Data in table SFWALARM can be changed, but not deleted or added.
Logs
Log ESG100 is generated for each call to an ESG station.
User interface
The command interpreter (CI) command ESGOFF turns off the ESG alarm.

NTX499AA
BC2053
Feature name
Abbreviated Dialing
Description
BC2053 provides subscribers with a short way of dialing local, national, or
international numbers. Subscribers can specify a list of target numbers,
assign a one- or two-digit code to each number, then dial the code to reach
the number the code is assigned to.
BCS history
An abbreviated code cannot contain more than 16 digits.
This feature is not available on coin lines.
All Abbreviated Dialing (ADL) data will survive warm, cold, and
reload-from-command restarts.
All changes to a cell in a subscriber’s list are entered in the journal file. If
the file is not active, a log is generated whenever a cell is modified.
If office data is reloaded from the image file, the journal file must be run to
make ADL information available.
The journal file must be run after every reload from the image file or all
ADL changes will be lost.
ADL will not override restrictions imposed by features such as Denied
Origination, Plug Up, and Suspend.
Datafill
Table Description
LENFEAT ADL is added as a new line feature.
Table SCALLTAB is used to store the target numbers selected by the

subscriber.
This feature increases data store by 1.5 kilowords for storing the lists and
2 words for each cell.
OTS_FSET in OM group OTS increments when a subscriber adds, changes,
deletes, or queries a cell in an ADL list.

NTX499AA
BC2053
Logs
Log ISF100 is generated when a subscriber changes the contents of a cell
while the journal file is inactive.

NTX499AA
BC2077
Feature name
Faultsman’s Ringback
Description
BC2077 allows operating company personnel to test a line while they are on
the subscriber’s premises, without assistance from the central office. This
feature also provides ringing on the telephone set so that the ringer can be
tested and adjusted if necessary.
BCS history
This feature requires a digital recording announcement machine (DRAM).
Faultsman’s Ringback (FRB) applies to dial pulse (DP) and dual-tone
multifrequency (DTMF) telephones on all types of lines.
While FRB is active, the line being tested is marked busy and no other calls
are allowed.
FRB cannot be applied on a line that has the Denied Origination (DOR)
feature activated on it.
Datafill
Table Description
CLLI FRBTONE is added to allow FRB to access the

acknowledgement tone used to confirm a request for the
feature.
OFCOPT Parameter FRB_RINGING_TIME is added to specify the length

of time ringing is sent to the line before the line is set to idle.
PXCODE FRB is added to the range of values in field FTR to specify the
access code for this feature.
Logs
This feature creates log FRB100. Log FRB100 is generated when ringback
is unsuccessful.

NTX499AA
BC2260
Feature name
CEPT Call Diversion
Description
BC2260 provides the following call-diversion options:
• Call Diversion to Announcement or Do Not Disturb (CDA)
• Call Diversion to Subscriber or Diversion of All Calls (CDS)
This feature also provides the capability for subscribers to activate and
deactivate CDA, CDS, and the existing option Call Diversion to Operator
(CDO). Call diversion options allow subscribers to reroute all calls to
another subscriber, an announcement, or an operator.
BCS history
CDA, CDO, and CDS are incompatible with Free Number Termination
(FNT) and Subscriber Premise Meter (SPM).
Only one call-diversion feature can be active on a line at a time.
Calls are diverted through a base station one call at a time. Additional calls
diverted to the base station will receive busy treatment.
Except for restricted numbers, routing information for call diversion is not
validated. Therefore, the individual programming CDA, CDO, or CDS must
ensure that valid routing information is entered.
Calls originating from operator trunks are not diverted.
• coin lines
• Dial Pulse (DP) lines
• Hot Line (HTL)
• hunt groups

NTX499AA
BC2260
• Plug Up (PLP)
Datafill
Table Description
ACCODE CDA, CDO, and CDS are added to specify the access codes for
the call-diversion features.
FEATCHG A tuple is added to specify feature charges for CDA, CDO, and
CDS.
FTCODE Restricted destinations for CDA, CDO, and CDS are added.
LENFEAT CDA and CDS are added as line options. Fields XLASYS and
XLANAME are removed.
OFCVAR CDS_DN_CHECK is added to specify the name of the table

used to screen call-diversion destinations. Parameter
CDIV_SDN_XLA is modified.
Service orders
Service order commands NEW and ADO are used to assign CDA, CDO, and
CDS to a subscriber’s line, DEO and OUT to remove them from the line,
and QDN or QLEN to query their status on the line. The command CHF is
used to change data for call-diversion features that are current line options.
Existing register ORGFSET in group OTS increments when a subscriber
activates or deactivates CDA, CDO, or CDS.
Logs
Existing log ISF100 is generated when a subscriber activates or deactivates
CDA, CDO, or CDS while the journal file is inactive.
Existing log AUDT617 has been renamed AUDT625.

NTX499AA
BC2260
User interface
Service order command CHF is added for international switches. This
command allows the administration to enter new data for a feature while the
feature is assigned as a line option.
This feature adds the software metering option for CDA, CDO, and CDS.

NTX499AA
BC2261
Feature name
CEPT Hot and Warm Line
Description
BC2261 implements Hot Line (HTL) and Warm Line (WLN) features for a
DMS-100 switch outside North America. HTL and WLN allow a subscriber
to call a predetermined directory number (DN) without dialing any digits.
WLN also allows the subscriber to override the predetermined DN and place
a call to another DN.
HTL and WLN are assigned and programmed by the administration. WLN
can also be programmed, activated, and deactivated by the subscriber.
BCS history
HTL is incompatible with WLN.
Abbreviated Dialing (ADL) and WLN are incompatible with HTL.
HTL cannot be assigned to coin lines.
WLN is available on standard lines only.
No routing or translation verification is done when the target number (TN) is
programmed.
Datafill
Table Description
ACCODE Three tuples are added to specify access codes for HTL and
WLN.
FEATCHG Two tuples are added to specify feature charges for HTL and
WLN.
LENFEAT HTL and WLN are added as line options.
OFCVAR Parameter WLN_DEFAULT_TIMEOUT is added to specify the

default timeout value for the office.
Service orders
Service order commands NEW and ADO are used to assign HTL and WLN
to a subscriber’s line, DEO and OUT to remove them from the line, and
QDN or QLEN to query their status on the line.

NTX499AA
BC2261
Existing register ORGFSET in group OTS increments when a subscriber
activates or deactivates WLN.
Logs
Existing log ISF100 is generated when HTL or WLN data is changed while
the journal file is inactive.
This feature adds the metering option for HTL and WLN.

NTX499AA
TA0229
Feature name
Call Diversion No Answer (CDNA)
Description
This feature implements call diversion on no answer (CDNA), call diversion
on no answer fixed (CDNAF), and call diversion on busy fixed (CDBF)
options for the DMS-100 Family of switches.
CDNA diverts incoming calls to a designated subscriber if the called
subscriber does not answer in a prescribed time. The subscriber may
activate, deactivate, query, and program CDNA.
CDNAF diverts incoming calls to a designated subscriber if the called
subscriber does not answer in a prescribed time. The subscriber may
activate, deactivate, and query CDNAF.
CDBF diverts incoming calls to a designated subscriber when the called
subscriber line is busy. The subscriber may activate, deactivate, and query
CDBF.
BCS history
If glare occurs on the selected trunk while CDNA or CDNAF is active, no
reattempt is made and call diversion fails.
The administration is responsible for providing routing information when
programming CDNAF and CDBF. Subscriber programming of CDNA
overrides administration programming and the subscriber is responsible for
providing routing information.
Only one call is diverted at a time. If either CDNA, CDNAF, or CDBF is
active, other incoming calls receive a busy treatment.
Calls originating on one the following types of trunks are not diverted:
• an operator trunk
• MTC_EQ category trunk
Toll Break-in (TBI) calls take precedence over call diversion; calls from
operator trunks receive a busy treatment.
A maximum of five call diversion legs within one office are allowed for
CDNA, CDNAF, and CDBF. Calls attempting more than five legs receive a
busy treatment.

NTX499AA
TA0229
CDNA, CDNAF, and CDBF legs created using the route (RTE) selector are
not metered.
On multifrequency (MF) and dial pulse (DP) trunks, a gap occurs in the
ring-back tone applied from the terminating end during the call setup time of
the second leg.
Active features on the line may impose restrictions on a subscriber’s ability
to activate, deactivate, query, or program CDNA, CDNAF, and CDBF
during a two-port call.
CDA, CDF, CDO, and CDS cannot be active simultaneously with CDB,
CDBF, CDNA, or CDNAF.
Call diversion options can be activated for only 10% of the maximum
number of subscribers in an office.
Suspension (SUS) takes precedence over call diversion.
Hunt groups can have call diversion, but only one call from each directory
number may be diverted at a time. When a call is being diverted, a busy
signal is applied to other incoming calls.
Subscribers can divert calls to, but not from, lines with the following
features activated:
• Hot Line (HTL)
• Warm Line (WLN)
• Free Number Termination (FNT) line
This feature is incompatible with subscriber premise meter (SPM) options.

When Malicious Call Trace (MCT) is performed on calls diverted by CDNA
and CDNAF over interoffice trunks, the call is traced back to the line which
diverts the call.
This feature requires feature AC0136 (International Call Diversion
Enhancements).
CDB, when activated, overrides Call Waiting (CWT) on a line equipped
with both features.

NTX499AA
TA0229
Datafill
Table Description
ACCODE Subfield IXLATYPE is extended to datafill the access codes and

dialing sequences for CDNA, CDNAF, AND CDBF.
FEATCHG Table is modified to datafill charge units for CDNA, CDNAF, and
CDBF.
Office parameter CALL_DIVERSION_DIV_NO_ANSWER_TIMEOUT is

added to table OFCVAR to provide timing options.
Service orders
Service order commands can be used to add, remove, or query CDNA,
CDNAF, and CDBF.
This feature adds the following registers to office measurement group
ICDIVF to measure usage of International Call Diversion Fixed (ICDF)
features:
• CDNAFACT
• CDNAFDAC
• CDNAFINT
• CDNAFUSE
• CDNAFDNY
• CDNAFOVF
• CDNAFCER
• CDNAFDER
• CDBFACT
• CDBFDACT
• CDBFINTG
• CDBFUSGE
• CDBFDENY
• CDBFOVFL
• CDBFCERR
• CDBFDERR

NTX499AA
TA0229
This feature adds OM group ICDIVP1 to measure usage of international
CDNA features and implements the following registers:
• CDNAACT
• CDNAPROG
• CDNADACT
• CDNAINTG
• CDAUSGE
• CDNSDENY
• CDNAOVFL
• CDNACERR
• CDNADERR

NTX499AA NTX499AA
TA0325 TA0325
Feature name
ILR National/International Immediate Treatment
Description
This feature provides immediate treatment to a subscriber that has
International Line Restriction (ILR) for the restricted calls upon dialing
minimum digits. When the subscriber dials national access digits or
international access digits immediate treatment is applied without waiting
for the rest of the digits.
BCS history
If route information cannot be retrieved along with the call CLASS
information overlap functionality cannot be operational for such calls.
In table LINEATTR, a new line attribute index must be datafilled and a new
name must be given to DGCLNAME tuple. In table LENLINES line the
line attribute index must be the same with the value entered in table
LINEATTR. By using the same name entered in DGCLNAME tuple new
tuples must be datafilled in DGCODE and DGHEAD tables.

NTX499AA
TA0326
Feature name
ILR Flash Enhancement
Description
This feature provides the option to remove flash functionality on a line that
has ILR option assigned. The subscriber that has ILR cannot activate,
deactivate and interrogate the ILR option while in talking state. Activation,
deactivation and interrogation can only be initiated from a line that is in idle
state.
BCS history
This feature enables to remove the flash functionality on a line where only
ILR option is assigned.
Datafill
Table Description
OFCVAR A new office parameter ILR_FLASH_DISABLE is created

NTX499AA NTX499AA
TA0327 TA0327
Feature name
ILR Option Enhancements
Description
This feature adds three more restriction classes to the International Line
Restriction (ILR) option. These restriction classes are listed below:
• DSSV Special Service calls are denied
• DANID All national and international direct dial calls are denied
• DABLE All calls except local and emergency calls are denied
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
LENFEAT DSSV, DANID, DABLE classes are added to the option of ILR
Service orders
This feature adds three new classes called DSSV, DANID and DABLE to
restriction classes (ILRCLASS) and these classes are activated, deactivated,
adminsitered and interrogated by the subscriber.
The OM field is extended for the DSSV class as follows:
• DSSVACT is increased for activation of DSSV class
• DSSVDACT is increased for deactivation of DSSV class
• DSSVUSGE is increased for for the usage of DSSV class
The OM field is extended for the DABNID class as follows:

• DANIDACT is increased for activation of DANID class
• DANIDDAC is increased for deactivation of DANID class
• DANIDUSG is increased for for the usage of DANID class
The OM field is extended for the DABLE class as follows:

• DABLEACT is increased for activation of DABLE class
• DABLEDAC is increased for deactivation of DABLE class
• DABLEUSG is increased for for the usage of DABLE class

NTX499AA
TA0327
Subscriber activated line restrictions can be charged for assignment,
subscriber activation and administration according to datafill of the table
FEATCHG.

NTX650AA
TS16 Signaling for R1
AE0034 R1 and R1 Modified Signaling for DMS-100I
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX650AA
AE0034
Feature name
R1 and R1 Modified Signaling for DMS-100
Description
AE0034 implements R1 modified signaling in the DMS-100 switch for the
Caribbean expansion program (CEP). R1 modified signaling is a
combination of the following:
• R1 CCITT register signaling, and
• CCITT No. 5 register signaling requirements for codes 11 and 12, and
KP2 register signals
BCS history
• BC2057 CC Support for R1 and R1 Mod Signaling
• BC2059 Translations for CEP
• BC2057 CC Support for R1 and R1 Mod Signaling

NTX652AA
Intraswitching on the IRLCM
AE0108 Intraswitching on the IRLCM

AE0178 Intraswitching on the IRLCM for Subscriber
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX651AA IRLCM
or

NTX652AA
AE0108
Feature name
Intraswitching on the IRLCM
Description
AE0108 implements intraswitching (IS) on an international remote line
concentrating module (IRLCM). This feature allows a call between two
parties located on the same remote peripheral module (PM) to be connected
by way of the PM rather than the network.
Intraswitching reduces the demand for PCM30 channels between the
IRLCM and the international line group controller (ILGC), and for DS30
channels between the ILGC and the central control (CC).
BCS history
• Subscriber Premise Metering (SPM)
Datafill
Table Description
OFCOPT Parameter INTL_INTRASWITCHING is added to turn

intraswitching ON and OFF.
The following registers in operational measurements (OM) group RLCDIS
are incremented: ISTOTATT, ISTOTBLK, ISTOTTRU, ISUN0ATT,
ISUN0BLK, ISUN0TRU, ISUN1ATT, ISUN1BLK, and ISUN1TRU.

NTX652AA
AE0178
Feature name
Intraswitching on IRLCM for Subscriber Features
Description
AE0178 allows Call Waiting (CWT), Three-way Calling (3WC), or Six-way
Calling (6WC) to be activated on a call that has been intraswitched between
two parties on the same international remote line concentrating module
(IRLCM). When the subscriber activates CWT, 3WC, or 6WC, the
intraswitched connection is broken and a network connect is made instead.
This feature also allows Toll Break-in (TBI) to be applied on an
intraswitched call.
BCS history
This feature applies to international offices only.
TBI is not supported for the Caribbean expansion program (CEP).

NTX653AA
IRLCM–Emergency Stand Alone (ESA)
AE0216 ESA for IRLCM–Basic

TA0240 IESA Enhanced Recovery
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
or

NTX653AA
AE0216
Feature name
ESA for IRLCM – Basic
Description
AE0216 implements emergency stand alone (ESA) on the international
remote line concentrating module (IRLCM). If communication links to the
host are lost, this feature allows calls originating and terminating on the
same IRLCM to complete while other calls are routed to treatment.
BCS history
Features that use announcement or conference circuits are not supported.
Logs
This feature creates the following logs:
• ESA111, which is generated when the maximum number of tuples
datafilled in the ESA line attribute table has been exceeded
• ESA112, which is generated when the maximum number of tuples
datafilled in ESA translation tables has been exceeded

NTX653AA
TA0240
Feature name
IESA Enhanced Recovery
Description
This feature provides automatic recovery of International Emergency Stand
Alone (IESA) static data. During maintenance, if the IESA static data
becomes corrupted, automatic recovery is called. The IESA static data is
restored and maintenance continues to recover the IESA static data.
This feature ensures that the ESA does not stay in system busy (SysB) state
if the IESA static data is corrupted. It also saves system resources by
preventing unnecessary running of the automatic system maintenance.
Automatic recovery is provided during the following maintenance actions:
• Automatic REX testing of the ESA function
• Automatic and manual REX testing of the International Remote Line
Concentrating Module (IRLCM)
• nightly update process for ESA
• Exiting from ESA mode
• return to service (RTS) process of ESA after busying
• RTS process at the IRLCM
If the IESA static data is corrupted while one of these maintenance actions is
running, the ESA Data Recovery step is added to the existing steps that
maintenance actions require before the ESA Data Build step.
While the IESA static data is being updated or recovered, it is considered as

corrupt. There is no need for automatic recovery when this type of
corruption exists because as soon as updating or recovering is accomplished,
the data is considered as correct. If a maintenance process is running during
update or recovery the maintenance fails and the ESA goes to the SysB state
at the end of each maintenance period until the IESA static data has
corrected itself.
BCS history

NTX653AA
TA0240
Automatic recovery may not suceed if one or more of the following
conditions exist:
• office traffic is high
• other maintenance actions are taking place
• datafill combinations have been entered that do not allow automatic
recovery
Logs
This feature modifies the PM181 to provide additional messages relating to
ESA static data. Under SysB conditions the PM181 information log is
generated and explanation messages are displayed at the appropriate level of
the maintenance and administration position (MAP). The log message also
indicates whether automatic recovery is successful or not.
User interface
If a customer interface (CI) command is rejected due to IESA static data
corruption an appropriate message is displayed at the MAP. Explanatory
messages are also displayed at the appropriate MAP level if ESA goes into
the SysB state and during automatic recovery.

NTX655AA
E & M Signaling in TS16
AE0025 E & M Decadic Signaling for DMS-100I
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX655AA
AE0025
Feature name
E and M Decadic Signaling for DMS-100
Description
AE0025 provides table control and signaling for incoming and outgoing
trunks using E and M signaling. E and M signaling is required for
interworking in the Caribbean expansion program (CEP). The line signaling
system is referred to as NTLS11 and the register signaling system is referred
to as NTRS05.
BCS history
• Metering over Junction
• Operator Signals
• Trunk Offering
• Two-way Trunks
Datafill
Table Description
LNSIGSYS Selector NTLS11 is added to provide data for incoming and

outgoing E and M signaling.
RGSIGSYS Selector NTRS05 is added to provide data for incoming and

outgoing E and M signaling.

NTX656AA
CEP Tone Plan
BF0869 Caribbean Audible Tones
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
or

NTX656AA
BF0869
Feature name
Caribbean Audible Tones
Description
BF0869 implements the new tone plan for the Caribbean. This feature
provides two new tones: the special information tone and the payphone
recognition tone.
BCS history
This feature requires the following cards:
• NT1X76 (digital recording announcement machine)
• NT6X43FA (conference circuit with TBI tone)

NTX657AA
International CAMA
AE0147 International CAMA
39005622 CTUP original called address (OCA)
BCS history
Feature 39005622 was added in BCS44.1i.
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX657AA
AE0147
Feature name
International CAMA
Description
AE0147 implements international centralized automatic message accounting
(ICAMA) in the DMS-200 switch. ICAMA records information on
international calls that originate on automatic number identification (ANI)
trunks, and routes the data to permanent storage, tape, or disk.
This feature implements the collection, selection, formatting, and output of
the call data.
BCS history
• AE0115 ANI Reception in DMS-200
This feature applies to DMS-200 international switches only.
Datafill
Table Description
OFCENG Parameter NUM_ICAMA_RECORDING_UNITS is added to

specify the number of recording units to be allocated for ICAMA.
OFCVAR Parameter GENERATE_ICAMA_LOG_ENTRY is added to

control the generation of a log report when an ICAMA record is
created.
Parameter ICAMA_ANI_FAILURE_ACTION is added to allow

ICAMA to be switched ON or OFF for the office.
Parameter ICAMA_REQUESTED is added to specify if a call is

allowed to continue after an ANI failure.
Parameter INTL_RU_OVFL_ACTION is added to specify if a

call is allowed to continue if a recording unit cannot be
allocated.

NTX657AA
AE0147
Logs
• AMAB160, which is generated each time an ICAMA record is created.
• AMAB161, which is generated when an ICAMA record cannot be
created because of insufficient recording units.
This feature creates two new logs:

NTX657AA
39005622
Feature name
CTUP original called address (OCA)
Description
This feature provides the original called address (OCA) parameter.
Operating company personnel can enter data for the OCA and the calling
line identity (CLI) in the initial address message with additional information
(IAI).
This feature applies to the following interworkings:
• line to Chinese telephone user part (CTUP)
• CTUP to CTUP
• CTUP to ISDN user part (ISUP)
• CTUP to C1
• CTUP to primary rate interface (PRI)
• CTUP to basic rate interface (BRI)
The OCA feature operates when subscriber A calls subscriber B, and

subscriber B diverts the call to subscriber C. The IAI message includes the
OCA parameter. The subsequent office receives the call with the
information about the call if table C7IAIOPT already contains the OCA
data.
For a toll-tandem office, the system originates the general request message
(GRQ) if the switch does not receive CLI.
For a toll office, the system originates GRQ if the switch does not receive
CLI or OCA. The switch sends the initial address message (IAM) on the
outgoing calls on the originating toll office. If the system receives either
CLI or OCA, a GRQ message is not necessary.
For a redirection office, if a line has option CDNA, the system originates
GRQ/general forward setup information message (GSM). For other options,
the system does not originate GRQ/GSM.
For a local office, the system sends the IAM for local diverted calls.
BCS history
This feature was introduced in BCS44.1i.
Not applicable

NTX657AA
39005622
Not applicable
The different first digit for 8-digit workaround feature causes a change in the
operation of this feature. For C1 and CTUP trunks, the system adds a prefix
number to the directory number (DN) if office parameter
EXTENDED_ANI_PREFIX is ‘Y’.
Datafill
Not applicable
Service orders
Not applicable
Not applicable
Logs
Not applicable
User interface
Not applicable
The DMS100i switch receives a call as diverted. If the switch receives the
calling line identity (CLI) and original called address (OCA), the switch bills
the call to the OCA number. The CLG_NO field of the ICAMA record is
OCA. If the switch receives only the OCA, the switch bills the call to the
OCA number. The CLG_NO field of the ICAMA record is OCA. If the
switch receives only the CLI, the switch bills the call to the CLI number.
The CLG_NO field of the ICAMA record is CLI.

NTX660AA
International Feature Processing Environment (FPE)–Basic
BC2286 Subscriber Activation
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX660AA
BC2286
Feature name
Subscriber Activation
Description
BC2286 provides the call processing functions and utilities required to allow
subscribers to activate, deactivate, and query the status of international
features. This allows subscribers to control features such as Call Diversion
(CDIV) and Abbreviated Dialing (ADL) by dialing feature-specific codes.
The feature codes are specified by the operating company.
BCS history
A unique code for each feature must be datafilled in table ACCODE.
The International Feature Processing Environment (IFPE) must be present.
Datafill
Table Description
ACHEAD, These tables are added to process the translation from the
ACCODE, and dialed code to the feature.
ACRTE
Logs
This feature creates logs ISF100 and ISF101, which are generated when a
subscriber changes feature information (such as ADL lists) while the journal
file is inactive.

NTX662AA
Emergency Cut-off
BC2081 Emergency Cut-off
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
or

NTX662AA
BC2081
Feature name
Emergency Cut-off
Description
BC2081 allows the operating company to designate specific subscriber lines
as essential or non-essential, and restrict non-essential lines from originating
calls during periods of emergency. This ensures that resources are available
to handle essential calls.
BCS history
Emergency Cut-off (ECO) has no effect on existing calls.
• BF0979 International Line TAT
Datafill
Table Description
LENLINES ELN is added to datafill ECO as a line option.
Service orders
Service order commands can be used to assign ECO to a line.
Logs
This features creates log ECO110, which is generated when ECO is
activated or deactivated.
User interface
The command interpreter (CI) command ECO is added to activate and
deactivate the Emergency Cut-off feature.

NTX664AA
OMs in Erlangs
AE0033 OMs in Erlangs–Extended

AE0943 Active OMs in Erlangs
BC2060 OMs in Erlangs
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX664AA
AE0033
Feature name
OMs in Erlangs – Extended
Description
AE0033 provides the capability to display operational measurements (OM)
usage counts in tenths of erlangs (deci-erlangs) instead of hundred call
seconds (CCS), as required for the Caribbean expansion program (CEP).
Counts are converted to CCS before they are transferred from the active
registers to the holding registers at the end of the measurement period.
This feature expands on feature BC2060 (OMs in Erlangs) which
implemented the first stage of the conversion to CCS.
BCS history
This feature is available to all international offices.
The OMSHOW ACTIVE command is not supported.
Measurements are shown in either deci-erlangs or CCS.
No units are indicated in the OM output.
Register values are displayed in deci-erlangs when parameter
OMINERLANGS in table OFCOPT is set to Yes; otherwise they are
displayed in CCS.
If parameter OMINERLANGS in table OFCOPT is set to Yes, registers
CCBTRU2 and CPTRU2 in the CP OM group show counts of zero when the
SLUDINFO command is issued.
For correct conversion of counts in the UTR group, the parameter
OMINERLANGS must be set to Yes within the first 5 min of the
measurement period.
This feature applies to the registers in the following OM groups:
CMC CP CP2 CPU
CSL ENG640M1 TRA250M1 TRA125M1
TRA125M2 EXT FTRQ IOC
MTA MTU NMC PM
PMTYP RCF RLCMIS TS
TFCANA UTR

NTX664AA
AE0943
Feature name
Active OMs in Erlangs
Description
AE0943 provides the capability to display usage counts in the ACTIVE
class of operational measurements (OM) registers in tenths of erlangs
(deci-erlangs) instead of hundred call seconds (CCS). Usage counts in both
ACTIVE and HOLDING registers can now be displayed in either
deci-erlangs or CCS.
BCS history
OMs are displayed using the OMSHOW command.
displayed in CCS.
When register values are in deci-erlangs, the unit of measurement is
indicated in the display; when the values are in CCS, no unit is indicated.
This feature applies to the registers in the following OM groups:
ANN CF3P CF6P CMC
CPU CSL C7LINK1 C7LINK3
C7LKSET CSROUTE C7TRESET DCM
DDU IOC LMD MTA
MTU NMC PCMCARR PM
PMTYP SLU TFCANA TOPSQS
TRK TOPSUSE TROUBLEQ TS
UTR

NTX664AA
BC2060
Feature name
OMs in Erlangs
Description
BC2060 provides the capability to display operational measurements (OM)
usage counts in tenths of erlangs (deci-erlangs) instead of hundred call
seconds (CCS), as required for the Caribbean expansion program (CEP).
Counts are converted to CCS before they are transferred from the active
registers to the holding registers at the end of the measurement period.
BCS history
The OMSHOW ACTIVE command is not supported.
Measurements are shown in either deci-erlangs or CCS.
No units are indicated in the OM output.
displayed in CCS.
Datafill
Table Description
OFCOPT Parameter OMINERLANGS is added to indicate whether values

are to be displayed in deci-erlangs or CCS.
This feature applies to the registers in the following OM groups: ANN,
CF3P, CF6P, LMD, and TRK.

NTX665AA
Semi-permanent Connections–Basic
AC0256 Semi-permanent Connections

BC2080 Semi-permanent Connections–Local
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX665AA
AC0256
Feature name
Semi-permanent Connections
Description
AC0256 allows the operating company to set up a semi-permanent
connection (SPC). The connection remains in place until it is taken down by
the operating company. The following types of connections are supported:
• line to line
• line to trunk
• trunk to line
• trunk to trunk
This feature also implements the SPC audit, which monitors the state
(connected or disconnected) of the SPCs and attempts to set up or take down
connections that are in the wrong state.
BCS history
Test-line tests cannot be run on SPC lines.
SPC lines are available for SPC calls only.
SPC lines cannot be Hunt Group members.
Toll Break-in (TBI) is not available on SPC lines.
SPC lines can only be assigned and deleted through datafill.
Datafill
Table Description
LINEATTR SPC is added to the range of values in field LCC to specify SPC
as a line option.
LNSIGSYS NTLS14 is added to the range of values in field SIGTYP to

define the signaling system for SPC.
SPCCON This table is added to allow operating company personnel to

define SPCs.
TRKGRP SPC is added to the range of values in field GRPTYP to datafill

a trunk for SPC.

NTX665AA
AC0256
This feature creates operational measurements (OM) group SPC, which
contains the following registers:
• SPCNTCAT increments when operating company personnel requests
that an SPC be set up.
• SPCNTCSU increments when an SPC is set up successfully.
• SPDISCTC increments when an SPC is disconnected at the request of
the operating company.
• SPCNAUAT increments when the SPC audit detects an SPC that should
be in place but is not connected, and attempts to set up the connection.
• SPCNAUSU increments when the SPC audit succeeds in setting up the
connection.
• SPDISCAU increments when the SPC audit detects an SPC that should
be disconnected and takes the connection down.
Logs
• SPC100 is generated when an SPC is set up.
• SPC101 is generated when an SPC is taken down through datafill.
• SPC102 is generated when an attempt to set up an SPC fails. The log
report gives the cause of the failure.

NTX665AA
BC2080
Feature name
Semi-permanent Connections – Local
Description
BC2080 allows the operating company to set up a semi-permanent
connection (SPC). The connection remains in place until it is taken down by
the operating company. The following types of connections are supported:
• line to line
• line to trunk
• trunk to line
• trunk to trunk
• line on an international remote line concentrating module (IRLCM) to
line on an IRLCM
• line to line on an IRLCM
• line on an IRLCM to line
• trunk to line on an IRLCM
• line on an IRLCM to trunk
This feature also implements the SPC audit, which monitors the state
(connected or disconnected) of the SPCs and attempts to set up or take down
connections that are in the wrong state.
BCS history
Test-line tests cannot be run on SPC lines.
SPC lines are available for SPC calls only.
SPC lines cannot be Hunt Group members.
Toll Break-in (TBI) is not available on SPC lines.
SPC lines can only be assigned and deleted through datafill.

NTX665AA
BC2080
Datafill
Table Description
LINEATTR SPC is added to the range of values in field LCC to specify SPC
as a line option.
LNSIGSYS NTLS14 is added to the range of values in field SIGTYP to

specify the line signaling type for SPC.
SPCCON This table is added to allow operating company personnel to

define SPCs.
TRKGRP SPC is added to the range of values in field GRPTYP to datafill

a trunk for SPC.
TRKSGRP SPC is added to the range of values in field LNOGSSI to

specify the line signaling type for SPC.
Logs
• SPC100 is generated when an SPC is set up.
• SPC101 is generated when an SPC is taken down through datafill.
• SPC102 is generated when an attempt to set up an SPC fails. The log
report gives the cause of the failure.

NTX666AA
Semi-permanent Connections–Local
AC0256 Semi-permanent Connections

BC2080 Semi-permanent Connections–Local
BCS history
number

NTX665AA Semi-permanent Connections–Basic
or

NTX666AA
AC0256
Feature name
Semi-permanent Connections
Description
This feature implements semi-permanent connections (SPC). An SPC is a
connection that is defined and set up or taken down by operating company
personnel. The subscriber has no control over SPC set up or take down, but
does have the use of the speech or data path provided by the SPC. An SPC
is used in situations such as the setting up of computer link connections.
Line signaling type NTLS14, that ignores signaling, is introduced.
Signaling is not required because set up and take down are controlled by the
operating company.
BCS history
Lines datafilled as SPC do not support line features.
SPC agents are not available for any calls other than SPC calls.
SPCs cannot be hunt group members.
An SPC cannot be metered. The administration is responsible for
determining billing for an SPC.
This feature relies on line and trunk audits to update the status of SPC line
and trunk agents.
Datafill
Table Description
LINEATTR Line class code (LCC) SPC is added to define a line as SPC.
LNSIGSYS Signaling type NTLS14 is added for SPC.
SPCCON This new table is used to define semi-permanent connections.
An SPC is attempted by datafilling field CONNECT as Y (yes).
An SPC disconnection is attempted by datafilling field
CONNECT as N (no).
TRKGRP Trunk group type SPC is added to define a trunk group as SPC.

NTX666AA
AC0256
The operational measurements (OM) group SPC is added to measure the
number of successful and unsuccessful SPC attempts. The following events
are pegged, for each office, in the indicated OM registers (in parentheses):
• Connection attempt (SPCNTCAT). Administration has requested the
establishment of an SPC by table control.
• Successful connection (SPCNTCSU). An administration-initiated SPC
attempt has been successful.
• Administration disconnection (SPCDISCTC). An SPC has been
disconnected by an administration request.
• Audit connection recovery (SPCNAUAT). An audit has detected an
SPC that should be connected and is not, and has attempted to establish
the connection.
• Audit recovery successful (SPCNAUSU). An audit has successfully
established an SPC that should of been connected and was not.
• Audit disconnection (SPCDISCAU). An audit has detected an SPC that
should have been idle and was not, and has returned the SPC to the idle
state.
Logs
The following logs are implemented to provide information on SPCs:
• The SPC100 (SPC activation) log indicates that an SPC has been
activated.
• The SPC101 (SPC deactivation) log indicates that an SPC has been
taken down due to a datafill change.
• The SPC101 (SPC failure) log indicates that an SPC has been taken
down due to a failure. This log includes the reason for the failure.

NTX666AA
BC2080
Feature name
Semi-permanent Connections – Local
Description
This feature provides the table control needed to datafill semi-permanent
connections (SPC) and to enable background audits to control these
connections. An SPC is one that can only be set up or taken down by
operating company personnel. The subscriber has no control over SPC set
up or take down.
Line signaling type NTLS14, that ignores signaling, is introduced.
Signaling is not required because set up and take down are controlled by the
operating company.
New line class code SPC and trunk group type SPC are introduced by this
feature.
BCS history
SPC applies to the following types of (telephony) agents:
• line to line
• line to trunk
• trunk to line
• trunk to trunk
• line on international remote line concentrating module (IRLCM) to line
on IRLCM
• line to line on IRLCM
• line on IRLCM to line
• trunk to line on IRLCM
• line on IRLCM to trunk
The FRLS command from the MAP (maintenance and administration) TTP
level does not release SPC trunks.
Only agents datafilled as SPC can be members of an SPC through table
SPCCON.
Lines whose line class code (LCC) is SPC cannot be detected with the
command OUT in the Service Order System (SERVORD).
Testline tests cannot be run on SPC agents.

NTX666AA
BC2080
SPC agents are not available for calls other than SPC calls.
Datafill
Table Description
SPCCON This new table allows SPC to be datafilled.

TRKGRP Trunk group type SPC is added to field GRPTYPE.
LINEATTR Line signaling type SPC is added to field LNOGSSI.
LNSIGSYS Line signalling type NTLS14 (for SPC) is added to field SIGTYP.
Each time a connection between two SPC agents is attempted, group OTS is
incremented. Failures to make a connection or disconnection are also
incremented. Group TRK is incremented for outgoing connections.
Logs
The following new logs are created by this feature:
• The SPC activation log (SPC100) reports the activation of an SPC and
gives the agents involved.
• The SPC deactivation log (SPC101) reports the taking down of an SPC
because of a datafill change.
• The SPC failure log (SPC102) reports the failure of an SPC because of
an event other than a datafill change. This log includes a reason field
that indicates the cause of the connection failure.

NTX667AA
Printed Meter Check
AE0055 Printed Meter Check
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX494AA Automatic Call Recording
or
NTX498AA CEP Call Recording (replaced by NTX494AA)

NTX667AA
AE0055
Feature name
Printed Meter Check
Description
AE0055 provides the capability to generate a detailed report of all outgoing
calls on a subscriber’s line that were answered. The report can be useful in
cases where a subscriber queries a billing item or the administration suspects
that faulty equipment may be causing incorrect billing.
BCS history
Printed Meter Check (PMC) should be assigned to no more than 64 lines at
one time.
All answered calls, both metered and non-metered, are logged on a line with
PMC.
PMC is available as a line option in international local offices only.
• Denied Termination (DT)
• Emergency Cut-off (ECO)
• Faultsman’s Ringback
• Hot Line (HL)
• Warm Line (WL)
Datafill
Table Description
FEATCHG PMC is added to the range of values in field FEATID to specify

feature charges for PMC.
LENLINES PMC is added to the range of values in field OPTLIST to specify

PMC as a line option.

NTX667AA
AE0055
Service orders
Service order commands are used to assign and delete the PMC line option
and to query the status of PMC on the line.
Logs
This feature creates log PMC100, which is generated when an outgoing call
on a PMC line is answered.
This feature adds the metering option for PMC.

NTX668AA
Insert Tone on Coin Phone Termination
AE0057 Insert Tone on Coin Phone Terminations
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX668AA
AE0057
Feature name
Insert Tone on Coin Phone Terminations
Description
AE0057 implements a payphone recognition tone for the Caribbean
expansion program (CEP). The tone is given to the operator when a call
terminating on a coin phone is answered.
BCS history
This feature requires the following card:
• NT6X43FA (message interface)

The tone is applied on all trunk-to-line calls terminating on a coin line.

NTX669AA
International Network Management
AC0132 International Network Management
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX669AA
AC0132
Feature name
International Network Management
Description
AC0132 implements the Group controls aspect of Network Management
(NWM). NWM allows network managers to supervise and control the flow
of traffic through an office.
The following types of controls are available to international offices:
• Cancel To (CANT), which limits calls over selected two-way and
outgoing trunk groups
• Cancel From (CANF), which limits calls overflowing from selected
two-way and outgoing trunk groups
• Directional Reservation Equipment (DRE), which reserves a number of
idle trunks in a group for incoming traffic and routes outgoing traffic to
the next trunk in the chain
• Incoming Trunk Busy (ITB), which restricts incoming traffic to a switch
by selectively removing from service a percentage of incoming trunks
that have the Remote-Make-Busy capability
• Protective Reservation Equipment (PRE), which is similar to DRE,
except that PRE can be applied to both two-way and outgoing trunks.
• Skip Control (SKIP), which limits traffic offered to selected two-way
and outgoing trunk groups
• Selective Trunk Reservation (STR), which monitors the traffic in an
outgoing trunk group and reroutes or blocks calls if the traffic level
becomes too high
The controls are applied by entering GRPCTRL commands at the NWM
level of the MAP (maintenance and administration) display.
BCS history
Parameter NWM_STR_CTRL in table OFCOPT must be set to Y (yes) to
use the STR control.
Existing register DEFLDCA in group TRK increments when a call is
rerouted or blocked by the CANT, DRE, PRE, SKIP, or STR Group control.

NTX738AC
Switch Performance Monitoring System
Feature package NTX738AC
AL1719 ENET — SPMS For ENET OMS

AG1494 DPMS Auto Report Generation and Outage Index
Separation
AG1495 SPMS Enhancements II
AG0353 Network Based SPMS Study
AG0346 Packaging of SPMS as Telco Optional Feature
AG0469 SPMS Enhancement
BCS history
number
NTX000AA Bilge
Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i NTX738AC–1

NTX738AC
AG1926
Feature name
Inclusion of CCS7 into SPMS
Description
AG1926 provides new indices to the Switch Performance Monitoring
System (SPMS) that report on the performance of Common Channel
Signaling 7 (CCS7) components. These components include the message
transfer part (MTP), the signaling connection control part (SCCP), the trunk
user part (TUP), and CCS7-specific hardware.
The SPMS provides operating companies with information on the
performance of their switch. SPMS generates a report that describes how
well the switch is operating, at various levels of detail.
BCS history
Datafill
Table Description
SPMSIDX 22 tuples added to table
SPMSTXT 22 indexes added to table
SPMSMTD 22 month-to-day registers added to table
SPMSRSLT number of tuples increased in table
Table SPMSIDX requires an additional 66 words of data store.

Table SPMSTXT requires an additional 251 words of data store.
NTX738AC–2 297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

NTX738AC
AL1719
Feature name
ENET—SPMS for ENET OMs
Description
AL1719 provides performance monitoring of the enhanced network (ENET)
as part of the Switch Performance Monitoring System (SPMS) for the
DMS-100 and Meridian SL-100 families of switches. In offices equipped
with ENET, this feature introduces 12 SPMS indexes to replace indexes for
the junctored network (JNET).
BCS history
In offices equipped with ENET, the following JNET indexes are replaced:
• NMCPERF
• NMCERR
• NMCFLT
• NMCUOUT
• NMLNKPF
• NMMSGLPF
• NMSPCHPF
• NMMSGLER
• NMSPCHER
• NMMSGLFL
• NMSPCHFL
• NMPTOUT
• NMJCTOUT
ENET indexes for SPMS are valid only for ENET.

ENET is part of SuperNode switch capability and cannot be equipped in an
NT40 office.

NTX738AC
AL1719
Datafill
Table Description
SPMSIDX Twelve accumulation registers are added to field MEASURE.
Twelve accumulation registers are added to field NORMAL.
Field CHILDREN is expanded to list up to 60 SPMS

accumulation registers.
SPMSTXT Field TXTKEY is expanded to provide a list of SPMS indexes as
defined in table SPMSIDX.
Field TEXT is expanded to list up to 10 SPMS accumulation

registers.
Tables SPMSIDX and SPMSTXT increase data store by approximately

500 bytes.
User interface
For offices equipped with ENET, command DISPLAY in directory SPMS is
modified to display ENET indexes rather than network module indexes.

NTX750AC
ISDN Basic Access
This feature package applies to ISDN offices.
Feature package NTX750AC contents
AC0602 LCME Drawer Task Enhancements

AC0603 LCME ISDN Loop Maintenance Interface
AC0604 LCME TDM Dump and Restore Procedures
AL1588 Metallic Testing for 2B1Q Loops
AL1316 No Test Trunk Access for ISDN Lines
AC0568 XPM 1B1Q Loop Maintenance Interface
AL1589 2B1Q Diagnostic and Performance Reporting
AL1314 2B1Q Loop and TDM Connection Provisioning
AL1388 2B1Q Loop Maintenance Base
AC0571 2B1Q XPM TDM Connection Support
AJ0428 ACD Agent Position Using MFT
AJ0431 Dynamic Protocol Version Control
AC0356 Increase Maximum Number for ISDN Terminal Profiles
AQ0778 ISDN XPM Robustness and Memory Recovery
AJ0426 Name and Reason Display for ISDN Functional Calls
AC0380 Table Control for ISDN BRA Functional Signaling
AC0452 XPM ISDN Call Capacity Expansion
AC0094 Bearer Capability for ISDN
AC0095 CC Software for XPM Special Connections
BC2233 IAC Warm SwAct for ISDN Call Processing
AC0096 ISDN Call Progress Indication
AC0139 ISDN Multiple Terminals Call Processing
AC0092 ISDN Terminal Test and Configuration
BF0947 ISLM Enhancement
AC0097 Multiple Terminals per ISDN Loop
—continued—

NTX750AC
Feature package NTX750AC contents (continued)
AC0098 Service Orders for ISDN Terminals

AC0366 CC BCS SwAct Support for the LTCI
AC0530 D-Channel Link Fault Handling
AC0368 DCH Q.921 Frame Routing
AL0956 DCH Sparing Maintenance
AC0531 DCH Sparing XPM Support
AL1389 Enhanced DCH Loader
AC0302 ISDN HDLC Device R8071 Interface
AC0289 ISDN LTC ISP Loader
AC0290 ISDN LTC ISP ROM Base and Diagnostic
AC0292 ISDN LTC PM Maintenance I
AC0301 ISDN LTC/ISP Communications
AL1296 ISG Performance MAP Display
AL1322 ISG Performance Tools
AC0574 ISP/DCH R8071 Audit
AC0575 LTCI—Datafill Enhancements
AC0576 LTCI—ISDN BRA Overload Controls
AC0487 LTCI—ISP Audit Enhancements
AC0476 LTCI—ISP/DCH Base Enhancements and Tools
AC0475 LTCI—OM Collection and Reporting
AC0445 LTCI ISDN Loop Expansion
AC0528 LTCI Trunks and UTR Integration
AC0371 LTCI Warm SwAct
AC0519 CC XPM Support of POTS on LCMI
AC0214 ISDN LCM Call Processing I
AC0295 ISDN LCM Call Processing II
AL0483 ISDN LCM CC Maintenance II
AC0294 ISDN LCM CC Maintenance III
AC0215 ISDN LCM Line Maintenance Support
—continued—

NTX750AC
AC0216 ISDN LCM Maintenance XPM Support

AC0298 ISDN LCM (LCMI) Software
AC0180 ISDN LCM Base Load Development
AC0296 ISDN LCM C-Channel Interface Enhancements
AC0458 LCMI Processor Upgrade Support
AC0520 LCMI Software for POTS Support
AL0596 BERT for ISDN Basic Access Loops
AL1914 CC Layer 2/3 Protocol Monitoring Development
AL1668 CSM Support for SPECCONN Network Connection
AQ0672 DCH Overload Controls
AL2280 DCH Performance OMs (CC)
AL2279 DCH Performance OMs (XPM)
AL2541 Enhanced ISP Integration in LTCI
AL0382 Identification of ISDN ISLC-1B in DMS Architecture
AL0165 ISDN LCM Maintenance
AL0944 ISDN Loop Maintenance Enhancements
AL0167 ISDN Loop Maintenance I
AL0087 ISDN Loop Maintenance II
AL0381 ISDN Loop Maintenance Robustness
AL0164 ISDN LTC Maintenance
AC0093 ISDN ST Maintenance
AL1585 ISDN Support on LTC
AL1666 ISDN Support on LTC II
AL2539 ISG Channel Maintenance Enhancement
AQ0788 Layer 2 High Protocol Abnormality Rate (CC)
AC0634 ISP/DCH Diagnostic Enhancements
AQ0789 Layer 2 High Protocol Abnormality Rate (XPM)
AQ0882 Layer 2 High Protocol Rate (XPM)
AQ0671 Layer 2/3 Protocol Monitoring Development
—continued—

NTX750AC
AL1629 Link Reconfiguration for XPMs with Special Connections

AL1040 Loop Maintenance for ISDN S/T Line Card
AL0680 Loop Maintenance for ISDN 1C Line Card
AL1667 LTC Perform Tool Enhancements for ISDN
AL0166 New LTP Level for Data Lines
AL0735 Optical BRA Line Card Maintenance
AL0955 S/T Line Card Diagnostic
AL0942 S/T Line Card XPM Interface
AL1294 SPECCONN Network Connections
AL2542 Unsolicited Messages and LAPD Cleanup
AC0266 DCH Enhancements for ISDN Functional Signaling
AC0269 Service Parameters for PRA
BF0943 ISDN D-Channel Handler Robustness Enhancement
BC2096 ISDN IAC DCH Maintenance Support
AF2071 LRU CC Static Data
AJ0912 BRA Meridian Feature Transparency: MTCE and CP
Integration
AJ0913 BRA Meridian Feature Transparency: XPM Support for
MTCE and CP
AL1674 Layer 1 Performance Monitoring for 2B1Q Loops
AC0601 LCME Connection and TDM Control
AC0569 LCME Diagnostics
AC0567 LCME Drawer Control Task and Hardware Interface
AQ0696 POTS/EBS/Datapath on LCME
AQ0695 XPM Support for LCME POTS & 2B1Q L1 Performance
AC0551 2B1Q LCME Base Load Development
AC0552 2B1Q LCME CC Maintenance I
AC0570 2B1Q LCME CC Maintenance II
—continued—

NTX750AC
AC0553 2B1Q LCME XPM Support

AQ0884 Dial-up B-channel Loopbacks
End
BCS history
BCS35—AL1674 and AQ0884 added
number
NTX000AA Bilge
NTX100AA Integrated Business Networks—Basic (IBN)
NTX106AA IBN—Proprietary Business Set
NTX108AA IBN—Display Features
NTX142AA DS-1 64-kbps Clear
NTXR34AA XPM Plus Basic
NTXR42AA Firmware Downloading

NTX750AC
AL1674
Feature name
Layer 1 Performance Monitoring for 2B1Q Loops
Description
AL1674 provides the central control (CC) and enhanced ISDN line
concentrating module (LCME) software required to implement layer 1
surveillance of ISDN two-binary one-quaternary (2B1Q) subscriber loops.
BCS history
This feature requires an LCME equipped with the following hardware:
• NTBX27AA (ISDN 2B1Q line card)
• NTBX26AA (ISDN S/T line card)
• NTBX34BA (processor card)

This feature does not support monitoring of the NTBX25AB and
NTBX04AA (ISDN line cards).
Only NTBX27AA (ISDN line card) loops datafilled on host LCME
peripherals are supported. Performance monitoring is not supported for
loops datafilled on LCME variants, such as a small remote unit (SRU).
This feature does not support test interface functions described in Technical
Advisory TA-TSY-001025, ‘‘Generic Requirements for Operations
Applications Messages for Access and Testing of an ISDN Basic Rate
Access Line.”
This feature does not support the operation system or network element
(OS/NE) interface described in Technical Reference TR-TSY-000821,
‘‘Operations Technology Generic Requirements: Network Maintenance:
Transport Surveillance—Additional Transport and Transport-Based
Surveillance.”
The S/T interface synchronization (T-SYNC) reporting provided by this
feature for S/T ISDN line cards (ISLC) is for LCME peripherals only and
may require up to 8 min to report changes in T-SYNC status.
User interface command L1THRSH only applies to 2B1Q loops on LCMEs.
User interface command L1BLMALM only applies to 2B1Q and S/T loops
on LCMEs.
Entries in table BLMTHRSH may be modified but not added or deleted.

NTX750AC
AL1674
Entries in table LNTHRSH can be made only for 2B1Q or S/T ISDN loops
residing on LCMEs, and must have at least one non-default field. Entries
for the S/T loop are allowed only if fields PERF and TSYNC are set to
non-default.
Datafill
Table Description
BLMTHRSH Table is added to specify threshold combinations for 2B1Q

loops.
LNTHRSH Table is added to datafill threshold values for individual 2B1Q

and S/T loops.
This feature modifies office parameters LCDI_SYNC_BURST and

LCDI_SYNC_DELAY in table ENG, and adds the following office
parameters to table VAR:
• ISDN_LOSS_OF_SYNC_WORD_ALARM
• ISDN_LOSS_OF_SIG_NO_DGASP_ALARM
• ISDN_LOSS_OF_SIG_DGASP_ALARM
• ISDN_NT1_TEST_MODE_ALARM
• ISDN_T_SYNC_LOST_ALARM
• ISDN_PERFORMANCE_MON_ALARM
• LCDI_SYNC_BURST
• LCDI_SYNC_DELAY
This feature increases program store by a maximum of 1 kbyte.

Logs
This feature adds logs LINE147 and LINE148, and modifies logs LINE131,
LINE145, and PM181.
Log LINE131 is generated when the thresholds set for a particular loop are
exceeded.
Log LINE145 is generated upon detecting a loss or recovery of signal at
layer 1 of the 2B1Q U-loop.
Log LINE147 is generated when the NT1 test mode indication changes.
Log LINE148 is generated upon detecting a mismatch between the basic line
monitoring (BLM) data stored on the 2B1Q line card and the data stored in
the CC for a particular loop.

NTX750AC
AL1674
Log PM181 is generated when the LCME does not load performance
monitoring data from the CC.
User interface
This feature adds MAP commands L1THRSH and L1BLMALM in
directory LTPISDN.

NTX750AC
AL2539
Feature name
ISG Channel Maintenance Enhancement
Description
AL2539 provides an interface between the ISDN service group (ISG)
channels and the system recovery controller (SRC). This interface allows
the SRC to coordinate the recovery of the ISG channels after a core restart in
the computing module (CM) or a no-restart CM warm switch of activity
(SwAct). The SRC reduces the time and resources required for a system
recovery.
This feature also provides a procedure to system busy (SysB) and return to
service (RTS) the ISG basic rate interface (BRI) channels based on the
DS30A link state.
BCS history
User interface
This feature modifies commands ADD, DEL, and CHA in MAP directory
TABDIR.
This feature modifies MAP directory SODIR.

NTX750AC
AL2541
Feature name
LLM Enhancements
Description
AL2726 increases the robustness of the logical link manager (LLM) in
ISDN extended multiprocessor system (XMS)-based peripheral modules
(XPM), enabling the LLM to handle high messaging situations, such as that
experienced following a power outage. This feature attempts to take
recovery action when problems are encountered.
This feature also ensures that the MAP display accurately reflects loop states
and the status of terminal endpoint identifiers in the XPM.
BCS history
This feature requires ISDN XPMs equipped with the NTMX77AA and
NTBX01AB (processor cards).

This feature is available only in ISDN XPMs equipped with the
NTMX77AA and NTBX01AB processor card combination.
Datafill
This feature increases program store by a maximum of 2 kB.
Logs
This feature modifies log ISDN100 to show the logical terminal identifier
(LTI) along with the terminal endpoint identifier (TEI) of the terminal that
has lost service.

NTX750AC
AL2542
Feature name
Unsolicited Messages and LAPD Cleanup
Description
AL2542 enhances the layer 2 software in the D-channel handler (DCH) and
the ISDN signaling preprocessor (ISP) and enhanced ISP (EISP) of the
ISDN line trunk controller (LTCI) and line group controller (LGCI). This
enhancement is in compliance with specifications in the Bellcore technical
reference TR-TSY-000793 (ISDN D-Channel Exchange Access Signaling
and Switching Requirements, Layer 2).
This feature also creates an audit of the resources required for messaging in
the DCH and the ISP/EISP. The resources consist of the buffer pool used by
the ISDN link layer controller for message transmission and reception.
BCS history
This feature enhances the following features:
• AC0363—DCH Q.921 High-Level Design
• AC0367—LTCI Q.921 LAPD Base
• AC0574—ISP/DCH R8071 Audit
Datafill

NTX750AC
AL2726
Feature name
LLM Enhancements
Description
AL2726 increases the robustness of the logical link manager (LLM) in
ISDN extended multiprocessor system (XMS)-based peripheral modules
(XPM), enabling the LLM to handle high messaging situations, such as that
experienced following a power outage. This feature attempts to take
recovery action when problems are encountered.
This feature also ensures that the MAP display accurately reflects loop states
and the status of terminal endpoint identifiers in the XPM.
BCS history
This feature requires ISDN XPMs equipped with the NTMX77AA and
NTBX01AB (processor cards).

This feature is available only in ISDN XPMs equipped with the
NTMX77AA and NTBX01AB processor card combination.
Datafill
This feature increases program store by a maximum of 2 kB.
Logs
This feature modifies log ISDN100 to show the logical terminal identifier
(LTI) along with the terminal endpoint identifier (TEI) of the terminal that
has lost service.

NTX750AC
AQ0788
Feature name
Layer 2 High Protocol Abnormality Rate (CC)
Description
AQ0788 is part of the Bellcore technical reference (TR) compliance
program for the DMS-100 ISDN switch. This feature addresses central
control (CC) issues described in TR-TSY-00475 (Operations Technology
Generic Requirements: Network Maintenance: Transport Surveillance),
Issue 2, Revision 1, sections 5.4.5.2–3.
Specifically, this feature provides
• a base platform to report layer 2 protocol abnormality rates
• reporting on demand of layer 2 protocol abnormalities from the
ISDN-equipped extended multiprocessor system (XMS)-based
peripheral module (XPM)
• daily logging of lines experiencing high abnormality rates
• office parameters representing layer 2 thresholds for determining high
abnormality rates
• DMS MAP commands for accessing layer 1 and layer 2 data
BCS history
The following restrictions or limitations represent elements of
TR-TSY-00475 that are not addressed by this feature:
• protocol abnormalities are not recorded as described in section 5.4.5.3
• terminal endpoint identifier (TEI) and service access profile identifier
(SAPI) information is not presented with log information
• data cannot be queried for a 24-h period
• layer 3 support for MAP commands and data audits is not provided
• layer 2 information is not available from the digital packet network
(DPN) packet handler (DPN-PH) or from the DMS-PH
• only layer 2 information for the ISDN-equipped line trunk controller
(LTCI) or line group controller (LGCI) is presented in the DMS log
reports
• AQ0789—Layer 2 High Protocol Abnormality Rate (XPM)

NTX750AC
AQ0788
• AQ0882—Layer 2/3 High Protocol Rate (XPM)
AQ0788 also interacts with feature AL1914 (CC Layer 2/3 Protocol
Monitoring Development).
Datafill
The following office parameters are deleted from table OFCENG and added
to table OFCVAR:
• DAILY_ISDN_LAYER2_PEG_AUDIT_TIME
• LAYER2_PEGS_THRESHOLD_LEVEL
The following office parameters are added to table OFCVAR:

• LAYER2_SAPI0_ABN_PEGS_THLD
• LAYER2_SAPI16_ABN_PEGS_THLD
• LAYER2_SERVICE_DSRPT_THLD

Logs
This feature modifies logs ISDN201 and ISDN202 as follows:
• Log ISDN201 is generated at the conclusion of the daily layer 2 audit
• Log ISDN202 is generated when command RLAYER 2 is issued for a
posted line equipment number (LEN) at a MAP
This feature adds log ISDN203, which is generated at the conclusion of the
daily layer 2 audit.
User interface
This feature adds commands QLAYER and RLAYER to directory
LTPDATADIR at a MAP terminal.

NTX750AC
AQ0789
Feature name
Layer 2 High Protocol Abnormality Rate (XPM)
Description
program for the DMS-100 ISDN switch. This feature complies with section
TR-TSY-000821 Operations Technology Generic Requirements (OTGR):
Network Maintenance: Transport Surveillance—Additional Transport and
Transport-Based Surveillance and Additional Transport and Transport-Based
Surveillance Generic Requirements.
This feature provides the messaging base required for the following
activities in the layer 2 handling subsystem of the ISDN-equipped line trunk
controller (LTCI) and ISDN-equipped line group controllers (LGCI):
• detecting and counting abnormalities
• determining high abnormality rates
• reporting high abnormality rates
BCS history
This feature does not provide the complete layer 2 compliance as specified
in TR-TSY-000821 and TR-NWT-000821.
This feature builds upon feature AQ0671 (Layer 2/3 Protocol Monitoring
Development).
Datafill

NTX750AC
AQ0882
Feature name
Layer 2 High Protocol Rate (XPM)
Description
program for the DMS-100 ISDN switch. This feature provides the
following activities in the layer 2 handling subsystem of ISDN-equipped line
trunk controllers (LTCI) or line group controllers (LGCI):
• abnormality detection
• abnormality counting
• high abnormality rate determination
• high abnormality rate reporting
BCS history
This feature does not provide the complete layer 2 or layer 3 compliance as
specified in the Bellcore technical reference TR-TSY-000821 Operations
Technology Generic Requirements (OTGR): Network Maintenance:
Transport Surveillance—Additional Transport and Transport-Based
Surveillance and Additional Transport and Transport-Based Surveillance
Generic Requirements.
This feature builds on the message base provided by feature AQ0789 (Layer
2 High Protocol Abnormality Rate (XPM)).
D-channel handler (DCH) sparing actions clear the layer 2 protocol
abnormality pegs of the associated ISDN service group (ISG).
An activity switch (SwAct) of the LTCI or LGCI terminates current
reporting.
Datafill
This feature increases data store by a maximum of 4.5 Kbytes.

NTX750AC NTX750AC
AQ0884 AQ0884
Feature name
Dial-up B-channel Loopbacks
Description
AQ0884 provides the capability to test the quality of the B-channels of an
ISDN basic rate interface (BRI) line from the customer’s premises.
BCS history
The extended peripheral module (XPM) with a unified processor (UP) is the
only peripheral supporting this feature.
This feature does not provide the capability of testing private rate interface
(PRI) B-channels.
The loopback of the B-channel toward the customer’s equipment is applied
to the line card in the central office (CO).
The B-channel selected for test is the same channel selected for voice calls.
The loopback of the B-channel does not function in emergency stand-alone
(ESA) mode, and is supported on line trunk controllers (LTC) and line group
controllers (LGC).
This feature functions with enhanced line concentrating modules (LCME)
only.
The CLLI, T108ISDN, is reserved for the ISDN 108 test line call.
A maximum of one loopback is allowed for each ISDN loop.
Datafill
Office parameter T108ISDN_TIMEOUT_IN_MINUTES is added to table
OFCPARM to datafill the timeout range in m.
This feature increases data store by a maximum of 1 kbyte and increases

NTX885AB
Switch Path Diagnostics
This feature package applies to DMS-100, DMS-200, DMS-250, DMS-300,
International TOPS, IBN, ISDN, CCS7, LBR, NOS, DNX, BNM,
SOPEDIAL, REMOTES, TATS, and PDE offices.
AJ0473 ICTS Enhancements

AL0511 Integrity Check Traffic Simulator
AG1214 Netpath Automation
AL0154 Network Path Test Tool
AL1566 Path Verification Automation
AL0153 Scheduled Testing of DMS Network
AL0478 XPM Bit Error Rate Test
BCS history

number
NTX000AA Bilge

NTX885AB
AG1214
Feature name
NETPATH Automation
Description
AG1214 provides automation of feature AL0154 – Network Path Test Tool
(NETPATH) to perform fault isolation and verification on the network links
and components of the speech path. The following paths provide the inputs
for this feature: network logs, Integrity Check Traffic Simulator (ICTS),
Network Fabric (NETFAB) tests, and Bit Error Rate Performance (BERP)
tests.
BCS history
This feature supports the following network types only: NT5X13, NT7X27,
NT7X40, and NT8X11.
Network firmware must be at release 8 or greater.
If there is more than one fault on a path, the test is stopped at the first fault.
If there is no faulty component on a path, the link test is performed to check
the network links for new peripherals (XPM) only. To run the link test,
XPMs must be in the inservice state and a full path test is required.
Logs
Logs NET104 and NET105 are added by this feature. Log NET104 is
generated to provide a faulty card list or link information. Log NET105 is
generated when the AUTO test passes or is aborted.
User interface
The following commands are modified with the addition of an AUTO mode
test type: POST, DEFTEST, ALTTEST, and ALTTYPE.
Command DISP is modified to display the ON or OFF state of logs NET104
and NET105 and to display the threshold value of the failure count.
Command CARDLST is added at the NETPATH level of a MAP display.
Command SET is added to turn logs NET104 and NET105 ON or OFF in
AUTO mode.
Command SET also sets the threshold of the failure count when a
NETPATH test is not running.

NTX885AB
AJ0473
Feature name
Integrity Check Traffic Simulator (ICTS) Enhancements
Description
AJ0473 modifies the Integrity Check Traffic Simulator (ICTS) package
which provided a means of identifying network integrity problems in the
absence of traffic. This feature enables the Integrity Check Traffic
Simulator (ICTS) software package and the Network Fabric (NetFab)
software package to test trunk channels associated with new extended
peripheral modules (XPM) while the system is in service.
BCS history
Only trunk channels associated with XPMs are supported by this feature.
Integrity Check Traffic Simulator (ICTS) must be run during low traffic
hours to avoid interfering with call processing.
This feature interacts with the Network Fabric (NetFab) package.
User interface
Parameter XPM is added to command IOPTION to allow the XPM trunk or
line channel to be selected for ICTS testing. Parameter QUERY is added to
command IOPTION to display the XPM channel types that are currently
selected.

NTX885AB
AL1566
Feature name
Path Verification Automation
Description
AL1566 enables a scheduled Network Path (NETPATH) test to be
performed. Test data from the Integrity Check Traffic Simulator (ICTS),
inservice trunks, the Network Fabric Test (NetFab), Network Integrity
Analysis (NETINTEG), and Bit Error Rate Performance (BERP) is
extracted from the path buffers and submitted to the NETPATH test
automatically. A summary report is generated at the end of the test.
BCS history
NETPATH tests support the following types of networks: NT5X13,
NT7X27, NT7X40, and NT8X11. Network NT0X48 is not supported.
In order to perform the NETPATH tests, network firmware must be at
release 8 or greater.
Only the following signaling inservice trunks are supported by this feature:
outgoing trunks, incoming trunks with the Remote Make Busy feature, and
two-way trunks with the Remote Make Busy feature.
This feature interacts with the following features: Bit Error Rate
Performance (BERP), testing of inservice trunks, and automatic path testing
using the Integrity Check Traffic Simulator (ICTS), Network Integrity
Analysis (NETINTEG), and BERP features.
Logs
Log NET106 is added by this feature. It generates a daily status report of
the scheduled NETPATH tests. Logs NET104 and NET105 are modified by
this feature to include two test types: AUTO (automatic) and SCHDL
(scheduled).
User interface
The following CI commands are modified by this feature:
• POST is used to create and display a record with type SCHDL.
• DEFTEST defines the start and stop time of a scheduled test and
provides the option of testing INSV trunks.
• ALTTEST is used to modify the start time and stop time of a scheduled
test and provides the option of testing INSV trunks.

NTX885AB
AL1566
• DISP displays a scheduled test, the status of log NET105, and the
threshold value of the failure count.
• START activates and resumes scheduled NETPATH tests.
• STOP aborts a scheduled test temporarily or permanently.
• BUFPATH copies path data from the INPUT and FAULT buffers.
• CARDLST displays a full or faulty card list by copying from the FAULT
buffer.
• RESET resets the test results of a permanently stopped scheduled test.
• SET turns log NET105 ON or OFF.

DMS-100 Family
DMS-100i
Volume 1 of 3
Product Documentation–Dept. 3423

Nortel Networks
P.O. Box 13010
RTP, NC 27709–3010
Telephone: 1–877–662–5669
Electronic mail: cits@nortelnetworks.com
Copyright  1994–2000 Nortel Networks,
All Rights Reserved
NORTEL NETWORKS CONFIDENTIAL: The information
contained herein is the property of Nortel Networks and is
strictly confidential. Except as expressly authorized in writing
by Nortel Networks, the holder shall keep all information
contained herein confidential, shall disclose the information
only to its employees with a need to know, and shall protect the
information, in whole or in part, from disclosure and
dissemination to third parties with the same degree of care it
uses to protect its own confidential information, but with no less
than reasonable care. Except as expressly authorized in writing
by Nortel Networks, the holder is granted no rights to use the
information contained herein.
Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel
Networks reserves the right to make changes in design or
components as progress in engineering and manufacturing
may warrant.
Changes or modification to the DMS-100i without the express
consent of Nortel Networks may void its warranty and void the
users authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
NORTEL NETWORKS, the NORTEL NETWORKS LOGO, the
GLOBEMARK, HOW THE WORLD SHARES IDEAS,
UNIFIED NETWORKS, DMS, MAP, NORTEL, NORTHERN
TELECOM, NT, TOPS, and SUPERNODE are trademarks of
Nortel Networks.
Publication number: 297-1001-801i
Product release: BCS44.1i
Document release: Standard 09.01
Date: January 2000
Printed in the United States of America

DMS100 Feature Descrition V1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DMS100 Feature Descrition V1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

297-1001-801i

BCS44.1i Standard 09.01 January 2000

Publication number: 297-1001-801i

Copyright  1994–2000 Nortel Networks,

Printed in the United States of America

DMS-100 Family DMS100i Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i

Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i

About this document xxi

Feature impact summary table 1–1

DMS-100 Family DMS100i Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i

TA0442 –50 AJ0194 –54

297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

AR0127 –6 NC0322 –48

DMS-100 Family DMS100i Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i

BF0394 –44 BC1730 –25

297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

DMS-100 Family DMS100i Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i

297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

Feature Description Manual

NTX901AA –1 AG1973 –20

DMS-100 Family DMS100i Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i

AE0146 –5 AL1782 –25

297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

DMS-100 Family DMS100i Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i

AJ0804 –28 AJ1256 –11

297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

DMS-100 Family DMS100i Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i

TA0224 –17 NTXH70AA –1

297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

Feature Description Manual

DMS-100 Family DMS100i Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i

297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

DMS-100 Family DMS100i Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i

TA0354 –4 TA0529 –40

297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

About this document

When to use this document

How to identify the software in your office

Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i

or patch on the MAP (maintenance and administration position) terminal by

and pressing the Enter key.

and pressing the Enter key.

and pressing the Enter key.

and pressing the Enter key.

How this document is organized

297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

Feature package descriptions

If one of the sections listed above is absent from an individual feature

Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i

• feature name to feature number, package, and BCS

How reference documentation is organized

297-1001-451i Customer Data Schema

297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

Feature impact summary table

Feature information available

Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i

Feature information available (continued)

297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

Feature information available (continued)

Feature Description Manual Volume 1 of 3 BCS44.1i

Feature information available (continued)

297-1001-801i Standard 09.01 January 2000

Feature information available (continued)